703625
297
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/298
Pagina verder
SLC
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple
®
App store or Google
Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
Order no. P172 0138 13 Part no. 172 584 11 02 Edition B 2018
É1725841102~ËÍ
1725841102
SLC Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Logic7
®
is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the next
page.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
As at 28.03.2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For yourown safety and a
longer vehiclelife,follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them
couldresult in damage to the vehicleorpersonal
injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehiclemay vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reservesthe right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technicalfeatures
The equipment in yourvehiclemay therefore
differfrom that showninthe descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integralcomponents of the
vehicle:
R
DigitalOperator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicleatall
times. If you sell the vehicle, alwayspassall
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The DigitalOperator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on yourvehicle's equipment
and multimediasystem. It contains infor-
mative animations, individuallanguage
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manualand the afore-
mentioned digital media, you alsohave the
option to obtainacomprehensive printed
versionofthe Supplement for yourmulti-
mediasystem from yourauthorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
videseasy access to all information
regarding yourvehicleand multimediasys-
tem. It alsoprovides helpful animations,
interesting background information and a
widearrayofsearch options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp, you
can view all the information on yourvehicle
and multimediasystem via mobile Internet
or download it independently of network
access. Availablefor smartphones or tab-
lets.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp
may not yet be available in yourcountry.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada,Inc.
ADaimler Company
1725841102
É1725841102~ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22
Introduction........................................... 22
Operation ............................................... 22
Introduction ......................................... 23
Protecting the environment ...................23
Genuine Mercedes-Benzparts............... 23
Operator's Manual ................................. 24
Service and vehicle operation ................24
Operating safety .................................... 26
QR codes for the rescue card ................28
Data stored in the vehicle...................... 28
Informationoncopyright ....................... 30
At aglance ........................................... 31
Cockpit.................................................. 31
Instrument cluster................................. 32
Multifunctionsteering wheel................. 33
Center console...................................... 34
Overhead controlpanel .........................36
Doorcontrolpanel ................................. 37
Safety ................................................... 38
Panic alarm............................................ 38
Occupant safety .................................... 38
Childreninthe vehicle........................... 53
Pets in the vehicle................................. 56
Driving safety systems ........................... 56
Protection against theft .........................63
Opening and closing ........................... 65
SmartKey ............................................... 65
Doors ..................................................... 70
Trunk ..................................................... 72
Side windows ......................................... 74
Roof .......................................................77
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 84
Correct driver's seat position ................84
Seats ..................................................... 84
Steering wheel ....................................... 88
Mirrors................................................... 90
Memory function ................................... 93
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 95
Exterior lighting ..................................... 95
Interior lighting ...................................... 99
Replacing bulbs..................................... 99
Windshield wipers ................................ 101
Climate control ................................. 104
Overview of climate control systems ... 104
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 108
Setting the airvents ............................ 113
Drivingand parking .......................... 115
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle..... 115
Driving ................................................. 115
DYNAMIC SELECT button .................... 121
Automatictransmission....................... 122
Refueling ............................................. 129
Parking ................................................ 131
Driving tips.......................................... 134
Driving systems ................................... 138
On-board computer and displays .... 163
Important safety notes ........................ 163
Displays and operation ........................ 163
Menusand submenus ......................... 166
Displaymessages ................................ 177
Warning and indicator lamps .............. 202
Multimediasystem ........................... 211
Generalnotes ...................................... 211
Important safety notes ........................ 211
Function restrictions ............................ 211
Operating system ................................ 212
Stowageand features ...................... 219
Stowageareas ..................................... 219
Features.............................................. 221
Maintenanceand care ...................... 233
Engine compartment ........................... 233
Overview of the engine compartment .. 237
2
Contents
ASSYST PLUS...................................... 237
Care ..................................................... 238
Breakdownassistance ..................... 244
Where will Ifind...? .............................. 244
Flattire ................................................ 246
Battery (vehicle).................................. 251
Jump-starting ....................................... 253
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 256
Fuses ................................................... 258
Wheelsand tires ............................... 260
Important safety notes........................ 260
Operation............................................ 260
Winter operation.................................. 262
Tire pressure ....................................... 263
Loading the vehicle.............................. 271
All aboutwheelsand tires...................273
Changing awheel ................................ 280
Wheeland tire combinations ...............284
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 285
Technical data ................................... 288
Information regarding technical data ... 288
Vehicle electronics .............................. 288
Identification plates .............................289
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 290
Vehicle data ......................................... 295
Contents
3
1, 2, 3...
12 Vsocket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 179
Function/notes ................................ 57
Important safety notes .................... 57
Warninglamp .................................204
Accident
Automatic measuresafter an acci-
dent ................................................. 53
Activatingmedia mode
General notes ................................ 217
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 108
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 171
Display message ............................ 184
Function/notes ................................ 58
Active light function ............................ 97
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 63
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 59
Adaptive brake lights .......................... 60
Adaptive DampingSystem
Function/notes .............................149
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 189
Function/notes ................................ 97
Switching on/off .............................. 98
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 293
Address book
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Adjustingthe volume
Multimediasystem ........................ 212
Airbags
Deployment ..................................... 50
Display message ............................ 187
Front airbag (driver, front
passenger)....................................... 44
Head bag ......................................... 45
Important safety notes .................... 43
Introduction ..................................... 43
Knee bag .......................................... 44
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 45
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ...............................................
39
Si
de impact airbag .......................... 44
Airvents
Important safety notes .................. 113
Setting ...........................................113
Setting the blower output of the
AIRSCARFvents .............................114
Setting the center airvents ........... 113
Setting the sideair vents ...............113
Switching AIRSCARFon/off ............ 87
Air-conditioningsystem
see Climate control
AIRGUIDE ............................................. 81
AIRSCARF
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88
Switching on/off .............................. 87
AIRSCARF vents
Setting the blower output .............. 114
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 64
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 64
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 172
Setting the color (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 173
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 175
AMG sports suspension
(Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Function/notes .............................149
Anti-lockbraking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 223
Assistancedisplay (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................170
4
Index
Assistance menu(on-boardcom-
puter) .................................................. 170
ASSYSTPLUS
Displayingaservicemessage ........ 237
Hiding aservicemessage .............. 237
Resetting theserviceinterval dis-
play ................................................ 237
Service message ............................ 237
Special servicerequirements .........238
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 64
Function ...........................................64
Switching off the alarm .................... 64
ATTENTIONASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 171
Displaymessage ............................ 193
Function/notes............................. 158
Audiomenu(on-board computer) .... 168
Audiosystem
see Digital Operator's Manual
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
AUTO lights
Displaymessage ............................ 189
see Lights
Automatic car wash(care) ............... 238
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stopfunction) .................................... 119
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stopfunction) .......................... 119
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 95
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedalposition ............. 125
Changing gear............................... 125
Displaymessage ............................ 198
Drive program................................ 125
Drive programdisplay .................... 122
Driving tips.................................... 125
DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. 121
Emergency running mode.
............. 129
Eng
aging drive position .................. 124
Engaging neutral ............................ 123
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 123
Engaging reverse gear................... 123
Engaging the park position ............ 123
Gearshift recommendation ............ 128
Kickdown....................................... 125
Manualshifting .............................. 126
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ...... 175
Overview ........................................ 122
Problem (malfunction) ................... 129
Pulling away ................................... 118
Selector lever ................................ 122
Starting the engine ........................ 117
Steering wheelpaddleshifters ...... 126
Transmission position display ........ 122
Transmission positions .................. 124
Automatic transmissionemer-
gencymode ....................................... 129
B
Back button ....................................... 212
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 57
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 68
Important safety notes .................... 67
Replacing ......................................... 68
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 253
Displaymessage ............................ 191
Important safety notes .................. 251
Jump starting ................................. 253
Overview ........................................ 251
Belt
see Seatbelts
Beltwarning ......................................... 42
Blind SpotAssist
Activating/deactivating ................. 171
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Notes/function .............................. 159
Bluetooth
®
Searching for amobilephone ........ 215
Searching for amobilephone
(device manager)........................... 216
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Telephony ...................................... 215
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Index
5
Brake fluid
Displaymessage ............................ 184
Notes............................................. 293
Brake forcedistribution
see EBD (electronicbrake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Adaptive ........................................... 60
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 57
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59
BAS .................................................. 57
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 293
Displaymessage ............................ 179
EBD .................................................. 63
High-performance brake system .... 137
Important safety notes .................. 136
Maintenance .................................. 137
Parking brake ................................ 132
Riding tips...................................... 136
Warning lamp ................................. 204
Breakdownassistance
Reflective safety jacket.................. 244
Where will Ifind...? ........................ 244
see Flattire
see Towing away
Brightness control(instrument
clusterlighting) ................................... 32
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important noticefor retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 24
Calling up amalfunction
see Displaymessages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Carwash........................................ 238
Exhaustpipe.................................. 243
Exterior lights ................................ 242
Matte finish ................................... 240
Notes............................................. 238
Paint .............................................. 240
Power washer................................ 239
Rear viewcamera .......................... 242
Sensors ......................................... 242
Washing by hand ........................... 239
Wheels........................................... 241
Windows........................................ 241
Wiperblades.................................. 241
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 169
Centerconsole
Lower section .................................. 35
Upper section .................................. 34
Central locking
Automaticlocking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 173
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey)........ 65
Changingbulbs
Sidemarker lamps (rear) ............... 101
Child
Restraint system .............................. 55
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 56
On the front-passenger seat............ 55
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 56
Children
Specialseatbeltretractor ............... 54
Childreninthe vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 53
Cigarette lighter ................................ 223
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal........................... 242
Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 104
Automaticclimate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 106
Controlling automatically............... 109
Cooling with airdehumidification .. 108
Defrosting the windows................. 111
Defrosting the windshield .............. 110
Generalnotes ................................ 104
Indicatorlamp................................ 109
Information aboutusing auto-
maticclimate control
..................... 107
Ma
ximumcooling .......................... 111
Notesonusing the air-condition-
ing system ..................................... 105
6
Index
Overview of systems ......................104
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 112
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 109
Refrigerant ..................................... 294
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 295
Setting the airdistribution ............. 110
Setting the airvents ......................113
Setting the airflow ......................... 110
Setting the temperature ................ 109
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 112
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Switching residualheaton/off ...... 112
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 111
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 110
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 31
see Instrument cluster
Collapsiblespare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 286
see Emergency spare wheel
Combination switch ............................ 96
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 232
Calling up ....................................... 231
Setting ...........................................231
ConnectingaUSB device
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Consumptionstatistics(on-board
computer) .......................................... 166
Controller ...........................................212
Convenience closing feature .............. 76
Coolant(engine)
Checking the level......................... 235
Display message ............................ 190
Filling capacity ............................... 294
Important safety notes .................. 293
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ 175
Temperature gauge ........................ 164
Warning lamp ................................. 207
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright
............................................. 30
Corneringlight function
Display message ............................ 189
Function/notes ................................ 97
Cruisecontrol
Cruise control lever....................... 139
Deactivating ................................... 140
Display message ............................ 195
Driving system ............................... 138
Function/notes .............................138
Important safety notes .................. 139
Setting aspeed.............................. 139
Storing and maintaining current
speed............................................. 139
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 222
Important safety notes .................. 221
Customer AssistanceCenter
(CAC) ..................................................... 27
Customer Relations Department ....... 27
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 169
Daytime runninglamps
Display message ............................ 189
Function/notes ................................ 95
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 172
Declarations of conformity ................. 26
Decorative film
Cleaning instructions ..................... 240
Delayedswitch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 173
Interior lighting .............................. 173
Diagnosticsconnection ......................27
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................22
Introduction .....................................22
Digital speedometer .........................167
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 237
Index
7
Callingup(on-board computer) .....178
Driving systems .............................193
Engine ............................................ 190
General notes ................................ 177
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 178
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 202
Lights ............................................. 189
Safety systems .............................. 179
SmartKey ....................................... 201
Tires............................................... 196
Vehicle ...........................................198
DistancePilot DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 142
Calling up aspeed......................... 143
Cruise control lever ....................... 142
DisplayMessage ............................ 195
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 145
Driving tips.................................... 146
Function/notes............................. 140
Important safety notes .................. 141
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 145
Stopping ........................................ 144
Storing aspeed .............................. 143
Switching off .................................. 146
Warning lamp ................................. 209
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Tripodometer
Distance warning(warning lamp) .... 209
Distance warningfunction
Function/notes................................ 58
Doors
Automaticlocking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 173
Automaticlocking (switch) ............... 71
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey)....................................... 65
Control panel ................................... 37
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Emergency locking ........................... 72
Emergency unlocking ....................... 72
Important safety notes .................... 70
Opening (frominside)...................... 71
Overview .......................................... 70
Drinking and driving ......................... 134
Drive program
Automatictransmission................. 125
Display........................................... 122
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............... 175
Driver's door
see Doors
Drivingabroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 238
Drivingonf
loo
dedroads .................. 138
Drivingsafety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 58
Drivingsafety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57
ADAPTIVEBRAKE............................. 63
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59
Adaptive brake lights ....................... 60
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 57
Distance warning function ............... 58
EBD (electronicbrake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 63
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 60
Important safety information ........... 56
Overview .......................................... 56
Drivingsystem
AMG sports suspension
(Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ............... 149
Drivingsystems
Adaptive Damping System ............. 149
ATTENTIONASSIST ........................ 158
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 159
Cruise control ................................ 138
Displaymessage ............................ 193
DISTRONIC PLUS........................... 140
HOLD function ............................... 148
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 161
Lane Tracking package.................. 159
Parking Guidance ........................... 152
PARKTRONIC ................................. 149
Rear viewcamera .......................... 154
Drivingtips
Automatictransmission ................. 125
Brakes ........................................... 136
Break-in period.............................. 115
Distance PilotDISTRONIC ............. 146
Downhillgradient ........................... 136
Drinking and driving ....................... 134
Driving in winter ............................. 138
Driving on floodedroads ................ 138
8
Index
Driving on wetroads ...................... 138
Exhaustcheck ............................... 134
Fuel ................................................ 134
General.......................................... 134
Hydroplaning ................................. 138
Icy roadsurfaces ........................... 138
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 137
Snow chains .................................. 262
Subjecting brakes to aload........... 136
Wetroadsurface ........................... 136
DVD video
Operating (on-boardcomputer) ..... 169
seealsoDigitalOperator'sMan-
ual.................................................. 211
DYNAMIC SELECT button .................. 121
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 174
Function/notes................................ 89
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive............................. 90
Function/notes................................ 89
Switching on/off........................... 174
EBD (electronicbrake forcedistri-
bution)
Displaymessage ............................ 181
Function/notes................................ 63
ECOdisplay
Function/notes............................. 135
On-board computer....................... 166
ECOstart/stopfunction
Automaticengine start .................. 119
Automaticengine switch-off .......... 119
Deactivating/activating ................. 120
Generalinformation ....................... 119
Important safety notes .................. 119
Introduction ................................... 118
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automaticmeasures afteranacci-
dent ................................................. 53
Emergencyrelease
Driver's door.................................... 72
Trunk ............................................... 74
Vehicle............................................. 72
Emergencyspare wheel
Generalnotes ................................ 286
Important safety notes .................. 285
Removing ....................................... 286
Storage location ............................ 286
Stowing .......................................... 286
Technical data ............................... 286
EmergencyTensioningDevices
Activation ......................................... 50
Emissionscontrol
Service and warranty information .... 24
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 207
Displaymessage ............................ 190
ECO start/stop function ................ 118
Engine number ............................... 290
Irregularrunning ............................ 120
Jump-starting ................................. 253
Starting problems .......................... 120
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 118
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 118
Switching off .................................. 131
Tow-starting (vehicle)..................... 258
Engine electronics
Notes............................................. 288
Problem (malfunction) ................... 120
Engine oil
Adding ...........................................
235
Ad
ditives ........................................ 293
Checking the oillevel ..................... 234
Checking the oillevel using the
dipstick .......................................... 234
Displaymessage ............................ 191
Filling capacity ............................... 293
Generalnotes ................................ 292
Notesabout oilgrades................... 292
Notesonoil level/consumption .... 234
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ................ 175
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
ESP
®
(ElectronicStability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 175
Characteristics ................................. 61
Index
9
Deactivating/activating (except
SLC 43 AMG)................................... 61
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................. 62
Display message ............................ 179
Function/notes................................ 60
Generalnotes .................................. 60
Important safety information ........... 60
Warning lamp ................................. 205
ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction Sys-
tem) ...................................................... 60
Exhaustcheck ................................... 134
Exhaustpipe (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 243
Exterior lighting
Setting options ................................ 95
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 91
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 92
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 174
Folding in/out (automatically)......... 91
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 91
Outofposition (troubleshooting)..... 92
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 93
Storing the parking position ............. 92
Eyeglassescompartment ................. 220
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 213
Filler cap
see Refueling
Fillingcapacities(Technical data) ... 290
First-aidkit ......................................... 244
Flat tire
MOExtended tires.......................... 247
Preparing the vehicle..................... 246
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 247
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ........................................... 232
Frequencies
Mobilephone ................................. 288
Two-way radio ................................ 288
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 292
Consumption statistics .................. 166
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 166
Displaying the range...................... 166
Driving tips.................................... 134
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Grade (gasoline)............................ 291
Important safety notes .................. 291
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
Refueling ........................................ 129
Tank content/reserve fuel............. 291
Fuelfillerflap
Opening ......................................... 130
Fuellevel
Calling up the range(on-board
computer) ...................................... 166
Fueltank
Capacity ........................................ 291
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
Fuseallocationchart (vehicletool
kit) ...................................................... 245
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 258
Before changing ............................. 258
Fusebox in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 259
Fusebox in the trunk ..................... 259
Important safety notes .................. 258
G
Garagedooropener
Clearing the memory ..................... 231
Generalnotes ................................ 228
Important safety notes .................. 228
Opening/closing the garagedoor..230
Problems whenprogramming ........230
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 229
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 229
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ......... 175
Genuine parts ...................................... 23
Glove box ...........................................219
10
Index
Google™ Local Search
see alsoDigital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
H
Hazard warning lamps
Displaymessage............................ 201
Switching on/off.............................. 97
Headbags
Displaymessage ............................ 186
Operation ......................................... 45
Headlevel heating(AIRSCARF) .......... 87
Headrestraints
Adjusting ......................................... 86
see NECK-PROheadrestraints
Headlamps
see Automaticheadlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
Highbeamflasher ............................... 96
High-beam headlamps
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Replacing bulbs............................. 100
Switching on/off.............................. 96
Hillstart assist .................................. 118
HOLDfunction
Activating ....................................... 148
Activation conditions ..................... 148
Deactivating ................................... 148
Displaymessage ............................ 193
Generalnotes ................................ 148
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Hood
Closing ........................................... 234
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Important safety notes .................. 233
Opening ......................................... 233
Horn ...................................................... 31
Hydroplaning ..................................... 138
I
Ignitionlock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 63
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 32
Instrument clusterlighting .............. 163
Interior lighting
Automaticcontrol ............................ 99
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 173
Overview .......................................... 99
Reading lamp ................................... 99
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 172
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 173
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 245
Using ............................................. 281
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 253
K
Keypositions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 116
SmartKey ....................................... 116
KEYLESS-GO
Activating ......................................... 65
Convenience closing feature ............ 76
Deactivation ..................................... 65
Displaymessage ............................ 202
Locking ............................................ 65
Removing the Start/Stopbutton ... 117
Start/Stopbutton .......................... 116
Starting the engine ........................ 118
Unlocking ......................................... 65
Kickdown
Driving tips.................................... 125
Manualgearshifting ....................... 128
Knee bag .............................................. 44
Index
11
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating .................171
Display message ............................ 193
Function/information.................... 161
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 175
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 189
Light function, active
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Light sensor(display message) ....... 189
Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-
riorlighting delayedswitch-off ....... 173
Active light function ......................... 97
Automaticheadlamp mode.............. 95
Cornering light function ................... 97
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 97
Highbeamflasher............................ 96
High-beam headlamps..................... 96
Light switch ..................................... 95
Low-beamheadlamps...................... 96
Parking lamps .................................. 96
Rear fog lamp .................................. 96
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 172
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 173
Standing lamps ................................ 96
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off(on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 172
Switching the exteriorlighting
delayedswitch-off on/off(on-
board computer) ............................ 173
Switching the surround lighting
on/off(on-board computer) .......... 173
Turn signals..................................... 96
see Interior lighting
see Replacing the bulbs
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic........................................ 71
Emergency locking ........................... 72
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 71
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 174
Low-b
eam he
adlamps
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Replacing bulbs............................. 100
Switching on/off.............................. 96
Luggagecover
see Trunk partition
Lumbar support ................................... 87
M
M+S tires ............................................ 262
MAGIC SKYCONTROL ......................... 82
Malfunctionmessage
see Displaymessages
Matte finish(cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 240
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 227
Displaymessage ............................ 184
Emergency call.............................. 225
Generalnotes ................................ 224
MB info callbutton ........................ 226
Remote fault diagnosis.................. 227
Roadsideassistance button ........... 226
Self-test ......................................... 224
System .......................................... 224
Mechanical key
Function/notes................................ 67
Generalnotes .................................. 67
Inserting .......................................... 67
Locking vehicle................................ 72
Removing ......................................... 67
Unlocking the driver'sdoor.............. 72
MediaInterface
see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) ......................... 169
Memory function ................................. 93
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Rear viewcamera .......................... 154
Messagememory (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 178
12
Index
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) ..............................................215
Connecting (device manager) ........216
Frequencies ................................... 288
Installation..................................... 288
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 169
Transmissionoutput (maximum).... 288
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................66
MOExtended tires .............................. 247
Mountingwheels
Lowering the vehicle...................... 284
Mounting anew wheel................... 283
Preparing the vehicle.....................281
Raising the vehicle ......................... 281
Removing awheel .......................... 283
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 281
MP3
Operation ....................................... 169
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Multifunctiondisplay
Function/notes .............................165
Permanent display......................... 172
Multifunctionsteering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 164
Overview .......................................... 33
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ......................212
Music files
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
N
Navigation
Entering adestination .................... 213
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 167
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Navigation menu
Important safety notes .................. 167
NECK-PRO headrestraints
Important safety notes .................... 52
Operation ......................................... 52
Resetting triggered .......................... 53
Notesonbreaking-inanew vehi-
cle ....................................................... 115
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 46
Faults ............................................... 49
Operation ......................................... 46
System self-test ............................... 48
Occupant safety
Air bags ........................................... 43
Automaticmeasures afteranacci-
dent ................................................. 53
Beltwarning ..................................... 42
Childreninthe vehicle..................... 53
Important safety notes .................... 38
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 38
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 45
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 39
Pets in the vehicle........................... 56
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 53
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 38
Seatbelt.......................................... 39
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 46
Faults ............................................... 49
Operation ......................................... 46
System self-test ............................... 48
Odometer ........................................... 166
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 175
Assistance menu ........................... 170
Audio menu ................................... 168
Convenience submenu .................. 174
Index
13
Display messages.......................... 177
Displaying aservice message ........ 237
Factory settings submenu ............. 175
Important safety notes .................. 163
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 172
Lighting submenu .......................... 172
Menu overview .............................. 166
Message memory .......................... 178
Navigation menu ............................ 167
Operation ....................................... 164
RACETIMER ................................... 175
Service menu ................................. 171
Settingsmenu ............................... 172
Standard display ............................ 166
Telephone menu ............................ 169
Tripmenu ...................................... 166
Vehiclesubmenu ........................... 173
Video DVD operation ..................... 169
Operatingsafety
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Important safety notes .................... 26
Operatingsystem
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual................ 22
Operator's Manual
Vehicleequipment ........................... 24
Outside temperature display ........... 163
Overhead controlpanel ...................... 36
P
Paddleshifters
see Steering wheelpaddleshifters
Paint code number ............................ 289
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 240
Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 131
Parking brake ................................ 132
Position of exteriormirror, front-
passenger side................................. 92
Rear viewcamera .......................... 154
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Parking Guidance ........................... 152
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 151
Important safety notes .................. 149
Problems (malfunctions)................ 152
Sensorrange................................. 150
Warning display ............................. 151
Parking brake
Applying automatically................... 133
Applying or releasing manually ...... 132
Displaymessage ............................ 181
Electric parking brake .................... 132
Emergency braking ........................ 133
Generalnotes ................................ 132
Releasing automatically................. 133
Warning lamp ................................. 206
Parking Guidance
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Important safety notes .................. 152
Parking lamps
Switching on/off.............................. 96
PARKTRONIC
Driving system ............................... 149
Function/notes............................. 149
PASSENGER AIRBAG
Displaymessage ............................ 187
Indicatorlamps ................................ 39
Problems (malfunction) .................. 187
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Pivotingdraft stop
see AIRGUIDE
Powerwashers .................................. 239
Powerwindows
see Sidewindows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection)
Displaymessage ............................ 184
Operation ......................................... 53
Protectionagainst theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)......... 64
Immo
bil
izer ...................................... 63
Protectionofthe environment
Generalnotes .................................. 23
Pulling away
Automatictransmission ................. 118
14
Index
General notes................................118
Q
QR code
Mercedes-BenzGuide App................. 1
Rescue card.....................................28
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27
R
RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 175
Radio
Selecting astation .........................168
see DigitalOperator's Manual
Radio mode
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sioninthe vehicle
Declarationofconformity ................ 26
Readinglamp ....................................... 99
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 189
Switching on/off .............................. 96
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear viewcamera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 242
Display in the multimediasystem .. 155
Function/notes .............................154
Switching on/off ........................... 155
Rear window defroster
General notes ................................ 111
Problem (malfunction) ................... 112
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Rear-viewmirror
Anti-glare (manual).......................... 90
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 92
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 294
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Important safety notes .................. 129
Refueling process.......................... 130
see Fuel
Remote control
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 229
Replacing bulbs
High-beam headlamps ................... 100
Important safety notes .................... 99
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 100
Low-beam headlamps .................... 100
Overview of bulbtypes.................. 100
Reportingsafety defects .................... 27
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fueltank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 192
Warning lamp ................................. 207
Residual heat (climate control) ........112
Restraintsystem
Display message ..............
.............. 185
Introdu
ction ..................................... 38
Warning lamp ................................. 206
Warning lamp (function) ................... 38
Reverse gear
Engaging (automatic transmis-
sion) ............................................... 123
Reversiblefloor panel (trunk) .......... 221
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 74
Reversing lamps (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 189
Roadside Assistance(breakdown) .... 25
Roof
Display message ............................ 200
Important safety notes .................... 77
Opening/closing (with roof
switch) ............................................. 78
Opening/closing (with SmartKey).... 79
Overview .......................................... 77
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 83
Relocking ......................................... 79
Roof carrier ........................................ 221
Roof switch .......................................... 78
Route guidance
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Route guidance active ......................167
Index
15
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................217
Inserting/removing ........................ 217
Removing ....................................... 217
SD memory card
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Selecting ........................................ 169
Search&Send
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................211
Seat
Correct driver's seatposition ........... 84
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seatbelt......................... 42
Correct usage.................................. 41
Fastening ......................................... 42
Important safety guidelines............. 40
Introduction ..................................... 39
Releasing ......................................... 42
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 174
Warning lamp ................................. 203
Warning lamp (function) ................... 42
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 86
Adjusting the 4-waylumbarsup-
port.................................................. 87
Adjusting the headrestraint ............ 86
Important safety notes .................... 84
Overview .......................................... 84
Seatheating problem ...................... 87
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 93
Switching AIRSCARFon/off............ 87
Switching seatheating on/off......... 87
Selectorlever
Positions ........................................ 122
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 242
Servicemenu(on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 171
Servicemessage
see ASSYST PLUS
Serviceproducts
Brake fluid ..................................... 293
Coolant (engine) ............................ 293
Engine oil....................................... 292
Fuel................................................ 291
Important safety notes .................. 290
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 294
Washerf
lui
d ................................... 294
Settingthe air distribution ............... 110
Setting the airflow ............................ 110
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 175
On-board computer....................... 172
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 175
Side impactair bag ............................. 44
Side marker lamp
Changing bulbs(rear) .................... 101
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 189
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 241
Convenience closing feature ............ 76
Important safety information ........... 74
Opening/closing (all)....................... 75
Opening/closing (front) ................... 75
Overview .......................................... 74
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76
Resetting ......................................... 76
Reversing feature ............................. 74
SIRIUSservices
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
16
Index
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 68
Changing the programming .............66
Checkingthe battery .......................68
Display message ............................ 201
Doorcentral locking/unlocking ....... 65
Important safety notes.................... 65
Loss................................................. 69
Mechanical key ................................ 67
Opening/closing the roof................ 79
Overview .......................................... 65
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 116
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 69
Starting the engine ........................ 118
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Snowchains ...................................... 262
Sockets
Center console .............................. 223
Generalnotes ................................ 223
Sound
Switching on/off........................... 212
Special seat belt retractor .................. 54
Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 167
In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
Segments ...................................... 163
Selecting the display unit............... 172
Sport handlingmode
Activating/deactivating
(Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ................. 62
Warning lamp ................................. 206
Standinglamps
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Switching on/off.............................. 96
Start/stopfunction
see ECO start/stop function
Starting(engine) ................................ 117
Steering
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88
Buttonoverview ............................... 33
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 164
Important safety notes .................... 88
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 93
Steering wheelpaddle shifters ........ 126
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 175
Stowageareas ................................... 219
Stowagecompartments
Armrest (under)............................. 219
Cente
r console .............................. 220
Cupholders ................................... 221
Door ............................................... 220
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 220
Glove box ....................................... 219
Important safety information ......... 219
Rear wall ........................................ 220
Stowagenet ................................... 220
Stowagenet ....................................... 220
Summertires ..................................... 262
Sun visor ............................................ 222
Surround lighting (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 173
Switchingair-recirculationmode
on/off ................................................. 112
Switchingonmediamode
Via the device list .......................... 217
T
Tachometer ........................................ 163
Tail lamps
Displaymessage ............................ 189
see Lights
Tank content
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 290
Emergency spare wheel................. 286
Information .................................... 288
Tires/wheels ................................. 284
Vehicledata................................... 295
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 227
Emergency call.............................. 225
Generalnotes ................................ 224
MB info callbutton ........................ 226
RoadsideAssistance button .......... 226
Self-test ......................................... 224
Index
17
System .......................................... 224
VehicleHealth Check .................... 227
Telephone
Accepting acall(multifunction
steering wheel).............................. 170
Authorizing amobilephone (con-
necting)......................................... 215
Authorizing amobilephone via the
device manager (connecting)......... 216
Connecting amobilephone
(device manager)........................... 216
Connecting amobilephone (gen-
eralinformation) ............................ 215
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 169
Numberfrom the phone book........ 170
Redialing ........................................ 170
Rejecting/ending acall................. 170
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 164
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ................ 175
Engine oil(on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ................ 175
Outsidetemperature ...................... 163
Setting (climate control)................ 109
Transmission oil(on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ...... 175
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 175
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 267
Checking manually ........................ 266
Displaymessage ............................ 196
Maximum....................................... 266
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 249
Notes............................................. 265
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 249
Recommended ............................... 263
Tire pressure loss warningsystem
Generalnotes ................................ 266
Important safety notes .................. 267
Restarting ...................................... 267
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 269
Function/notes............................. 267
Generalnotes ................................ 267
Important safety notes .................. 268
Radiotypeapproval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 270
Restarting ...................................... 270
Warning lamp .................................
210
W
arning message .......................... 269
Tire-changetoolkit ........................... 246
TIREFITkit .......................................... 247
Important safety notes .................. 247
Storage location ............................ 246
Tire pressure not reached .............. 249
Tire pressure reached .................... 249
Tires
Aspect ratio(definition) ................. 279
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 278
Bar (definition) ............................... 278
Changing awheel .......................... 280
Characteristics .............................. 278
Checking ........................................ 260
Curb weight (definition) ................. 279
Definition of terms ......................... 278
Directionofrotation ...................... 280
Displaymessage ............................ 196
Distribution of the vehicleoccu-
pants (definition) ............................ 280
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 278
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 277
GAWR(GrossAxle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 278
GVW(GrossVehicleWeight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 279
GVWR (GrossVehicleWeight Rat-
ing)(definition) .............................. 279
Important safety notes .................. 260
Increased vehicleweightdue to
optionalequipment (definition) ...... 278
Information on driving .................... 260
Kilopascal(kPa)(definition) ........... 279
Labeling (overview) ........................ 275
Loadbearing index (definition) ...... 280
Loadindex ..................................... 277
Loadindex (definition) ................... 279
M+S tires....................................... 262
18
Index
Maximum load on atire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 279
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................279
Maximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) .............................279
Maximum tire load......................... 277
Maximum tire load(definition) ....... 279
MOExtended tires .......................... 262
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 280
Overview ........................................ 260
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ...........................................279
Replacing ....................................... 280
Service life ..................................... 261
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 279
Speed rating (definition) ................ 279
Storing ...........................................281
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 278
Summer tires ................................. 262
Temperature .................................. 274
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 280
Tire bead(definition) ......................279
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 279
Tire pressures(recommended)...... 278
Tire size (data) ............................... 284
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speedrating .................... 275
Tire tread ....................................... 261
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 279
Total loadlimit (definition) ............. 280
Traction ......................................... 274
Traction (definition) ....................... 280
Treadwear..................................... 274
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards...................................... 273
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards(definition) .................... 278
Wearindicator (definition) ............. 280
Wheel and tire combination ........... 284
Wheel rim (definiti
on) .................... 278
se
e Flattire
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 258
Important safety notes .................. 256
Towingaway
Important safety guidelines........... 256
Installing the towing eye................ 256
Removing the towing eye............... 257
Transporting the vehicle................ 258
With both axles on the ground ....... 257
With the rearaxleraised ................ 257
Trafficreports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Transmission
Selector lever ................................ 122
see Automatictransmission
Transmissionposition display ......... 122
Transporting the vehicle .................. 258
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 166
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 166
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 167
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 73
Important safety notes .................... 72
Locking separately........................... 73
Opening/closing (manuallyfrom
outside) ............................................ 73
Overview .......................................... 72
Trunk lid
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Opening dimensions ...................... 295
Trunk partition
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Generalnotes .................................. 79
Opening/closing .............................. 80
Turn signals
Displaymessage ............................ 189
Switching on/off.............................. 96
Two-wayradio
Frequencies................................... 288
Installation ..................................... 288
Transmission output(maximum) .... 288
Type identificationplate
see Vehicleidentification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 72
Index
19
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 71
Upshift indicator
(on-board computer, Mercedes-
AMG SLC 43) .................................175
USB devices
Connecting to the MediaInter-
face ............................................... 218
V
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 198
Electronics ..................................... 288
Equipment ....................................... 24
Individualsettings .......................... 172
Limited Warranty .............................28
Loading .......................................... 271
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 72
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 65
Lowering ........................................ 284
Maintenance .................................... 25
Parking for along period................ 133
Pulling away................................... 118
Raising ........................................... 281
Reporting problems ......................... 27
Securing from rolling away ............ 281
Tow-starting ................................... 256
Towing away .................................. 256
Transporting .................................. 258
Unlocking (inanemergency) ........... 72
Unlocking (SmartKey)...................... 65
Vehicledata................................... 295
Vehiclebattery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicledata ....................................... 295
Vehicledimensions ........................... 295
Vehicleemergencylocking ................ 72
Vehicleidentificationnumber
see VIN
Vehicleidentificationplate .............. 289
Vehicletoolkit .................................. 245
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 169
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
VIN
Seat............................................... 290
Type plate ...................................... 289
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 204
Active Brake Assist ........................ 209
Brake Assist ................................... 209
Brakes ........................................... 204
Check Engine ................................. 207
Coolant .......................................... 207
Distance PilotDISTRONIC ............. 209
Distance warning ........................... 209
ESP
®
.............................................. 205
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 206
Fueltank ........................................ 207
Generalnotes ................................ 202
Parking brake ................................ 206
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 39
Reserve fuel................................... 207
Restraint system ............................ 206
Seatbelt........................................ 203
SPORThandling mode................... 206
Tire pressure monitor .................... 210
Warning triangle ................................ 244
Warranty .............................................. 24
Washer fluid
Displaymessage ............................ 201
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 211
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 284
Wheel bolt tighteningtorque ........... 284
Wheel chock ...................................... 281
Wheels
Changing awheel .......................... 280
Checking ........................................ 260
Cleaning ......................................... 241
Emergency spare wheel................. 285
Important safety notes .................. 260
Information on driving .................... 260
Interchanging/changing ................ 280
Mounting anew wheel................... 283
Mounting awheel .......................... 281
Overview ........................................ 260
20
Index
Removingawheel.......................... 283
Storing ........................................... 281
Tightening torque ........................... 284
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 284
Windscreen
Inserting and removing .................... 80
Preparing for installation .................. 80
see AIRGUIDE
Windows
see Sidewindows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 110
Windshieldwasher fluid
see Windshield washersystem
Windshieldwasher system
Adding washerfluid ....................... 236
Important safety notes .................. 294
Windshieldwipers
Displaymessage ............................ 201
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Replacing the wiperblades............ 101
Switching on/off........................... 101
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 262
Slippery roadsurfaces ................... 138
Snow chains .................................. 262
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 262
Winter tires
M+S tires....................................... 262
Wiperblades
Cleaning ......................................... 241
Important safety notes .................. 101
Replacing ....................................... 101
Workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off........................... 110
Index
21
Introduction
The printedOperator's Manual providesinfor-
mation about thesafeoperation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual providescompre-
hensiveand specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up theDigital Operator's Man-
ual via themultimedia system.
i
You will notincur any costswhen calling up
theDigital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to theInternet.
Thereare three ways to access thetopicsofthe
Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visualsearch
The visual search allows you to exploreyour
vehicle"virtually". Starting from either the
vehicleexteriorvieworinteriorview, you can
access manyofthe differenttopicscovered
by theDigital Operator's Manual. To access
thevehicleinteriorsection,select the"Vehi-
cle interior" view.
R
Keywordsearch
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by enteringcharacters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sectionsinthe con-
tents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
tedfor safetyreasonswhile driving.
Operation
Calling up theDigital Operator's Man-
ual
X
Press the Ø buttoninthe center console.
The overview relating to thevehicleappears.
X
Selectthe "Operator's Manual" menuitemby
turning 3 or pressing 7 thecontroller.
X
Confirm 7 themessage about thewarning
and safetynotes.
The basic menufor theDigital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating theDigital Operator's Man-
ual
General notes
Pleaseobservethe information about theoper-
ation of thecontroller (
Y page 212).
Content pages
The contentpages can be accessed by meansof
avisual search,akeyword search or usingthe
contents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
thecontroller.
X
To displayinfull-screen or animation: slide
8 thecontroller to theleft :.
X
To select information texts or savebook-
marks: slide 9 thecontroller to the
right ;.
X
To select alink: slide 6 thecontroller
downwards =.
X
To exit acontent page: select % sym-
bol ?.
X
To call up thebasic menuofthe Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X
To switch functions to themultimedia
system using thebuttonsonthe center
console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
button.
The selected menuappears. The Digital Oper-
ator's Manual remainsopen in theback-
ground.
22
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in amanner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
R
operating conditionsofyour vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
R
aregularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal when
startingthe engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain asafe distance
from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you
to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
tal rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also suppliesreconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrumentcluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctionsinsafety-relevant
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
23
Introduction
Z
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equalqual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
cle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed,manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
asupply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro-
vide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (
Y page 289).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-
let are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.
Service and vehicleoperation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
tions in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installedparts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut,Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System War-
ranty
R
State warranty enforcementlaws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplace-
ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or arefund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after areason-
able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
areasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for aretail buyerorlessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in acondition that is likely to cause
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is
driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you
24
Service and vehicleoperation
Introduction
have directly notified Mercedes-BenzUSA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction
of aless serious nature than category (1)
has been subject to repair four or more
times and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benzinwriting of the need for its
repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for acumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC
Customer AssistanceCenter
3Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenancework which should
be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The service
advisor will record every service for you in the
Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-BenzRoadside AssistancePro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Callstothe toll-free Roadside Assis-
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours aday, 365 days ayear.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-BenzRoadside AssistanceProgram
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-
erature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of achange of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada)at
1-800-387-0100.This will assist us in contact-
ing you in atimely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire
literature in the vehicle so that it is available to
the next owner.
If you have purchased aused car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada)at1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
R
service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
unleaded fuel for vehicles with acatalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
the fuel may have aconsiderably lower octane
rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-
age.
Some Mercedes-Benzmodels are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-BenzCanada,Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Service and vehicleoperation
25
Introduction
Z
Operating safety
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenancework or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is arisk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nancework as well as any required repairs
carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is arisk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
checkthe vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardizethe operatingsafety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accidentand injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic componentsortheir software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
!
There is arisk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck,e.g. on ahigh
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, aspeed bump or apothole in the road
R
aheavy objectstrikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situationslike this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the loads they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catchfire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuingyour jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions:1)
These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliancecould void the
user’s authoritytooperate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:(1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
26
Operating safety
Introduction
Diagnostics connection
The diagnosticsconnectionisonlyintendedfor
theconnectionofdiagnostic equipmentata
qualified specialistworkshop.
G
WARNING
If you connectequipmenttoadiagnostics
connection in thevehicle, it may affectthe
operation of vehicle systems.Asaresult,the
operatingsafetyofthe vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is ariskofanaccident.
Only connectequipmenttoadiagnosticscon-
nection in thevehicle, whichisapproved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objects in thedriver's footwell may restrict
theclearancearound thepedals or blocka
depressed pedal. Thisjeopardizes theoper-
atingand road safetyofthe vehicle. There is a
riskofanaccident.
Stow all objects securely in thevehicle so that
they do notget into thedriver's footwell.
Whenusingfloormatsorcarpets, makesure
that they are properly securedsothattheydo
notslip or obstruct thepedals. Do notplace
severalfloormatsorcarpetsontop of one
another.
!
If theengineisswitched offand equipment
on thediagnosticsconnectionisused,the
starter battery may discharge.
Connectingequipmenttothe diagnosticscon-
nection can lead to emissionsmonitoringinfor-
mation beingreset,for example. Thismay lead
to thevehicle failingtomeetthe requirements of
thenextemissionstestduringthe main inspec-
tion.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-BenzCenterisaquali-
fiedspecialistworkshop.Ithas thenecessary
specialistknowledge,tools and qualificationsto
correctlycarry out theworkrequiredonyour
vehicle. Thisisespecially thecasefor workrel-
evant to safety.
Observethe notesinthe Maintenance Booklet.
Always havethe followingworkcarriedout at an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter:
R
workrelevant to safety
R
serviceand maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation workand modifica-
tions
R
workonelectronic components
Correct use
If you removeany warningstickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognizecertaindangers.
Leave warningstickersinposition.
Observethe followinginformation when driving
your vehicle:
R
thesafetynotes in this manual
R
technical datafor thevehicle
R
traffic rulesand regulations
R
laws and safetystandardspertainingtomotor
vehicles
Problemswithyourvehicle
If you should experience aproblem withyour
vehicle, particularly onethatyou believe may
affectits safeoperation,weurgeyou to contact
an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenterimmedi-
ately to havethe problem diagnosed and recti-
fied. If theproblem is notresolved to your sat-
isfaction,please discussthe problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenteror, if nec-
essary, contact us at oneofthe following
addresses.
In theUSA
Customer AssistanceCenter
Mercedes-BenzUSA,LLC
3Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer RelationsDepartment
Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc.
98 VanderhoofAvenue
Toronto,Ontario M4G4C9
Reporting safetydefects
USAonly:
Operating safety
27
Introduction
Z
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has adefect
which could cause acrash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA)inaddition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA,LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,itmay
open an investigation, and if it finds that asafety
defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order
arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA,LLC.
To contact NHTSA,you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotlinetoll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov;orwrite to: Admin-
istrator,NHTSA,400 SeventhStreet, SW.,
Washington,DC20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual
regarding the correctoperation of your vehi-
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam-
age to the vehicle which is caused by violation
of these notes is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new
or used-vehicle warranty.
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident,rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in acompact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
content/asportal/en/communication/
informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data storage
Awide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
mentsthe state of acomponent, amodule, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment,lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctionsand defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactionsand operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment,intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle function
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
28
Data stored in the vehicle
Introduction
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-
mation is obtained from it, if required.
After amalfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, under
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to aperson.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-
tions.
Event datarecorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDRistorecord, in certain crash or near
crash-likesituations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hittingaroad obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how avehicle's systems
performed. The EDRisdesigned to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for ashort period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDRinthis vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide abetter under-
standingofthe circumstances in which acci-
dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are
recorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-
dent location) are recorded. However, other par-
ties, such as law enforcement could combine
EDRdata with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during acrash investi-
gation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDRisneeded
to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment,can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDRdata may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as atool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims and vehicle safety. Sincethe Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDRiscommercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDRdata with others
without the consentofthe
vehicle owners or, if
t
he vehicle is leased, without the consentofthe
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment;byfederal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDRisacomponent of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDRcomponent
may result in amalfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
Statelaws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Data stored in the vehicle
29
Introduction
Z
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs.AsofFebruary 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is availableonthe following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
30
Information on copyright
Introduction
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers
126
;
Combination switch 96
=
Instrumentcluster 32
?
Horn
A
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display
149
B
Overhead control panel 36
C
Climatecontrol systems 104
D
Ignition lock 116
Start/Stopbutton 116
Function Page
E
Adjusts thesteering wheel
manually
88
F
Adjusts thesteering wheel
electrically
88
G
Cruisecontrol lever 139
H
Electric parking brake 132
I
Diagnostics connection 27
J
Opensthe hood 233
K
Lightswitch 95
Cockpit
31
At aglance
Instrumentcluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer withsegments 163
Warning and indicator lamps:
Electric parking brake(red) 206
F USAonly
! Canadaonly
! Electric parking brake
(yellow)
206
· Distancewarning
209
å ESP
®
OFF
205
! ABS
204
Brakes(red) 204
$ USAonly
J Canadaonly
L Low-beam headlamps
96
T Parking lamps
96
K High-beam headlamps
96
÷ ESP
®
205
;
#! Turn signals
96
=
Multifunction display 165
?
Tachometer 163
Function Page
Warning and indicator lamps:
M SPORT handlingmode
in theMercedes-AMG
SLC43
206
R Rear fog lamp
96
N This indicator lamp has
no function
; CheckEngine
207
h Tirepressuremonitor
210
6 Restraintsystem
38
ü Seat belts
203
A
Coolanttemperature gauge 164
Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolant
207
B
Fuellevel indicator
Warning and indicator lamps:
8 Reserve fuel level with
fuel filler flap location indica-
tor(right)
207
C
Instrumentclusterlighting 163
Information on displayingthe outside tempera-
tureinthe multifunction display can be found
under "Outside temperature display"
(
Y page 163).
32
Instrumentcluster
At aglance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 165
;
Multimediasystem display
= ?
Switches on voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or endsacall 169
Exits the telephone book/
redialmemory
6
Makes or accepts acall
Switchestothe redialmem-
ory
Function Page
?
=;
Selects amenu 164
9:
Selects asubmenu or scrolls
through lists
164
a
Confirmsaselection 164
Hides display messages 178
%
Back 164
Switches off voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
i In vehicles with multimediasystem
COMAND youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
i In vehicles with multimediasystem Audio 20
youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the voice-operated control of the navi-
gation in the manufacturer'soperating
instructions
Multifunctionsteering wheel
33
At aglance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Multimedia system 212
;
c Seat heating
87
=
Ò AIRSCARF
87
?
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
149
A
è ECO start/stopfunc-
tion
118
Function Page
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
97
C
a PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFFindicator lamp
46
D
å ESP
®
60
E
à DYNAMIC SELECT but-
ton
121
i In vehicleswithmultimedia system
COMAND you can findfurther information:
R
on themultimedia system in theDigital
Operator's Manual
R
on theVoiceControl Systeminthe sepa-
rateoperatinginstructions
i In vehicleswithmultimedia system Audio20
you can findfurther information:
R
on themultimedia system in theDigital
Operator's Manual
R
on voice-controlled navigation in theman-
ufacturer'soperatinginstructions
34
Center console
At aglance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
F
Stowage compartment 220
Ashtray 223
Cigarettelighter 223
Socket 223
G
Selector lever 122
H
Stowage compartment
Cup holder 221
Function Page
I
Stowage compartmentwith
Media Interface
219
J
Roof switch cover 78
K
Multimedia system control-
ler
L
p Manual driveprogram for
theautomatic transmission
126
Center console
35
At aglance
Overheadcontrol panel
Function Page
:
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off
99
;
c Switches the interior
lighting on/off
99
=
µ Operates MAGIC SKY
CONTROL
82
?
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off
99
A
| Switches the automatic
interior lighting control
on/off
99
Function Page
B
Eyeglasses compartment 220
C
ï MB Infocall button
(mbrace system)
226
D
Rear-view mirror 90
E
Buttons for the garage door
opener
230
F
F Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace system)
226
G
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
225
36
Overheadcontrol panel
At aglance
Door controlpanel
Function Page
:
Opens thedoor 71
;
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
71
=
Adjusts the seats electrically 86
?
r 45=
Stores seat, exterior mirror
and steering column adjust-
ment settings
93
A
ö Folds the exterior mir-
rors in/out
91
Function Page
B
\ Selects the right exte-
riormirror
91
C
W Opens/closes the right
sidewindow
74
D
W Opens/closes the left
sidewindow
74
E
7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors
91
F
Z Selects the left exterior
mirror
91
Door control panel
37
At aglance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
R
Seat belt system
R
Air bags
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(
Y page 41)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (
Y page 84)
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (
Y page 84).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed(
Y page 43).
An air bag supplements acorrectly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objectspenetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags" (
Y page 50).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
as on child restraint systems (
Y page 53).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate aperson with
disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
information contact our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800FOR-MERCEDES
(18003676372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
38
Occupant safety
Safety
regular intervalswhile the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis
switched on. It goes out no later than afew sec-
onds after the vehicleisstarted. The compo-
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignitionisswitched
on
R
does not go out after afew seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for examplethe Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag.This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in aqualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
The indicator lampsdisplay the status of the
front-passengerfront air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds, subsequently both indicator lampsare
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passengerfront air bag is abletodeploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployedinthe event of an acci-
dent.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passengerfront air bag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during ajourney.
R
Children in achildrestraint system:
whetherthe front-passengerfront air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
led child restraint system, and the age and
size of the child.Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (
Y page45) and on "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (
Y page53). There you
willalsofind instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passengerseat.
R
All other persons: depending on the classi-
ficationofthe person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passengerfront air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (
Y page45). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (
Y page39) and "Air bags"
(
Y page43).There you can alsofind infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicleoccupants
in the event of an accident or the vehiclerolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicleoccupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, the seat belt helpstokeep the vehicle
Occupant safety
39
Safety
Z
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency TensioningDevices and seat belt
force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by the
seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt
strap cannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency TensioningDevice tightensthe
seat belt in an accident,pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency TensioningDevice does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, aseat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
with the front air bags which absorb part of the
deceleration force. This can reduce the force
exerted on the vehicle occupantsduring an acci-
dent.
!
If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-
gency TensioningDevice and the side impact
air bag, in addition to other systems, may be
triggered and have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupantsshould correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupantshave
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly.
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(
Y page 41)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (
Y page 84)
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident,you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than 5ft(1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, alwayssecure persons under
5ft(1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
systems.
40
Occupant safety
Safety
If achild younger than twelve years old and
under 5ft(1.50m)inheight is travelinginthe
vehicle:
R
always securethe child in achild restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehi-
cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priatetothe age, weight and size of the child.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer'sinstallation and oper-
atinginstructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (
Y page 45)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
R
theyare damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleachedordyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency TensioningDevices, belt
anchoragesorinertia reels have been modi-
fied.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
althoughthe damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modifiedordamaged
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
ModifiedEmergency TensioningDevices
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
when necessary. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modifythe seat belts,Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchoragesand inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean.Follow-
ing an accident,have the seat belts checked
immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of theseat belts
Observe the safetynotes on the seat belt
(
Y page 40).
All vehicle occupantsmust be wearingthe seat
belt correctly beforebeginningthe journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupantsare always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
When fasteningthe seat belt, always make sure
that:
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
intothe belt buckle belonging to that seat
R
the seat belt is pulled tightacross your body
Avoid wearingbulky clothing,e.g. awinter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted
Only thencan the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touchyour neckorberouted under your
arm or behindyour back.
R
the lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip jointand pull it tightusing the shoulder
section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
ted or fragile objects
If you have such itemslocated on or in your
clothing,e.g. pens,keys or eyeglasses,store
these in asuitable place.
R
only one personisusing aseat belt
Infantsand children must never travel sitting
on the lap of avehicle occupant.Inthe event
of an accident,theycould be crushed
betweenthe vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objectsare never secured with aseat belt if
the seat belt is also bein
g used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
betweenapersonand the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secureand
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
notes in the "Stowage options/compartments"
section for securing objects, luggage or loads
(
Y page 219).
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
Fastening seat belts
Observethe safetynotes on theseat belt
(
Y page 40)and the notes on correct useofseat
belts (
Y page 41).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat(Y page 84).
The seatbackrestmustbeinanalmost
upright position.
X
Pull the seatbeltsmoothlyout of seatbelt
guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt
buckle :.
The seatbeltonthe driver’s seatand the
front-passenger seatmay be tightenedauto-
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
(
Y page 42).
X
If necessary,pulluponthe shouldersection
of the seatbelttotighten the belt across your
body.
In order to attach the child restraint system
securelyinthe vehicle, the seatbeltonthe front-
passenger seatisequippedwithaspecialseat
belt retractor. Further informationonthe "Spe-
cialseatbeltretractor" (
Y page 54).
Releasingseatbelts
!
Make sure thatthe seatbeltisfully rolledup.
Otherwise, the seatbeltorbelttonguewillbe
trappedinthe door or in the seatmechanism.
Thiscould damagethe door, the door trim
panel and the seatbelt. Damaged seatbelts
can no longer fulfilltheirprotective function
and must be replaced.Visit aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
holdthe belt tonguefirmly and guidethe belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the "beltadjust-
ment" functionisnot available.
The belt adjustment is aconvenience function
integrated into PRE-SAFE
®
.Withthisfunction,
the driver'sand front-passenger seatbelts are
adjusted to the upperbodyofthe vehicleoccu-
pant.
The seatbeltstrapwillslightly tighten if:
R
the belt tongueisinsertedinto the buckle and
R
the ignition is switched on
The seatbeltadjustment will applyacertain
tightening force if any slack is detectedbetween
the vehicleoccupant and the seatbelt. Do not
grabholdofthe seatbelt.
The belt adjustment can be switched on and off
using the on-board computer(
Y page 174).
Beltwarning for the driverand front
passenger
The 7 seatbeltwarning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is areminder thatall vehicleoccu-
pants must wear theirseatbelts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, theremay be
awarning tone.
Regardless of whetherthe driver'sseatbelthas
already been fastened,the 7 seatbeltwarn-
ing lamp lights up for sixseconds each time the
engine is started.Ifthe doors are closed and the
driver'sorfront-passenger seatbelthas not
been fastened,the 7 seatbeltwarning lamp
lights up againafterthe sixseconds. As soonas
the driver'sand front-passenger seatbelts are
fastened or afront door is openedagain,the
7 seatbeltwarning lamp goesout.
If the driver'sseatbeltisnot fastened afterthe
engine is started,anadditional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off aftersix
seconds or once the driver'sseatbeltisfas-
tened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds15mph
(25 km/h)once and the driver'sand front-
passenger seatbelts are not fastened,awarning
tone sounds. Awarning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or untilthe
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seatbelts.
42
Occupant safety
Safety
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-
ing is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
air bag providesadditional protection in appli-
cable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
different air bag systems function independ-
ently from one another (
Y page 50).
However, no system available today can com-
pletelyeliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out arisk of injury
causedbyanair bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed.This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Alwaysmake sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
R
Adjust the seats properlybefore beginning
yourjourney. Alwaysmake sure that the seat
is in an almostupright position. The center of
the head restraint must support the head at
abouteye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.
R
Alwaysleanagainst the backrest whiledriv-
ing. Do not leanforward or leanagainst the
door or side window.You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags.
R
Alwayskeep yourfeet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put yourfeet on the dash-
board,for example.Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5ft(1.50m)tall in suitable restraint sys-
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If achildistraveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Alwayssecure childrenunder twelve years of
age and less than 5ft(1.50 m) tallinsuitable
child restraint systems.
R
Onlysecureachild in arearward-facing child
restraint systemonth
e front-passengerseat
when the front-passengerfront airbag is
deactivated.Ifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanentlylit,the front-
passengerfront airbag is deactivated
(
Y page 39).
R
Alwaysobserve the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)"(
Y page 45) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (
Y page 53)inadditiontothe child
restraint systemmanufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag fromfunctioningcorrectly. Before
startingyourjourney and to avoidrisks resulting
fromthe speedofthe airbag as it deploys, make
sure that:
R
there arenopeople, animals or objects
between the vehicleoccupants and an airbag
R
there arenoobjects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attachedtothe vehiclewithinthe deployment
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
area of an air bag, e.g.todoorsorside win-
dows
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in
thepockets of your clothing.Store such
objectsinasuitable place
G
WARNING
If you modify theair bag cover or affix objects
suchasstickers to it, theair bag can no longer
function correctly. Thereisanincreased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G
WARNING
Sensorstocontrol theair bags are locatedin
thedoors. Modificationsorwork notper-
formed correctly to thedoorsordoor panel-
ing,aswell as damageddoors, can lead to the
function of thesensorsbeingimpaired. The air
bags mighttherefore notfunction properly
anymore.Consequently, theair bags cannot
protect vehicle occupantsastheyare
designed to do. Thereisanincreased risk of
injury.
Never modify thedoorsorpartsofthe doors.
Always have work on thedoorsordoor pan-
elingcarried out at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Frontair bags
!
Do notplace heavyobjectsonthe front-
passenger seat.This couldcausethe system
to identifythe seat as beingoccupied. In the
eventofanaccident, therestraint systems on
thefront-passenger side may be triggered
and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in frontofthe steer-
ing wheel. Front-passenger frontair bag ;
deploys in frontofand abovethe glovebox.
When deployed, thefront air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for theoccu-
pantsinthe driver'sand front-passenger seats.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp
informsyou about thestatus of thefront-
passenger frontair bag (
Y page 39).
The front-passenger frontair bag will only
deployif:
R
thesystem, based on theOCS weightsensor
readings, detectsthatthe front-passenger
seat is occupied (
Y page 45). The
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp is
notlit (
Y page 46)
R
therestraint system control unit predictsa
high accidentseverity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys underthe steering
column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
theglovebox.The driver'sand front-passenger
knee bags are triggered together with thefront
air bags.
The driver'sand front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection.
Sideimpact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstructorpre-
ventdeploymentofthe air bags integrated
intothe seats. Consequently, theair bags
cannotprotect vehicle occupantsastheyare
designed to do. In addition,the operationof
theoccupant classification system (OCS)
44
Occupant safety
Safety
could be adverselyaffected. Thisposes an
increasedriskofinjury or evenfatalinjury.
You shouldonly useseatcoversthat have
beenapproved for the respectiveseatby
Mercedes-Benz.
Sideimpact airbags : deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seatbackrest.
Whendeployed, the sideimpact airbag offers
additionalthoraxprotection. However, it does
not protect the:
R
Head
R
Neck
R
Arms
If the restraint system control unitdetects aside
impact, the sideimpact airbag is deployed on
the sideonwhich the impact occurs.
The sideimpact airbag on the front-passenger
sidedeploysunder the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seatisoccupied or
R
the seatbeltbuckle tongueisengaged in the
beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belttongueisengaged in the beltbuckle,
the sideimpact airbag on the front-passenger
sidedeploysifanappropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case,deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seatisoccupied
or not.
Head air bags
Headbags : deploy in the areaofthe sidewin-
dowsatthe front.
Whendeployed, the headbag enhances the
level of protectionfor the head. However, it does
not protect the:
R
chest
R
arms
If the restraint system control unitdetects aside
impact, the headbag is deployed on the sideon
which the impact occurs.
If the system determinesthat they can offer
additionalprotectiontothat provided by the
seatbelt, aheadbag may be deployed in other
accident situations (
Y page 50).
The headbag on the front-passenger side
deploysunder the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seatisoccupied or
R
the seatbeltbuckle tongueisengaged in the
beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belttongueisengaged in the beltbuckle,
the headbag on the front-passenger side
deploysifanappropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case,deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seatisoccupied
or not.
OccupantClassificationSystem
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizesthe person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front airbag and front-passenger knee bagare
either enabled or deactivated.
Occupantsafety
45
Safety
Z
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the headbag
R
the Emergency TensioningDevices
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet restingonthe floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce afalse classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on avehicle armrest
R
sits in such away that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If you install achild restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
correctpositioningofthe child restraint system.
Never place objectsunder or behind the child
restraint system, e.g. acushion. The entirebase
of the child restraint system must alwaysrest on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to aload by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
dent.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
changes while the vehicle is in motion,anair bag
display message appears in the instrument clus-
ter (
Y page 187). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, alwayspay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger front
air bag both before and during the journey.
46
Occupant safety
Safety
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passengerfront air bag is
disabled. It willnot be deployedinthe event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. Apersoninthe front-
passenger seat couldthen, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the personissitting too close to the
dashboard. This posesanincreased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passengerseat is occupied,
alwaysensure that:
R
the classification of the personinthe front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bledinaccordance with the personinthe
front-passengerseat
R
the front-passengerseat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the personisseated correctly.
Make sure,both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in arearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passengerseat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front-passengerfront air bag
can deploy in the event of an accident. The
child couldbestruck by the air bag.This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passengerfront air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
on aseat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR-
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not installarearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passengerseat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" (
Y page49).
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in aforward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passengerseat
and you position the front-passengerseat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Move the front-passengerseat as far back as
possible.Always make sure that the shoulder
beltstrap is correctly routed from the vehicle
beltguide to the shoulderbeltguide on the
child restraint system. The shoulderbeltstrap
must be routed forwards and downwards
from the vehiclebeltguide. Always observe
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
The front-passengerseat is unoccupied,the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
R
The front-passengerseat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in astandard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
cates that the front-passengerfront air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of atwelve-month-old
child,inastandard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passengerfront air bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. Make
sure that the conditions for acorrect classi-
ficationare met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install
achild restraint system on the
front-
pa
ssenger seat.
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. ateenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, aperson of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or aperson of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 53).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at aqualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at aqualified specialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Dependingonthat result,
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-
bled or deactivated.
System self-test
G
DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not light up during the system self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with high deceler-
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install achild restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident.In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when aperson is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sittingtoo close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
alwaysensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correctand the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordancewith the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with acor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not,the front-
48
Occupant safety
Safety
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install achild restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facingchild restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF or PASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
frontair bag (
Y page 46). If the front-passenger
frontair bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
BAGONindicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
frontair bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(
Y page 49).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 48).
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains lit,
even though the front-
passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult or aper-
son of astature corre-
sponding to that of an
adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditionsfor acorrect classification of the person
on the front-passenger seat are met (
Y page 46).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up and/or
does not stay on.
The front-passenger seat
is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied by the
weight of achild up to
twelve months old in a
child restraint system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothingbetween the seat cushion and the child
seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment.This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply aload to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X
Make sure that no objectsare applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
achild restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is arisk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployedair bag replaced at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
Adeployedair bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to aqualified special-
ist workshop in order to have adeployedair
bag replaced.
For your own safety and that of your front
passenger, it is important that you have
deployedair bags replaced and faulty air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
50
Occupant safety
Safety
continuetoperform theirprotective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of acrash.
G
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnicallyare no longer opera-
tionaland are unabletoperform theirinten-
ded protective function. Thisposes an
increasedriskofinjury or evenfatalinjury.
Have pyrotechnicallytriggeredEmergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediatelyata
qualified specialist workshop.
An electricmotor is used by PRE-SAFE
®
to trig-
ger the tightening of the seatbeltinhazardous
situations. Thisprocedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or airbagsare deployed, youwillhearabang,
and some powder may also be released.The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rarecaseswillthe bang affect your hear-
ing. The powder that is released generally does
not constitute ahealth hazard,but it may cause
short-term breathing difficulties in peoplewith
asthma or otherrespiratory problems. Provided
it is safetodoso, youshouldleave the vehicle
immediatelyoropenthe window in order to pre-
vent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material,
which may require specialhandling and regard
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observedduring disposal.InCalifornia, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Methodofoperation
During the firststageofacollision, the restraint
system control unitevaluates important physi-
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Basedonthe evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unittriggers the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during afrontalor
rearcollision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational.You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(
Y page 38)
R
the seatbeltbuckle tonguehas engaged in
the beltbuckle of the respectiveseat
If the restraint system control unitdetects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activatedindepend-
ently of each otherincertain frontalcollision
situations:
R
Front airbagsaswellasdriver'sand front-
passenger knee bags
The front-passenger front airbag is activatedor
deactivated depending on the person on the
front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
airbag can only deploy in an accident if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
BAG indicator lamps (
Y page 39).
Yourvehicle hastwo-stage front airbags. In the
firstdeployment stage, the front airbag is filled
with propellant gas. The front airbag is fully
deployed with the maximum amount of
prop
el-
lant gasifasecond deployment thresholdis
reached within afew milliseconds.
The activation thresholdofthe Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and the airbagsisdetermined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at variouspoints in
the vehicle.Thisprocess is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment shouldtake place in good
time at the startofthe collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
and the direction of the force are essentially
determinedby:
R
the distribution of forcesduring the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehicle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle hascollided
Factorswhich can only be seenand measured
afteracollision hasoccurred do not play adeci-
siveroleinthe deployment of an airbag.Nor do
they provideanindication of airbag deploy-
ment.
The vehicle can be deformedconsiderably,with-
outanair bagbeing deployed. Thisisthe case if
only parts which are relativelyeasilydeformed
Occupantsafety
51
Safety
Z
are affected and therateofdecelerationisnot
high.Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though thevehicle suffers only minor deforma-
tion. This is thecaseif, for example, veryrigid
vehicle partssuchaslongitudinal body mem-
bers are hit,and sufficient decelerationoccurs
as aresult.
If therestraint system control unit detectsaside
impactorifthe vehicle rollsover, theapplicable
componentsofthe restraint system are
deployed independently of each other depend-
ing on theapparent type of accident.
R
Sideimpactair bag on theside of impact,
independently of theEmergencyTensioning
Deviceand theuse of theseat belt on the
driver'sseat
The side impactair bag on thefront-
passenger side deploys underthe following
conditions:
-
theOCS system detectsthatthe front-
passenger seat is occupied or
-
theseat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
thebelt buckle of thefront-passenger seat
R
Head bag on theside of impact, independ-
ently of theuse of theseat belt and inde-
pendently of whether thefront-passenger
seat is occupied
R
EmergencyTensioning Devices, if thesystem
determinesthatdeploymentcan offer addi-
tional protection in this situation
R
Head bags on thedriver'sand front-
passenger side in certain situations when the
vehicle rollsove
r, if t
hesystem determines
that deploymentcan offer additional protec-
tiontothatprovided by theseat belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The differentair bag systems work independ-
ently of each other.
How theair bag system worksisdetermined
by theseverityofthe accidentdetected,
especially thevehicle decelerationoraccel-
eration and theapparent type of accident:
R
Frontal collision
R
Sideimpact
R
Rollover
NECK-PROheadrestraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The function of thehead restraint may be
impaired if you:
R
attach objectssuchascoat hangerstothe
head restraints, for example
R
use head restraint covers
If you do so, thehead restraintscannotfulfill
their intended protective function in theevent
of an accident. In addition,objectsattached
to thehead restraintscouldendanger other
vehicle occupants. Thereisanincreased risk
of injury.
Do notattach any objectstothe head
restraintsand do notuse head restraint cov-
ers.
Method of operation
NECK-PRO head restraintsreducethe likelihood
of head and chest injuries.The NECK-PRO head
restraintsonthe driver'sand front-passenger
seatsare moved forwards and upwards in the
eventofarear-endcollision of acertain severity.
This provides betterhead support.
If theNECK-PRO head restraintshave been trig-
gered in an accident, you must reset theNECK-
PRO head restraintsonthe driver’s and front-
passenger seat (
Y page 53).Otherwise, the
additional protection will notbeavailableinthe
eventofanother rear-endcollision.You can rec-
ognize when NECK-PRO head restraintshave
been triggered by thefactthattheyhave moved
forwards and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou have the
NECK-PRO head restraintschecked for func-
tionalityataqualified specialist workshop after
arear-endcollision.
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Resetting triggeredNECK-PRO head
restraints
Do not insert your finger between the upholstery
of the headrestraint and the seat. Payparticular
attention whileresetting the NECK-PROhead
restraints.
X
Tilt the top of the NECK-PROheadrestraint
cushionforwardsinthe direction of arrow :.
X
Push the NECK-PROheadrestraint cushion
downasfar as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X
Firmly push the NECK-PROheadrestraint
cushionbackinthe direction of arrow = until
the cushionengages.
X
Repeatthis procedure for the second NECK-
PROheadrestraint.
i
Resetting the NECK-PROheadrestraints
requires alot of strength. If youhavedifficulty
resetting the NECK-PROheadrestraints, have
this work carriedout at aqualified specialist
workshop.
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
PRE-SAFE
®
informs youofcertain critical driving
situations and takespre-emptive measures to
protect the vehicleoccupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can take the following measures
independentlyofeachother:
R
pre-tensioning the driver'sand front-
passenger seatbelt.
R
closing the sidewindows.
R
vehicles with amemory function: setting a
more favorableseatposition for the front-
passenger seat.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is adanger
that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
aged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Should an accident not occur, the preventative
measures takenare reversed. Certainsettings
mustbemadeyourself.
X
If the seatbeltpre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seatbackrest back slightly.
Seatbeltpre-tensioning is released.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately afteranaccident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
typeand severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched on
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicledoors are unlocked
R
the front sidewindowsare lowered
R
vehicles with amemory function: the electri-
cally adjustablesteering wheel is raised when
the driver'sdoorisopened
R
the engine is switched off and the fuelsupply
is switched off
R
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
Childreninthe vehicle
Important safety notes
If achild younger than twelve years oldand
under 5ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always securethe child in achild restraint
systemsuitablefor Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint systemmustbeappropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notesinthissectioninadditiontothe child
restraint systemmanufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant classification system
(OCS)". (
Y page 45)
Children in the vehicle
53
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they couldset it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicleequip-
ment and become trapped. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularlychildren are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heator
cold, there is arisk of injury,possibly even
fatal.Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularlyonthe metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is arisk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you,alwaysensure that the child restraint
system is not exposedtodirect sunlight. Pro-
tect it with ablanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposedtodirect
sunlight, let it cool downbefore securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicleoccupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly.Particular attention must be paidto
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page40) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (
Y page41).
Abooster seat may be necessary to achieve
properseat beltpositioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg)until they reach aheight where a
three-point seat beltcan be properly fastened
without abooster seat.
Special seatbelt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat beltisreleased while driving, the
child restraint system willnolonger be
securedproperly.The special seat beltretrac-
tor is disabledand the inertia real drawsina
portion of the seat belt. The seat beltcannot
be immediatelyrefastened. There is an
increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicleimmediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat beltretractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
The seat beltonthe front-passenger's side is
equipped with aspecial seat beltretractor.
When activated, the special seat beltretractor
ensuresthat the seat beltcannot slacken once
the child seat is secured.
Installing achild restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pullthe seat beltsmoothly out of the belt
loop.
X
Engage seat belttongue in beltbuckle.
Activating the special seat beltretractor:
X
Pullthe seat beltout fullyand let the inertia
reel retract it again.
Whilethe seat beltisretracting, you should
hear aratcheting sound.The special seat belt
retractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system downsothat
the seat beltistight and does not loosen.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat beltretractor:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle,hold the belttongue and guide it back
towardsthe beltloop.
The special seat beltretractor is deactivated.
54
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Child restraint system
The use of seat beltsand child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
theU.S.territories
R
theDistrict of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further informationabout the
correctchild restraint system from any author-
izedMercedes-BenzCenter.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on asuitable seat,itcannotprotect as
intended. The child cannotthenberestrained
in theevent of an accident, heavybraking or
suddenchanges of direction.Thereisan
increased riskofinjury, possibly evenfatal.
Makesure that you observethe child restraint
system manufacturer'sinstallationinstruc-
tions and thenotes on use. Pleaseensure,
that thebase of thechild restraint system is
always restingcompletely on theseat cush-
ion.Never placeobjects, e.g.cushions, under
or behindthe child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems withthe original cover
designedfor them. Only replace damaged
covers withgenuine covers.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is notsecured, it can comeloosein
theevent of an accident, heavybraking or a
suddenchangeindirection.The child
restraint system couldbethrown about,strik-
ing vehicle occupants.Thereisanincreased
riskofinjury, possibly evenfatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, eveniftheyare notbeingused. Make
sure that you observethe child restraint sys-
temmanufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
Further informationonstowingobjects, luggage
and loads securely can be foundunder“Stowing
options/stowage compartments”
(
Y page 219).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securingsys-
tems whichhave been damaged or subjected
to aload in an accidentcan no longer protect
as intended. The child cannotthenbe
restrainedinthe event of an accident, heavy
braking or suddenchanges of direction.There
is an increased riskofinjury, possibly even
fatal.
Replacechild restraint systems whichhave
been damaged or subjected to aload in an
accidentassoon as possible. Havethe secur-
ing systems on thechild restraint system
checked at aqualified specialist workshop,
before you install achild restraint system
again.
The securingsystem of child restraint systems is
theseat belt system.
i
If you install achild restraint system on the
front-passenger seat,besure to observethe
instructionsand safety notesonthe "Occu-
pantClassificationSystem(OCS)"
(
Y page 45). Thereyou will also findinforma-
tionondeactivatingthe front-passenger front
air bag.
All child restraint systems must meetthe fol-
lowingstandards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards
213and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards
213and 210.2
Confirmation that thechild restraint system cor-
responds to thestandards can be foundonan
instruction label on thechild restraint system.
This confir
mation can also be foundinthe instal-
lation instructionsthatare included withthe
child restraint system.
Observethe warning labels in thevehicle inte-
rior and on thechild restraint system.
Child restraint system on thefront-
passengerseat
General notes
If you install achild restraint system on the
front-passenger seat,always observethe
Children in thevehicle
55
Safety
Z
instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant
Classification System (OCS)" (
Y page 45).
You can thus avoid the risksthat could arise as
aresult of:
R
an incorrectly categorized personinthe front-
passenger seat
R
the unintentional deactivationofthe front-
passenger front air bag
R
the unsuitable positioningofthe child
restraint system, e.g. too closetothe dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install arearward-
facingchild restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (
Y page 39) is the front-
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer'sinstallation and operating instruc-
tions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secureachild in aforward-facingchild
restraint system on the front-passengerseat,
always move the front-passengerseat as far
back as possible.The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushionofthe front-passengerseat. The back-
rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat
as possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat. The child restraint system must
not touchthe roof or be subjected to aload by
the head restraint.Adjust the angle of the seat
backrest and the head restraint position accord-
ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed fromthe front-
passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-
der belt strap must be routed forward and down
fromthe front-passengerseat belt guide.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer'sinstallation and operating instruc-
tions.
Pets in thevehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, theycould press buttons or
switches, for example.
As aresult,theycould:
R
activatevehicle equipmentand become
trapped, for example
R
activateordeactivatesystems, thereby
endangeringother road users
Unsecuredanimals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the eventofanaccident or sud-
den steeringorbraking, thereby injuring vehi-
cle occupants. There is arisk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secureanimals properly during
the journey, e.g. use asuitable animal trans-
port box.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will findinformation about
the followingdrivingsafetysystems:
R
ABS(Anti-lock Braking System)
(
Y page 57)
R
BAS(Brake Assist System) (Y page 57)
R
ActiveBrakeAssist (Y page 58)
R
Adaptive brakelights(Y page 60)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(
Y page 60)
R
EBD(Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(
Y page 63)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 63)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your drivingstyle or if you are
inattentive, the drivingsafetysystems can nei-
therreducethe risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics.Drivingsafetysystems are
merely aids designed to assist driving.
56
Driving safety systems
Safety
You are responsible for maintainingthe distance
to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time, and for stayinginlane.
Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the pre-
vailing road and weather conditionsand main-
tain asafe distance from the vehicle in front.
Drive carefully.
The drivingsafetysystems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
quate contactbetweenthe tires and the road
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum
tiretread depthsetc.inthe "Wheels and tires"
section (
Y page 260).
In wintry drivingconditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains.
Only in this way will the drivingsafetysystems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Generalinformation
ABSregulates brakepressure in such away that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steeringthe vehicle when
braking.
The ! ABSwarninglamp in the instrument
cluster lightsupwhen the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engineisrunning.
ABSworksfrom aspeed of about 5mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surfaceconditions.
ABSworksonslippery surfaces, even when you
only brakegently.
Important safetynotes
i
Observe the "Importantsafetynotes" sec-
tion (
Y page 56).
G
WARNING
If ABSismalfunctioning, the wheels could
lock when braking. The steerabilityand brak-
ing characteristics would be severely affec-
ted. There is an increased danger of skidding
and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABSchecked imme-
diately at aqualified specialistworkshop.
When ABSismalfunctioning, other systems,
including drivingsafetysystems, will also
becomeinoperative.Observe the information
on the ABSwarninglamp (
Y page 204) and dis-
play messages which may be shown in the
instrumentcluster (
Y page 179).
Brakes
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depressthe
brakepedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make afull brake application: depress
the brakepedal with full force.
If ABSintervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brakepedal.
The pulsatingbrakepedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functionsasa
reminder to takeextra care while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
Generalinformation
BASoperates in emergencybraking situations.
If you depressthe brakepedal quickly, BAS
automatically booststhe braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safetynotes
i
Observe the "Importantsafetynotes" sec-
tion (
Y page 56).
G
WARNING
If BASismalfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergencybraking situation is
increased. There is arisk of an accident.
In an emergencybraking situation, depress
the brakepedal with full force. ABSprevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brakepedal firmly depressed until
the emergencybraking situation is over.
ABSpreventsthe wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual onceyou
release the brakepedal. BASisdeactivated.
Driving safetysystems
57
Safety
Z
Active BrakeAssist
Generalinformation
i
Observethe "Importantsafetynotes"sec-
tion (
Y page 56).
Active Brake Assistconsists of adistancewarn-
ing function withanautonomous braking func-
tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Active Brake Assistcan help you to minimizethe
riskofacollision withthe vehicleinfront or
reduce theeffects of suchacollision.
If Active Brake Assistdetects that there is arisk
of collision,you will be warned visually and
acoustically. If you do notreacttothe visual and
audible collision warning,autonomous braking
can be initiatedincritical situations. If you apply
thebrakeyourself in acritical situation,Adap-
tive Brake Assistofthe Active Brake Assistsys-
temsupportsyou.
Important safety notes
In particular, thedetection of obstacles can be
impairedif:
R
there is dirtonthe sensorsoranythingelse
covering thesensors
R
there is snow or heavyrain
R
there is interferencebyother radar sources
R
there are strongradar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
anarrow vehicleistraveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
avehicleistraveling in frontonadifferentline
R
you are drivinganew vehicleorservicing on
theActiveBrake Assistsystem has justbeen
carriedout
Observethe important safetynotes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (
Y page 115).
Followingdamagetothe frontend of thevehicle,
havethe configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checkedataqualified specialist
workshop.This also appliestocollisionsatslow
speeds wherethere is no visible damagetothe
frontofthe vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assistisautomatically active after
switching on theignition.
You can activateordeactivateActiveBrake
Assistusingthe on-board computer
(
Y page 171). When deactivated, thedistance
warning function and theautonomous braking
function are also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assistisdeactivated, the æ
symbol appearsinthe assistancegraphic dis-
play.
Distance warning function
Generalinformation
The distancewarning function can help you to
minimizethe riskofafront-end collision witha
vehicleahead or reduce theeffects of sucha
collision.Ifthe distancewarning function
detects that there is ariskofacollision,you will
be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Importantsafetynotes"sec-
tion for drivingsafetysystems (
Y page 56).
G
WARNING
The distancewarning function does notreact:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncomingvehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
The distancewarning function may notgive
warningsinall critical situations. There is a
riskofanaccident.
Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-
uation and be readytobrake.
Always adapt your speedtosuit theprevailing
road and traffic conditions.
G
WARNING
The distancewarning function cannotalways
clearly identify objects and complextraffic
situations.
In suchcases, thedistancewarning function
may:
R
giveanunnecessary warning
R
notgiveawarning
There is ariskofanaccident.
Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-
uation and do notrelysolely on thedistance
warning function.
58
Driving safety systems
Safety
Function
Starting at aspeedofapproximately 4mph
(7 km/h), thedistancewarning function warns
you if you rapidly approachavehicle in front. An
intermittentwarning tone will then sound, and
the · distancewarning lamp will light up in
theinstrumentcluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increasethe
distancefromthe vehicle in front.
or
X
Takeevasive action,provideditissafe to do
so.
Due to thenature of thesystem, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also causethe system to display awarning.
Withthe help of theradar sensor system, the
distancewarning function can detect obstacles
that are in thepathofyour vehicle for an exten-
ded period of time.
Up to aspeedofapproximately 44 mph
(70 km/h),the distance warningfunction can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-
ped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
ing signal in acritical situation, Active Brake
Assistcan assist with the autonomous braking
function.
If the autonomous brakingfunction requires a
particularly high brakingforce, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously.
Vehicles without Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous brakingfunction
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4-65mph (7 -105 km/h) for moving objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
the autonomous braking function is available in
the following speedranges:
R
4-124 mph (7 -200 km/h)for moving
objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system,particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may alsocausethe AutonomousBraking Func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously(
Y page53).
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i
Observethe "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page56).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signalcan detect obstacles that
are in the path of yourvehiclefor an extended
period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects arisk of colli-
sion with the vehicleinfront, it calculatesthe
braking force necessary to avoidacollision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully,adaptive Brake
Assist willautomatically increasethe braking
force to alevelsuitablefor the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardoussituations at speeds above
4mph (7 km/h).Itusesradarsensor technology
to assess the traffic situation.
Up to aspeedofapproximately 155 mph
(250 km/h),adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
reacting to moving objects that have already
been detected as such at least once over the
period of observation.
Up to aspeedofapproximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
tionary obstacles.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
tection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)are activated
simultaneously(
Y page53).
X
Keep the brake pedaldepressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes willwork normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longerany dangerofacollision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of yourvehi-
cle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Driving safety systems
59
Safety
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannotalways clearly
identifyobjectsand complextraffic situa-
tions.
In suchcases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
interveneunnecessarily
R
notintervene
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Always pay careful attentiontothe traffic sit-
uation and be readytobrake. Terminate the
interventioninanon-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does notreact:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncomingvehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As aresult, theAdaptive Brake Assist may not
interveneinall critical conditions. Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Always pay careful attentiontothe traffic sit-
uation and be readytobrake.
Always adapt your speedtosuit theprevailing
road and traffic conditions.
Due to thenature of thesystem, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also causeBrake Assist to intervene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is notavailable due to a
malfunctioninthe radar sensor system, the
brakesystem remains available withfull brake
boostingeffect and BAS.
Adaptive brakelights
i
Observethe "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 56).
If you brakesharply from aspeedofmorethan
50 km/h or if braking is assistedbyBAS or
Brake Assist withCross-Traffic Assist,the brake
lamps flashrapidly. In this way, traffic traveling
behindyou is warned in an evenmorenoticeable
manner.
If you brakesharply from aspeedofmorethan
70 km/h to astandstill, thehazard warning
lamps are activated automatically. If thebrakes
are appliedagain,the brakelamps light up con-
tinuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off
automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h.
You can also switch off thehazard warning
lamps usingthe hazard warning button
(
Y page 97).
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observethe "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 56).
ESP
®
monitors driving stabilityand traction,i.e.
power transmission between thetires and the
road surface.
If ESP
®
detectsthatthe vehicle is deviating from
thedirection desired by thedriver, oneormore
wheelsare braked to stabilizethe vehicle.The
engineoutput is also modifiedtokeepthe vehi-
cle on thedesired course within physical limits.
ESP
®
assists thedriver when pullingaway on
wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also stabilize
thevehicle duringbraking.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observethe "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 56).
ETStraction control is part of ESP
®
.
ETSbrakes thedrivewheelsindividually if they
spin.This enables you to pull away and acceler-
ate on slippery surfaces, for example if theroad
surface is slippery on oneside.Inaddition,more
drivetorque is transferred to thewheel or
wheelswithtraction.
ETSremains active when you deactivate ESP
®
.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioningitwill notprovide
any vehicle stabilization.Thereisanincreased
riskofskiddingorofanaccident.
Exercise caution when continuing to drive.
HaveESP
®
checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
60
Driving safety systems
Safety
When towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised, observe the notes on ESP
®
(Y page 257).
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, then ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,
ESP
®
is not available due to amalfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(
Y page 205) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(
Y page 179).
i
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes out before
beginningthe journey, ESP
®
is automatically
active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivateESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine startsautomatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if
ESP
®
was deactivated before the engine was
automatically switched off.
Activating/deactivating ESP
®
(except
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 56).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated
G
WARNING
If you deactivateESP
®
,ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivateESP
®
in the situationsdescri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivateESP
®
in the follow-
ing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in acutting action
which provides better grip.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle startstoskid or awheel startsto
spin.
!
Avoid spinningthe driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Driving safety systems
61
Safety
Z
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivatedand oneormorewheels
start to spin,the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrumentclusterflashes. In suchsituations,
ESP
®
will notstabilizethe vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improvesdriving stability
R
engine torque is no longer limited and the
drivewheels are able to spin
R
traction control is still activated
R
ActiveBrake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brakefirmly with assis-
tance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, norisit
activated if you brakefirmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly
Activating/deactivatingESP
®
(except
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 56).
You can selectbetween thefollowingstatesof
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
SPORT handlingmode is activated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handlingmode is activated,
there is agreaterrisk of skiddingand acci-
dents.
Only activateSPORT handlingmode in thesit-
uations describedinthe following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
,ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes thevehicle.Thereisanincreased risk
of skiddingand an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in thesituations descri-
bed in thefollowing.
In thefollowingsituations,itmay be betterto
activateSPORT handlingmode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when usingsnowchains
R
indeep snow
R
on sandorgravel
R
on specially designated roads when thevehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired
Spinning thewheels results in acuttingaction
whichprovides bettergrip.
DrivinginSPORT handlingmode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and expe-
rienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as thesituations
describedabovenolonger apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise notbeable to stabilizethe vehicle if
thevehicle startstoskidorawheel startsto
spin.
!
Avoid spinningthe driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
couldotherwise damage thedrivetrain.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
X
To activate SPORThandling mode: briefly
pressbutton :.
The M SPORT handlingmode warning
lamp in theinstrumentclusterlightsup. The
SPORT Handling Mode
message appearsin
themultifunction display.
X
To deactivateSPORThandling mode:
briefly pressbutton :.
The M SPORT handlingmode warning
lamp in theinstrumentclustergoes out.
62
Driving safety systems
Safety
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFF
message appears in the multi-
functiondisplay.
X
To activate ESP
®
: brieflypress button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goesout.The ÷ ESP
®
ON message appears in the multifunctiondis-
play.
CharacteristicsofactivatedSPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORThandling modeisactivatedand one or
more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP
®
onlystabilizes the vehicletoalimiteddegree.
WhenSPORThandling modeisactivated:
R
ESP
®
onlyimprovesdriving stability to alimi-
ted degree
R
tractioncontrolisstillactivated
R
engine torque is no longer limitedand the
drive wheels are able to spin
R
ESP
®
stillprovides support when youbrake
firmly
CharacteristicswhenESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivatedand one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If youdeactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improvesdriving stability
R
engine torque is no longer limitedand the
drive wheels are able to spin
R
tractioncontrolisstillactivated
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;nor
is it activatedifyou brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available,nor is it
activatedifyou brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
ESP
®
stillprovides support when youbrake
firmly
EBD (electronicbrake forcedistribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rearwheelstoimprove driving stability
whilebraking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes"sec-
tionfor driving safety systems(
Y page 56).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning,the rearwheelscan
lock, e.g.under fullbraking.Thisincreases the
riskofskidding and an accident.
Youshouldtherefore adaptyourdriving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe informationregarding indicator and
warning lamps (
Y page 204)aswellasdisplay
messages (
Y page 181).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i
Observe the "Important safety notes"sec-
tion(
Y page 56).
ADAPTIVE BRAKEenhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In additionto
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKEalsohas
the HOLD function(
Y page 148)and hill start
assist (
Y page 118).
Protectionagainsttheft
Immobilizer
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver'sdoor.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The immobilizerprevents your vehiclefrom
being started withoutthe correct SmartKey.
Whenleaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with youand lock the vehicle. The
Protectionagainsttheft
63
Safety
Z
engine can be started by anyone with avalid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is alwaysdeactivated when
you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's batteryischarged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contactanauthorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarmsystem)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X
To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
adoor
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the trunklid
R
the hood
R
the glove box
R
the stowage space under the armrest
X
To turnthe alarmoff with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the Smart-
Key.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Insertthe SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stop the alarmusing KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center.
This is done either by textmessage or data
connection. The emergency call system
sends the message or data provided that:
R
you have subscribed to the mbrace service.
R
the mbrace servicehas been activated
properly.
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available.
64
Protection against theft
Safety
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended in
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also appliestomobile phones if the "Digital
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
via the Mercedes me connect web app.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objectstothe
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objectstothe
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
insertingthe SmartKey into the ignition lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strongmag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobile phone
or another SmartKey
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
SmartKey functions
:
& Locks the vehicle
;
F Unlocksthe trunk lid
=
% Unlocksthe vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
R
the stowage compartmentinthe center con-
sole
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (
Y page 174).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes
on if it is activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 173).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEY-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (
Y page 118).
SmartKey
65
Opening and closing
Z
Locking/unlockingcentrally
You can start,lockorunlock thevehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.Todothis, you onlyneedcarry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunc-
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconven-
tional SmartKey. Unlockthe vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO,for instance, and lockitusingthe
& button on theSmartKey.
The driver'sdoor and thedoor at whichthe han-
dle is used, must bothbeclosed. The SmartKey
must be outside thevehicle.When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance
between thekey and thecorresponding door
handle must not be greater than 3ft(1m).
Acheck whichperiodicallyestablishesaradio
connectionbetween thevehicle and theSmart-
Key determineswhether avalid SmartKey is in
thevehicle.This occurs, for example:
R
when starting theengine
R
while driving
R
when theexternal door handles are touched
X
To unlock thevehicle: touch theinner sur-
faceofthe door handle.
X
To lock thevehicle: touch sensor surface :
or ;.
Makesure that you do not touch theinner
surface of thedoor handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessedsensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further informationonthe convenience clos-
ing feature (
Y page 76).
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use aSmartKey for an
extended periodoftime, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function of thekey. The SmartKey
will then use verylittle power,therebyconserv-
ing battery power.For thepurposes of activa-
tion/deactivation, thevehicle must not be
nearby.
X
To deactivate: pressthe & button on the
SmartKey twiceinrapid succession.
The battery check lamp (
Y page 68)ofthe
SmartKey flashes twicebriefly and lightsup
once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X
To activate: pressany button on theSmart-
Key.
or
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignitionlock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associatedfeatures
are available again.
Changing thesettings of thelocking
system
You can change thesettings of thelockingsys-
tem.This meansonlythe driver'sdoor,the lock-
able stowage compartments in thevehicle inte-
rior and thefuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-
quently travel alone.
X
To change thesetting: pressand hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously
for about six secondsuntil thebattery indica-
torlamp (
Y page 68)flashes twice.
If thesettingofthe lockingsystem is changed
within thesignal range of thevehicle,pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocksthe vehicle
The SmartKey now functionsasfollows:
X
To unlock: pressthe % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: pressthe % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: pressthe & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock thedriver's door: touch theinner
surface of thedoor handle on thedriver's
door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch theinner surface
of thedriver or front-passenger door handle.
X
To lock centrally: touch theouter sensor
surface on one of thedoor handles.
66
SmartKey
Opening and closing
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
holddownthe % and & buttons simul-
taneouslyfor approximatelysix seconds until
the battery check lamp (
Y page 68)flashes
twice.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehiclecan no longer be locked or
unlockedwiththe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO,use the mechanical key.
If youuse the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-
theftalarm system will be triggered.Switch off
the alarm (
Y page 64).
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
icalkey ; from the SmartKey.
For further informationabout:
R
unlocking the driver's door (Y page 72)
R
unlocking the trunk (Y page 73)
R
locking the vehicle(Y page 72)
Insertingthe mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completelyinto the
SmartKey untilitengages and release
catch : is back in its basicposition.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteriescontain toxicand corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can resultin
severe health problems.There is ariskoffatal
injury.
Keepbatteries outofthe reach of children. If
abattery is swallowed, seekmedicalattention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteriescontain pollu-
tants.Itisillegal to dispose
of them with the household
rubbish. Theymustbecol-
lected separatelyand dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsiblerecycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsi-
blemanner. Take dis-
chargedbatteries to aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop or
to acollectionpoint for
used batteries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material,which mayrequire specialhandling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia,see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou have the
batteries replaced at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
SmartKey
67
Opening and closing
Z
Checking thebattery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properlyifbattery
check lamp : lightsupbriefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does notlight up briefly.
X
Change thebattery (Y page 68).
If theSmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of thevehicle,pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocksthe vehicle
i
You can get abattery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacingthe battery
You require aCR20253Vcellbattery.
X
Takethe mechanical keyout of theSmartKey
(
Y page 67).
X
Press mechanical key ; intothe SmartKey
opening in thedirection of thearrow until bat-
tery compartmentcover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartmentcover : closed
while doingso.
X
Remove battery compartmentcover :.
X
Repeatedly tap theSmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insertthe newbattery withthe positiveter-
minal facing upwards. Use alint-free cloth to
do so.
X
Makesure that thesurface of thebattery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insertthe fronttabsofbattery compartment
cover : intothe housing and then pressto
close it.
X
Insertmechanical key ; intothe SmartKey
(
Y page 67).
X
Checkthe function of all SmartKey buttons on
thevehicle.
68
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 68).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 65).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 68).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X
Unlock (Y page 72) or lock (Y page 72) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
SmartKey
69
Opening and closing
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 253).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 253).
or
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 68).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost aSmart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The side windows cannot
be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 68).
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended in
the vehicle.
70
Doors
Opening and closing
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
via the Mercedes me connect web app.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
!
The side windows will not open/close if the
batteryisdischarged or if the side windows
have iced up. It will then not be possible to
close the door. Do not attempt to forcethe
door closed. You could otherwise damage the
door or the side window.
You can open adoor from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside, opening adoor from the inside will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switchoff
the alarm (
Y page 64).
X
Pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, lockingknob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
When adoor is opened, the side window on that
side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the
side window closes again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. For example, you can unlock the
front-passenger door from the inside or lock the
vehicle before you pull away.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-
cle locks.
The central lockingbutton does not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage com-
partmentinthe center console.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open adoor from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If alocked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the lockingbut-
ton for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
Doors
71
Opening and closing
Z
X
To deactivate: press and holdbutton : for
aboutfiveseconds untilatone sounds.
X
To activate: press and holdbutton ; for
aboutfiveseconds untilatone sounds.
If youpress one of the two buttons and do not
hearatone, the relevant setting hasalready
been selected.
The vehicleislocked automaticallywhenthe
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
Youcould therefore lock yourselfout if:
R
the vehicleisbeing pushed.
R
the vehicleisbeing towed.
R
the vehicleisonarollerdynamometer.
Youcan also switch the automatic locking func-
tiononand off using the on-board computer
(
Y page 173).
Unlocking/lockingthe driver's door
using the mechanical key
i
If youwanttocentrallylockthe vehicleusing
the mechanical key,begin by pressing the
locking button for the interiorlocking mech-
anism whilethe driver's door is open. Then
lock the driver's door using the mechanical
key.
X
To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
X
To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
far as it will go to position 1.
If youuse the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theftalarm sys-
tem will be triggered.Switch off the alarm
(
Y page 64).
Trunk
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loadsare not secured or
not secured sufficiently,they could slip,tip
overorbeflung around and therebyhit vehicle
occupants. There is ariskofinjury,particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or asud-
denchange in direction.
Alwaysstoreobjects so thatthey cannotbe
flung around.Secure objects, luggage or
loadsagainst slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The trunk lidswingsupwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure thatthereissufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
!
Onlyclose the trunk once the roofislowered
completely. Otherwise, youcould damagethe
roof.
If youclose the trunk lidbefore the roofis
lowered completely, the loading aidswitch
lights up and awarning tone sounds.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 295).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourselfout.
The trunk lidcan be:
R
opened/closedfrom outside
R
openedautomaticallyfrom outside
R
locked separately
R
openedwiththe emergency release button
R
unlockedwiththe mechanical key
Youshouldpreferablyplace luggage or loadsin
the trunk.
72
Trunk
Opening and closing
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
X
Pull handle :.
X
Raise the trunklid.
Closing
X
Pull the trunklid down using recess :.
X
Lock the vehicle if necessary using the &
button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO.
If KEYLESS-GO detects aSmartKey in the trunk,
it does not lock.
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunkseparately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains
locked and cannot be opened.
X
Close the trunklid.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 67).
X
Insertthe mechanical key into the trunklid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise from posi-
tion 1 to position 2.
X
Remove the mechanical key.
X
Insertthe mechanical key into the SmartKey.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
!
The trunklid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearanceabove the trunklid.
If the trunkcannot be unlocked with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunklid, the anti-theftalarm system
will be triggered. Switchoff the alarm
(
Y page 64).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 67).
X
Insertthe mechanical key into the trunklid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-
Trunk
73
Opening and closing
Z
tion 2.Simultaneouslypullthe trunk lidhan-
dle.
The trunk is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanicalkey back to position 1
and remove it.
X
Insert the mechanicalkey into the SmartKey.
Emergencyrelease forthe trunk
Youcan unlock the trunk lidfromthe insidewith
the emergency release button.
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lidunlocks and opens.
The trunk lidcan be unlockedand openedwith
the trunk lidemergency release when the vehi-
cle is stationaryorwhile driving.
The trunk lidemergency release does not unlock
the trunk lidifthe battery is disconnectedor
discharged.
Trunk lidemergency release light:
R
Emergency release button : flashesfor
30 minutesafter the trunk lidisopened
R
Emergency release button : flashesfor
60 minutesafter the trunk lidisclosed
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Whileopening the side windows,bodyparts
could become trapped between the side win-
dowand the door frame as the side window
moves.There is ariskofinjury.
Make sure thatnobodytouchesthe side win-
dowduringthe opening procedure. If some-
body becomestrapped,release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side windowagain.
G
WARNING
Whileclosing the side windows,bodyparts in
the closing area could become trapped.There
is ariskofinjury.
When closing make sure thatnoparts of the
body areinthe closing area.Ifsomebody
becomestrapped,release the switch or press
the switch to open the side windowagain.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped,particularly if theyare
left unsupervised.There is ariskofinjury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. Never
leavechildren unsupervised in the vehicle.
Side windowreversingfeature
The front side windows areequippedwithan
automatic reversing feature. If asolid object
blocks or restricts the upward movement of one
of the front side windows duringthe closing
process, the side windowopens againautomat-
ically. During the manualclosing process, the
side windowonlyopens againautomatically
after the corresponding switch is released. How-
ever, the automatic reversing featureisonlyan
aidand does not relieve youofthe responsibility
of paying attentionwhenclosing asidewindow.
G
WARNING
The reversing featuredoesnot react:
R
to soft, light and thinobjects,e.g.small fin-
gers
R
overthe last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
duringresetting
R
when closing the side windowagain man-
uallyimmediatelyafter automatic reversing
Thismeans thatthe reversing featurecannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is ariskofinjury.
74
Side windows
Openingand closing
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows in the front
The switches for the front side windows are
located on the driver's door. There is also a
switch for the front-passenger side window on
the front-passenger door.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Left
;
Right
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the corresponding switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the driv-
er's or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closing all side windows
Using the switch on the center console
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch down to open the
side window again.
You can use the switch on the center console to
close all side windows simultaneously.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
The switch for all side windows is under the
cover.
X
To open all side windows: press button :
to the point of resistance.
X
To open all side windows fully: press
switch : beyond the point of resistance.
X
To close all side windows: pull switch :.
All side windows begin the closing procedure
simultaneously.The rear side windows close
after the front side windows.
If, after opening the windows, you close one side
window using the switch in the door control
panel:
R
the front side window closes first and
R
then the corresponding rear side window
closes.
Side windows
75
Opening and closing
Z
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO
G
WARNING
When usingthe convenience closingfeature,
partsofthe body couldbetrapped in theclos-
ing area when aside window is beingclosed.
Thereisariskofinjury.
Observethe completeclosingprocedure
when theconvenience closingfeature is oper-
ating. Makesure that no body partsare in
close proximity duringthe closingprocedure.
Proceedasfollows if someoneistrapped:
X
Release therecessed sensor surface on the
door handle.
X
Immediately pull and hold thedoor handle
and keep thedoor handle pulled.
The side windows open.
WithKEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-
dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key
must be outside thevehicle.All thedoorsmust
be closed.
X
Touchrecessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until theside windows are fully
closed.
i
Makesure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X
To interruptconvenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on thedoor han-
dle.
Resetting thesidewindows
If aside window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all thedoors.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Pull thecorrespondingswitch on thedoor
control panel until theside window is com-
pletely closed (
Y page 75).
X
Holdthe switch for an additional second.
If theside window opensagain slightly:
X
Immediately pull thecorrespondingswitch on
thedoor control panel until theside window is
completely closed (
Y page 75).
X
Holdthe switch for an additional second.
If therespectiveside window remains closed
after thebuttonisreleased, then it has been
set correctly. If this is notthe case, repeat the
steps above.
Problemswith thesidewindows
G
WARNING
If you close aside window again immediately after it has been blockedorreset,the side window
closes withincreased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then notactive. Partsofthe
body couldbetrapped in theclosingarea in theprocess. This posesanincreased riskofinjury or
evenfatal injury.
Makesure that no partsofthe body are in theclosingarea. To stop theclosingprocess, release
theswitch or push theswitch again to reopen theside window.
76
Sidewindows
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Aside window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
Aside window cannot be
closed and you cannot
see the cause.
If aside window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If aside window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
The side windows cannot
be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 68) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 68).
Roof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the
soft-top hydraulics depressurize after ashort
time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-
pectedly and may cause you or others to be
trapped. There is arisk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top completely.
G
WARNING
Closing the roof manually is acomplicated
and technically demanding procedure, which
requires alot of strength. You or others can
become trapped. There is arisk of injury.
Only have the soft top closed manually at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy
objectsthere. You will otherwise damage the
roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.
!
Do not forget that the weather can change
abruptly. Make certain that the roof is closed
when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle elec-
tronics can be damaged if water enters the
vehicle interior.
!
When opening and closing the roof, make
sure that:
R
there is sufficient clearance, as the roof
swings upwards.
R
there is sufficient clearance behind the
vehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwards
beyond the bumper.
R
the trunk is only loaded to below the trunk
partition.
R
the trunk partition is not pushed up by the
load.
R
the trunk partition is closed.
R
the trunk lid is closed.
R
the outside temperature is above 5‡
(Ò15 †).
You could otherwise damage the roof, trunk
and other parts of the vehicle.
The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing the
roof can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 295).
Roof
77
Opening and closing
Z
Make sure that the roof and rear window are
clean and dry before opening the roof. Other-
wise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle inte-
rior or trunk.
Opening and closing using the roof
switch
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body parts
could be trapped by, for example, the roof
mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There
is arisk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make sure
that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving
components. If someone becomes trapped,
release the button.
For safety reasons, you can only open or close
the roof when the vehicle is stationary.
!
Operating the roof while pulling away:
R
Observe the following traffic carefully.
R
Do not drive faster than 25 mph (40 km/h).
R
Avoid abrupt braking and swerving maneu-
vers.
Do not operate the roof when cornering, driv-
ing on uneven surfaces or during strong
winds. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-
aged.
i
If the traffic conditionsmean that you have
to drive off while opening/closing the roof,
the procedure which was started while sta-
tionary can be continued at speeds of up to
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Opening and closing
X
Vehicles without semi-automatic trunk
partition: close the trunk partition
(
Y page 79).
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 72).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
Roof switch : is located under the cover.
X
To open:pull roof switch : until the entire
roof is stowed away in the trunk.
The Vario-Roof in Operation
message
appears in the multifunction display.Once the
opening procedure is complete, the message
disappears and atone sounds.
All of the side windows open.
If you operate the roof switch and the Trunk
Partition Open message appears in the
multifunction display,the trunk partition is
not closed correctly.
X
Close the trunk partition.
X
To close: press and hold soft-top switch :
until the soft top is fully closed.
The Vario-Roof in Operation
message
appears in the multifunction display.Once the
opening procedure is complete, the message
disappears and atone sounds.
All of the side windows open.
X
To close all side windows, pull the switch
under the cover of the center console
(
Y page 75).
78
Roof
Opening and closing
Opening/closing using the SmartKey
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body parts
could be trapped by, for example, the roof
mechanism, trunklid or side windows. There
is arisk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make sure
that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving
components. If someonebecomes trapped,
release the button.
Opening and closing
This function is only available on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation.
X
Close the trunklid (Y page 72).
X
Vehicles with comfort operation: point the
tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door han-
dle.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey
must be within 6ft(2m)ofthe vehicle.
X
To open: press and hold the % button on
the SmartKey until the roof is fully opened.
The roof and the rear side windows open. The
frontside windows close.
X
To interrupt the opening procedure:
release the % button.
X
To open the front side windows: press the
% button on the SmartKey again.
X
To close: press and hold the & button on
the SmartKey until the roof is fully closed.
The roof and the side windows close.
X
To interrupt the closing procedure: release
the & button.
Locking the roof again
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the
soft-top hydraulics depressurizeafter ashort
time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-
pectedly and may cause you or otherstobe
trapped. There is arisk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top completely.
The roof is not locked if:
R
the K symbol and the Vario-Roof in
Operation message appear in the multifunc-
tion display
R
the K symbol and the Open/Close
Vario-Roof Completely message appear in
the multifunction display and you hear awarn-
ing tone
R
you hear awarning tonefor up to ten seconds
when pulling away or while driving
Locking
You can lock the roof again if it is not locked
fully.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Press the roof switch (Y page 78).
Trunk partition
General notes
!
To avoid damaging the roof or luggage when
folding back the roof, you should:
R
only load the trunktobelow the trunkpar-
tition
R
not place any objects on or in frontofthe
trunkpartition
R
not place any objects on the cover behind
the roll bars
R
not allow the cargo to push the trunkpar-
tition upwards
The trunkpartition can be used to cover luggage
and loads in the trunk.
Roof
79
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
X
To open: grip the handle of trunkpartition :.
X
Press the release button in the handle of trunk
partition :.
Trunk partition : is unlocked.
X
Pull trunkpartition : up out of the eyelets on
the edge of the trunk.
X
Push trunkpartition : forwards against the
direction of the arrow by handle.
X
To close: pull back trunkpartition : by the
handle in the direction of the arrow and
engage into the eyelets on the edge of the
trunkonboth sides.
Wind screen
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If you use the wind screen in darkness or in
other conditions offeringpoor visibility, your
view to the rear is further impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only use the wind screen when visibility con-
ditions are good.
G
WARNING
If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it
could detach itself during ajourney and
endanger other road users. There is arisk of
an accidentand injury.
Install the wind screen as described.
!
Install or remove the wind screen only when
the roof is open. You could otherwise damage
the wind screen or the vehicle interior.
The wind screen offers protection from the wind
when driving with the roof down.
The wind screen can be installed or removed
from the driver's side or passenger side.
For operationsinvolvingthe wind screen,itis
preferable to be positioned on the side of the
vehicle facing away from the traffic, after stop-
ping the vehicle in accordance with the traffic
conditions.
Installing and removing the wind screen
Preparing for installation
:
Wind screen
;
Unlocked latch
=
Locked latch
X
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
installation:
R
unlocking buttons R and L point in the
direction of travel.
R
latch ; facing you is unlocked.
R
latch = facing away from you is locked.
X
To unlock the latch: press unlocking button
R or L on the locked latch.
X
To lock the latch: push the unlocked latch
upward by hand until it engages.
80
Roof
Opening and closing
Installing
X
Takethe windscreenout of thetrunk.
X
Prepare for installing(Y page 80).
X
Holdwindscreen : at an angle and slide it
withlockedlatch = in thedirection of
arrow ? intothe bracketofthe oppositeroll
bar.
X
Press windscreen : down in thedirection of
arrow A until it engages.
Makesure that studs B and latch ; fit into
therespectivebrackets.
X
Checkwhether windscreen : is fully inser-
tedintoall four brackets and is sitting
securely.
X
If this is notthe case, remove windscreen :
again and repeat thesteps above.
Removing
X
Press unlocking button L :.Atthe same
time, pull windscreen ; up and tiltit.
X
Pull windscreen ; out of thebracketofthe
oppositeroll bar in thedirection of thearrow.
X
Secure wind screen ; to thetrunk floor by
therubber strips (
Y page 221).
AIRGUIDE
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of thevehicle if you fold
AIRGUIDEin/out while thevehicle is in
motion.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Only foldAIRGUIDEin/out while thevehicle is
stationary.
!
AIRGUIDEcan only be positionedcorrectly
by foldingitinorout.AIRGUIDEcannotbe
dismantled. Do nottry to remove AIRGUIDE
from its anchorage. Otherwise, you could
damageAIRGUIDEorthe vehicle.
AIRGUIDEcan be folded out or back in from the
driver'sside or passenger side.
When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably stand on
theside of thevehicle away from thetraffic,
after you have stoppedthe vehicle in accord-
ancewithroad and traffic conditions.
Roof
81
Opening and closing
Z
Operating AIRGUIDE
X
To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc : in the
direction of the arrow towards the middle of
the vehicle to the stop.
X
Repeat with disc ;.
X
To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs : and ;
back behind the roll bar to the stop.
Discs : and ; can also be used independently
of each other,e.g. when you are driving without
apassenger.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
General notes
MAGIC SKY CONTROL is apanorama roof, the
transparencyofwhich can be changed by apply-
ing electrical voltage.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between
darkened and transparent states.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkensautomatically
after ashort period when you turn the SmartKey
to position u in the ignition lock or remove the
SmartKey.
Risk of electric shock
G
DANGER
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-
trol panel is damaged or removed, electrical
componentswill be exposed. If you touch
these components, you could get an electric
shock.There is arisk of fatal injury.
R
Never remove the trim behind the overhead
control panel.
R
If the trim is damaged, never touch the
electrical componentsbehind it.
R
Always have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-
TROL carried out at aqualified specialist
workshop.
The electrical componentsofMAGIC SKY CON-
TROL are protected by apaneling behind the
overhead control panel.
The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is
marked with ayellow warning sticker that warns
you of high voltage. The electric cables of the
high-voltage section are color orange.
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status
it was set to before the enginewas switched
off.
X
To change the degree of transparency:
press button :.
At temperatures below freezing, the change is
slower and uneven.The entire process may take
some time.
82
Roof
Opening and closing
Problems with the roof
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The roof will not open or
close.
The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged.
X
Close the trunk partition (Y page 79).
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 73).
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Leave the engine running.
The roof has been opened and closed several times in arow. The roof
drive has switched off automatically.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
The automatic roof system is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Roof
83
Opening and closing
Z
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You couldlose control of your vehicle if you do
thefollowingwhile driving:
R
adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten theseat belt
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting theengine.
X
Observethe safety guidelinesonseat adjust-
ment(
Y page 84).
X
Makesure that seat = is adjusted properly.
Manual seat adjustment. (
Y page 86)
Electrical seat adjustment. (
Y page 86)
When adjusting theseat,makesure that:
R
you are as far away from thedriver'sair bag as
possible
R
you are sittinginanormalupright position
R
you can fasten theseat belt properly
R
you have moved thebackresttoanalmost
vertical position
R
you have set theseat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
R
you can depress thepedals properly
X
Checkwhether thehead restraint is adjusted
properly.
When doingso, makesure that you have
adjusted thehead restraint so that theback of
your head is supported at eye levelbythe
centerofthe head restraint.
X
Observethe safety notesonsteering column
adjustment(
Y page 88).
X
Makesure that steering wheel : is adjusted
properly.
Adjusting thesteering wheel man-
ually(
Y page 88)
Adjustingthe steering wheel electrically
(
Y page 89)
When adjusting thesteering wheel column,
makesure that:
R
you can hold thesteering wheel withyour
armsslightly bent
R
you can moveyour legs freely
R
you can see all thedisplays in theinstrument
clusterclearly
X
Observethe safety guidelinesfor seat belts
(
Y page 40).
X
Checkwhether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly(
Y page 42).
The seat belt should:
R
fit snugly across your body
R
be routed across themiddle of your shoulder
R
be routed in your pelvic area across thehip
joints
X
Before starting off,adjust therear-view mirror
and theexterior mirrors(
Y page 91) in such
away that you have agood view of road and
traffic conditions.
X
Vehicles with amemory function: save the
seat,steering wheel and exterior mirror set-
tings (
Y page 93).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children couldbecome trapped if they adjust
theseats, particularly when unattended.
Thereisariskofinjury.
When leaving thevehicle,always takethe
SmartKey withyou and lockthe vehicle.Never
leave childrenunsupervised in thevehicle.
84
Seats
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust aseat, you or other vehicle
occupantscould become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting aseat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move forwards as far as the next catchduring
movementsuch as braking or abrupt changes
of direction.Asaresult, you would be pushed
against your seat belt by the unsecured driv-
er's seat.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle. The seat belt cannot protectasinten-
ded and could result in additional injury.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Before every journey, make sure that the driv-
er's seat is fully engaged.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(
Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 53).
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion.This could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is
engaged before starting the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupantscould be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttonsand become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsys-
tem.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steeringwheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
!
To prevent damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following notes:
R
Do not spill liquids ontothe seats. Dry the
seats as soon as possible if liquid does get
spilled on the seats.
R
If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use
the seat heating to dry the seats.
R
Clean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
R
Do not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place pointed objectsonthe seat
cushions such as knives, nails or tools.
Where possible, use the seats only for car-
rying passengers.
R
When operating the seat heating, do not
cover the seats with insulating materials,
e.g. blankets,coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
R
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as aresult of
objectsbeing placed on the seats; for
example, seat cushions, child seats and
protective covers not approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Seats
85
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is arisk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i
The head restraints are equipped with the
NECK-PRO system (
Y page 52). For this rea-
son, it is not possible to remove the head
restraints from the seats.
For more information, contact aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Adjusting the seats manually
X
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever :
and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
X
Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
X
To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the
pressure on the backrest.
X
Pull handle ; and move backrest to the
desired angle.
X
Release handle ; again.
The backrest must audibly engage.
X
To adjust the seat height: pull handle =
upwards or push it down repeatedly until the
seat has reached the desired height.
Adjusting the seats electrically
:
Backrest angle
;
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
=
Seat cushion angle
?
Seat height
i
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (
Y page 93).
Adjusting the head restraints
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
X
To raise/lower: push the head restraint
upwards or pull it down into the desired posi-
tion.
86
Seats
Seats, steering wheeland mirrors
Adjusting the4-waylumbar support
:
Raises thebackrest contour
;
Softensthe backrest contour
=
Lowers thebackrest contour
?
Hardensthe backrest contour
You can adjust thecontourofthe seat backrests
individually to provideoptimum support for your
back.
Switchingthe seatheating on/off
Switchingon/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on theseat heating can
causethe seat cushion and backrest pads to
become veryhot.The healthofpersonswith
limitedtemperature sensitivityoralimited
abilitytoreacttohigh temperatures may be
affectedortheymay evensuffer burn-like
injuries. There is ariskofinjury.
Therefore,donot switch theseat heating on
repeatedly.
!
When theseat heating is switched on,the
seat surfacecan be damaged as aresult of
objects beingplaced on theseats; for exam-
ple, seat cushions, child seatsand protective
coversnot approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
When theseat heating is switched on,ensure
that there are no objects on theseats.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lampsinthe buttonindi-
catethe heating level you haveselected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutesafter it is set to level 1.
X
Makesurethatthe SmartKey is in position 1
or 2 in theignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until thedesired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all theindicator lampsgoout.
Problemswith theseatheating
The seat heating has switched off prematurely
or cannotbeswitched on.The vehicle's electri-
cal system voltageistoo low because toomany
electrical consumersare switched on.
X
Switchoff electrical consumersthatyou do
notneed, suchasthe rear window defroster
or interior lighting.
X
Once thebattery is sufficientlycharged,
switch on theseat heating again.
AIRSCARF
Setting headlevel heating (AIRSCARF)
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on,veryhot air
can flowfromthe vents in thehead restraints.
Seats
87
Seats,steering wheel and mirrors
Z
This could result in burns in the immediate
vicinityofthe air vents. There is arisk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
The AIRSCARF function warms the head and
neck area of vehicle occupantswith warm air.
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head
restraints.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button :.
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
up. The blower startsupafter apreheating
phase of seven seconds.
X
Press button : repeatedly until the desired
heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
The blower continues runningfor seven sec-
onds to cool down the heating elements.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF
may switch off.
Problems with AIRSCARF
AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or will
not switch on. The vehicle's electrical system
voltage is too low because too many electrical
consumersare switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumersthat you do
not need, such as the rear window defroster
or interior lighting.
X
Switch on AIRSCARF again.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steeringwheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steeringwheel. There is arisk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
via the Mercedes me connect web app. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steeringwheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel man-
ually
G
WARNING
If the steeringwheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion,itcould change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
88
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
:
Releaselever
;
Adjusts thesteering wheelheight
=
Adjusts thesteering wheelposition (fore-
and-aftadjustment)
X
Push release lever : down completely in the
direction of thearrow.
The steering column is unlocked.
X
Adjustthe steering wheeltothe desired posi-
tion.
X
Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X
Checkifthe steering column is locked. When
doingso, trytopush thesteering wheelupor
down or trytomoveitinthe fore-and-aft
direction.
Adjusting thesteering wheel electri-
cally
:
Adjusts thesteering wheelheight
;
Adjusts thesteering wheelposition (fore-
and-aftadjustment)
i Further relatedsubjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 89)
R
Storing settings(Y page 93)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you driveoff while theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments,you could lose
control of thevehicle. There is ariskofan
accident.
Always wait until theadjustmentprocess is
complete before driving off.
G
WARNING
When theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
thesteering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants–particularly children –could
become trapped.There is ariskofinjury.
Whilethe EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments,makesurethatnoone has
any body partsinthe sweepofthe steering
wheel.
If somebodybecomestrapped:
R
press oneofthe memory function position
buttons,or
R
movethe switch for steering wheeladjust-
mentinthe oppositedirection to that in
whichthe steering wheelismoving.
The adjustmentprocess is stopped.
G
WARNING
When theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
thesteering wheeland thedriver'sseat,you
and other vehicleoccupants–particularly
children –could become trapped.There is a
riskofinjury.
Whilethe EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments,makesurethatnoone has
any body partsinthe sweepofthe seat and
thesteering wheel.
Steering wheel
89
Seats,steering wheel and mirrors
Z
If somebodybecomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function position
buttons, or
R
press one of the memory function memory
buttons, or
R
move the switch for steering wheel adjust-
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving
The adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
If you use openings in the bodywork or
detachable parts as steps, you could:
R
slip and/or fall
R
damage the vehicle and cause yourself to
fall.
There is arisk of injury.
Alwaysuse secure climbing aids, e.g. asuita-
ble ladder.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
and out of yourvehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(
Y page 174).
Position of the steering wheelwhen the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
position 1
R
open the driver's door and the SmartKey is in
position u or 1
i
The steering wheel moves upwards only if it
has not already reached the uppersteering
limiter.
Position of the steering wheelfor driv-
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
positionwhen:
R
the driver's door is closed
R
you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
or
R
you press the Start/Stop button once on vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also
automatically moved to the previously set posi-
tion.
The last positionofthe steering column is stored
when you switch off the ignition or when you
store the setting with the memory function
(
Y page 93).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
gered in an accident, the steering column will
move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
This occurs irrespective of the positionofthe
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-
ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 174).
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
wardsorback.
90
Mirrors
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Exteriormirrors
Adjusting theexteriormirrors
G
WARNING
You couldlose control of your vehicle if you do
thefollowingwhile driving:
R
adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten theseat belt
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting theengine.
G
WARNING
The exteriormirror on thefront-passenger
side reduces thesizeofthe image.Visible
objectsare actually closer than they appear.
This meansthatyou couldmisjudge thedis-
tance from road userstravelingbehind, e.g.
when changing lane.Thereisarisk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason,always makesure of the
actual distancefromthe road userstraveling
behindbyglancingoveryour shoulder.
X
Makesure that theSmartKey is in position 1
or 2 in theignition lock.
X
Press button : for theleft exteriormirror or
button ; for therightexteriormirror.
The indicator lamp in thecorrespondingbut-
tonlightsupinred.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust theselectedexterior
mirror usingbutton = as longasthe indicator
lamp is lit.
X
Press button = up, down,tothe rightorto
theleft.
The exteriormirror must be set to aposition
that providesyou with agood overview of
traffic conditions.
The convex exteriormirrorsprovide alargerfield
of vision.
The exteriormirrorsare automaticallyheated
after starting thevehicle if therear window
defroster is switched on and theoutside tem-
perature is low. Mirror heating lastsupto10
minutes.
i
You can also heat up theexteriormirrors
manually by switching on therear window
defroster.
Foldingthe exteriormirrorsinorout
electrically
X
Makesure that theSmartKey is in position 1
or 2 in theignition lock.
X
Briefly pressbutton :.
Bothexteriormirrorsfold in or out.
i
Makesure that theexteriormirrorsare
always folded out fully while driving.They
couldotherwise vibrate.
Foldingthe exteriormirrorsinorout
automatically
If the"Foldinmirrorswhen locking" function is
activated in theon-board computer
(
Y page 174):
R
theexteriormirrorsfold in automaticallyas
soon as you lockthe vehicle from theoutside.
R
theexteriormirrorsfold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock thevehicle and
Mirrors
91
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Z
thenopenthe driver's or front-passenger
door.
i
The exteriormirrors do not foldout if they
have been foldedinmanually.
Exterior mirrorpushed outofposition
If an exteriormirrorhas been pushedout of
position, proceedasfollows:
X
Vehicleswithout electricallyfolding exte-
riormirrors: movethe exteriormirrorinto
the correct positionmanually.
X
Vehicleswithelectricallyfolding exterior
mirrors: press and holdmirror-folding button
untilyou hear the mirrorclick into place
(
Y page 91).
The mirrorhousing is engaged againand you
can adjustthe exteriormirrors as usual
(
Y page 91).
Automaticanti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte mayescapeifthe glassinanauto-
matic anti-glaremirror breaks. Theelectrolyte
is harmfuland causesirritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes,res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is ariskofinjury.
If youcome into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte fromyourskin
immediatelywithwater.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte outof
your eyes thoroughlywithclean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth outthoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comesinto contact with your
skinorhairorisswallowed,seekmedical
attentionimmediately.
R
Immediately change outofclothing which
hascome into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergicreactionoccurs, seek medical
attentionimmediately.
The rear-view mirrorand the exteriormirroron
the driver's side automaticallygointo anti-glare
modeifthe following conditions aremet simul-
taneously:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light fromheadlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glaremod
eif
re
versegearisengaged or if the interiorlighting
is switched on.
Parking position forthe exterior mir-
ror on the front-passengerside
Settingand storingthe parking position
Usingreversegear
Youcan storethe parking positionofthe front-
passenger-side exteriormirrorusing memory
button M ?.The reverse gearmustnot be
engaged duringthe process.
X
Make sure thatthe vehicleisstationaryand
thatthe SmartKeyisinposition 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press button ; for the exteriormirror onthe
front-passengerside.
X
Engage reversegear.
The exteriormirroronthe front-passenger
side moves to the presetparking position.
X
Use button = to adjustthe exteriormirrorto
apositionthatallowsyou to seethe rear
wheeland the curb.
Theparking positionisstored.
i
If youshift the transmission to anotherposi-
tion, the exteriormirroronthe front-
passengersidereturns to the drivingposition.
92
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel andmirrors
Using the memory button
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
This setting can be stored using memorybutton
M ?.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use button = to
adjust the exterior mirror.Inthe exterior mir-
ror, the rear wheel and the curb should be
visible.
X
Press memorybutton M ? and one of the
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parkingposition is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position,repeat the
steps.
Calling up astored parking position set-
ting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Selectthe front-passenger-side exterior mir-
ror using button ;.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parkingposition.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed aspeed of 9mph
(15 km/h)
R
if you press button : for the exterior mirror
on the driver'sside
Memoryfunction
Storing settings
G
WARNING
If you use the memoryfunction on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose controlof
the vehicle as aresult of the adjustments
being made. There is arisk of an accident.
Only use the memoryfunction on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memoryfunction adjuststhe seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
pants–particularly children –could become
trapped. There is arisk of injury.
While the memoryfunction is makingadjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memoryfunction position
button. The adjustment processisstopped.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memoryfunction,particularly when
unattended. There is arisk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always takethe
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
Memoryfunction
93
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
via the Mercedesmeconnect web app.Never
leave children unsupervisedinthe vehicle.
The memory function can be activated at any
time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the
ignitionlock.
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as asingle
memory preset:
R
position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
R
driver'sside:steering wheelposition
R
driver'sside:position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver'sand front-passengersides
X
Adjust the seat electrically (Y page86).
X
On the driver'sside,adjust the steering wheel
(
Y page89) and the exterior mirrors
(
Y page91).
X
Press memory button M and one of the stor-
age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree
seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. Atone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up astored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
i
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
94
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Exteriorlighting
General notes
For reasonsofsafety, Mercedes-Benzrecom-
mends that you drivewith thelightsswitched on
even duringthe daytime. In somecountries,
operationofthe headlamps varies due to legal
requirementsand self-imposedobligations.
Settingthe exteriorlighting
Settingoptions
Exterior lighting can be set using:
R
thelight switch
R
thecombinationswitch (Y page 96)
R
theon-board computer(Y page 172)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-handstanding lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps,licenseplateand
instrumentclusterlighting
4d
Automatic headlampmode, controlled
by the light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beamheadlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
If youhearawarning tone when youleave the
vehicle, the lights maystill be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exteriorlighting (exceptthe parking/stand-
ing lamps)switches off automaticallyifyou:
R
remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door whilethe SmartKeyis
in position u in the ignition lock
Automaticheadlamp mode
G
WARNING
Whenthe light switch is set to Ã,the low-
beam headlamps maynot be switched on
automaticallyifthereisfog,snow or other
causes of poor visibility duetothe weather
conditions such as spray.There is ariskofan
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlampfeature is onlyanaid.
The driver is responsiblefor the vehicle's light-
ing at alltimes.
à is the preferred light switch position:
R
The light setting is automaticallyselected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility duetoweather
conditions such as fog,snow or spray).
R
With the SmartKeyinposition 1 in the igni-
tionlock: the parking lamps areswitched on
or off automaticallydepending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
R
With the engine running:ifyou have activated
the daytime running lamps functionvia the
on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam
headlamps areswitched on or off automati-
cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
X
To switchonautomatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to Ã.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicleduri
ng the day. The daytime run-
ning lamps functionisrequired by lawinCan-
ada. It cannottherefore be deactivated.
Whenthe engine is running and the vehicleis
stationary: if youshift the automatic transmis-
sion from adriving positiontoposition j the
daytime running lamps or low-beamheadlamps
go outafter3minutes.
Whenthe engine is running,the vehicleissta-
tionaryand in bright ambient light: if youturn the
light switch to the T position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and youturn the light
switch to L,the manualsettings take prec-
edence overthe daytime running lamps.
USAonly:
Exterior lighting
95
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
The daytime runninglamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime runninglamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(
Y page 172).
If the engine is runningand you turn the light
switch to T or L,the manual settings
take precedenceover the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã,the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is arisk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is aparticularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take noteofthe country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or
start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery charge is very low, the parking
lamps or standinglamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in awell lit
area, in accordancewith the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
lamps over aperiod of several hours. If pos-
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
hand W standinglamps.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standinglamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-handside of
the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
vehicle).
Combination switch
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
96
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
X
To switchonthe high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the combinationswitch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beamhead-
lamps are onlyswitched on when it is dark and
the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switchoff the high-beam headlamps:
move the combinationswitch back to its nor-
malposition.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goesout.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switchonthe hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If younow switch on a
turn signalusing the combinationswitch,only
the turn signallamponthe corresponding
side of the vehiclewillflash.
X
To switchoff the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch
on if:
R
an airbag is deployed or
R
the vehicledecelerates rapidly from aspeed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h)and comestoa
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if the vehiclereachesaspeed of above
6mph (10 km/h)again afterafullbrake appli-
cation.
i
The hazard warning lamps stilloperate if the
ignition is switched off.
Corneringlight function
The cornering light functionimprovesthe illu-
minationofthe roadoverawideangle in the
direction youare turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. The cornering
light functioncan onlybeactivatedwhenthe
low-beamheadlamps are switched on.
Active:
R
if youare driving at speedsbelow 25 mph
(40 km/h)and switch on the turn signalor
turn the steering wheel
R
if youare driving at speedsbetween 25 mph
(40 km/h)and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp mayremainlit for ashort
time,but is automaticallyswitched off afterno
more thanthreeminutes.
Corneringlight functionwithtrafficcircle
function:
The cornering light functionisactivatedonboth
sidesbefore entering atraffic circle throughan
evaluation of the current GPSposition of the
vehicle. It remains active untilafterthe vehicle
hasleftthe traffic circle.Inthisway,pedestrians
crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicleingoodtime.
Active light function
The active light functionisasystem thatmoves
the headlamps according to the steering move-
ments of the front wheels.Inthisway,relevant
areas remainilluminated whiledriving.This
allows youtorecognize pedestrians,cyclists
and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active
light functionevaluatesthe course of the lane in
which youare driving and pre-emptively con-
trolsthe active light function.
AdaptiveHighbeam Assist
General notes
Youcan usethisfunctiontoset the headlamps
to change between lowbeamand high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with theirlights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
Exterior lighting
97
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lampsfrom high beamtolow beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system'soptical sensor is located behind
the windshieldnear the overheadcontrol panel.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whoselighting is blocked,e.g. by abarrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
matic high-beam headlampswillnot be deac-
tivated or willbeactivated regardless. There is
arisk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlampsin
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road,weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid.You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
restricted if there is:
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
dirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the directionofarrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately16mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately19mph (30 km/h)and no other road
users have been detected:
The high-beam headlampsare switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster alsolights up.
If you are driving at speeds belowapprox-
imately16mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roadsare ade-
quately lit:
The high-beam headlampsare switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
cator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out.
98
Exteriorlighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Overhead control panel
:
p Switches theleft-handreading lamp
on/off
;
| Switches theautomatic interiorlight-
ing control on/off
=
p Switches theright-hand reading lamp
on/off
?
c Switches theinteriorlighting on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to preventthe vehicle's battery from
discharging,the interiorlighting functionsare
automatically deactivated after sometime,
unless theSmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of theambientlighting
are set via themultimedia system
(
Y page 172).
Automaticinterior lighting control
X
To switch on/off: press the | button.
When theautomatic interiorlighting control is
activated, thebuttonisflushwiththe over-
head control panel.
The interiorlighting automatically switches on if
you:
R
unlock thevehicle
R
open adoor
R
remove theSmartKey from theignition lock
The interiorlighting is switched on for aset time
when theSmartKey is removedfromthe ignition
lock. You can activatethisdelayedswitch-off
usingthe on-board computer (
Y page 173).
Replacingbulbs
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Bulbs, lampsand connectors can get veryhot
when operating.Ifyou changeabulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Thereisariskofinjury.
Allow these componentstocooldown before
changing abulb.
Vehicles with halogen lamps
Do notuse alamp that has been dropped or if its
glass tubehas been scratched.
The lamp may explodeif:
R
you touch it
R
it is hot
R
you dropit
R
you scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned
for that purpose.Onlyinstallsparebulbs of the
sametypeand thespecifiedvoltage.
Marksonthe glass tubereduce theservicelife
of thebulbs.Donot touch theglass tubewith
your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass
tubewhen cold withalcohol or spirit and rub it
off withalint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do notallow bulbs to come intocontactwith
liquids.
Only replace thelampslisted (
Y page 100).
Havethe bulbs that you cannotreplace yourself
replacedataqualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistancereplacing lamps, con-
sult aqualified specialist workshop.
If thenew lamp still does notlightup, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbsand lampsare an important aspect of
vehiclesafety. You must thereforemakesure
that these function
corre
ctlyatall times.Have
theheadlamp setting checkedregularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps
The frontand rear lightclusters of your vehicle
are equipped withLED lightbulbs.Donot
replace thebulbs yourself.Contactaqualified
Replacingbulbs
99
Lightsand windshield wipers
Z
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the
work required.
Overview:changing bulbs/bulb types
Halogen headlamps
:
Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
;
High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Changing the front bulbs
Removing/mounting the coverinthe
front wheel housing
X
To remove: switch off the lights.
X
Turn the front wheels inwards.
X
Slide cover : up and remove it.
X
To install: reinsert cover : and slide it down
until it engages.
Low-beam headlamps(halogenhead-
lamps)
X
Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(
Y page 100).
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X
Push bar ; upwards.
X
Remove connector = with the bulb.
X
Pull the bulb out of connector =.
X
Insert the new bulb into connector = and
place in the bracket of bar ;.
Make sure that the bulb is positioned cor-
rectly.
X
Push bar ; downwards.
X
Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
X
Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(
Y page 100).
High-beam headlamps(halogenhead-
lamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon
headlamps)
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the hood.
100
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X
At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,
disconnect it and pull it out of bulb holder ;.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; at the
top, push it down and secure it in place.
X
Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Side marker lamps(halogen head-
lamps)
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the side
marker lamp changed at aqualified specialist
workshop.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windshield can scratchthe glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
!
Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratchthe windshield.
For this reason, you should alwaysswitch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluid
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is arisk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
!
Never open the hood if awindshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold awindshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back ontothe windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without awiper blade
Windshield wipers
101
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
and it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshield
may be damagedbythe force of theimpact.
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou have
thewiper blades changed at aqualified spe-
cialistworkshop.
!
Always position thewindshield wiper arms
vertically before folding them away from the
windshield. By doingso, you will avoid dam-
age to thehood.
Replacing thewiper blades
Removing thewiper blades
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock(
Y page 116).
X
Set thewindshield wiper to position °.
X
When thewiper armsare vertical to thehood:
turnthe SmartKey to position u in theigni-
tionlockand remove theSmartKey
(
Y page 116).
X
Foldthe windshield wiper armsaway from the
windshield.
X
Press bothrelease clips ;.
X
Foldwiper blade : in thedirection of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X
Removewiper blade : in thedirection of
arrow A.
Installingthe wiper blades
X
Positionnew wiper blade : with recess B
on lug A.
X
Foldwiper blade : in thedirection of
arrow = onto thewiper arm,until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X
Makesure that wiper blade : is seated cor-
rectly.
X
Foldthe wiper arm back onto thewindshield.
102
Windshield wipers
Lightsand windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
or
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray noz-
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X
Have the spray nozzles adjusted at aqualified specialist workshop.
Windshield wipers
103
Lights and windshieldwipers
Z
Overview of climatecontrol systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To preventthe windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when the
engineisrunning. Optimum operation is only
achieved with the side windows and roof closed.
i
When the weather is warm, ventilate the
vehicle for abrief period. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired vehicle
interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. Aclogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
For this reason, you should alwaysobserve
the interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions,e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
let.
Air-conditioning system control panel
Canada only
:
Setsthe temperature (Y page 109)
;
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 112)
=
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 110)
?
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 110)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108)
B
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112)
C
Setsthe airflow (Y page 110)
D
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111)
104
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climatecontrol
USA only
:
Sets the temperature (Y page 109)
;
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 111)
=
Sets the air distribution (Y page 110)
?
Defrosts the windshield(Y page 110)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108)
B
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112)
C
Sets the airflow (Y page 110)
D
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111)
Notes on using the air-conditioning
system
Air-conditioning system
Below, you can find anumber of notes and rec-
ommendations to help you use the air-condi-
tioning system optimally.
R
Switch on cooling with air dehumidification
using the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button lights up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡(22 †).
R
Recommendation for air distribution in
winter: set the O and ¯ settings.
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: set the P setting.
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshieldisclear again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly,e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
atunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at areduced capa-
city. If you require full climate control capacity,
the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated
by pressing the ECO button (
Y page 120).
Overview of climatecontrol systems
105
Climatecontrol
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climatecontrol
Canadaonly
:
Setsthe temperature, left (Y page 109)
;
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 110)
=
Switches theZONE function on/off(Y page 110)
?
Switches coolingwithair dehumidification on/off(Y page 108)
Switches theresidual heat on or off (
Y page 112)
A
Switches therear window defrosteron/off(Y page 111)
B
Setsthe temperature, right(Y page 109)
C
Switches air-recirculation modeon/off(Y page 112)
D
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 110)
E
Increases theairflow (Y page 110)
F
Reduces theairflow (Y page 110)
G
Activates/deactivatesclimate control (Y page 108)
H
Setsclimate control to automatic (Y page 109)
106
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climate control
USA only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 109)
;
Defrosts the windshield(Y page 110)
=
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 111)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 111)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 109)
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 112)
D
Sets the air distribution (Y page 110)
E
Increases the airflow (Y page 110)
F
Reduces the airflow (Y page 110)
G
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 108)
H
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 109)
Optimumuse of dual-zone automatic
climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructionsand recom-
mendations to enable you to get the most out of
your 3-zoneautomatic climate control.
R
Activate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons or the Á button on the con-
trol panel of the climate control. The indicator
lamps in the à and ¿ buttons or the
Á button light up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡(22 †).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshieldisclear again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly,e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
atunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well.The indicator
lamp in the á button goes out.
R
Use the residualheat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
ignition is switched off. The residualheat
function can only be activated or deactivated
with the ignition switched off.
R
Vehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status displayappears for three sec-
onds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control func-
tions.
Overview of climatecontrol systems
107
Climatecontrol
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off,the climate
control system only operatesatareduced capa-
city. If you require full climate control capacity,
theECO start/stopfunction can be deactivated
by pressingthe ECO button (
Y page 120).
Operating theclimatecontrol sys-
tems
Activating/deactivatingclimatecon-
trol
General notes
When theclimate control is switched off,the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows couldfog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly
i
Activate climate control primarily usingthe
à button(
Y page 109).
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock(
Y page 116).
X
To switch on: turnairflow control C clock-
wise to thedesired position (exceptposition
0)(
Y page 104).
X
To switch off: turnairflow control C coun-
ter-clockwise to position 0 (
Y page 104).
3-zone automatic climatecontrol
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock(
Y page 116).
X
To switch on: pressthe à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
matic mode.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out.The previously selectedsettings are
restored.
X
To switch off: pressthe ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the"Coolingwith air-dehumid-
ification" function,the air inside thevehicle will
notbecooled. The air inside thevehicle will also
notbedehumidified. The windows can fog up
morequickly. Therefore, deactivate thecooling
with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Coolingwith air dehumidification"function
is only availablewhen theengine is running. The
air inside thevehicle is cooled and dehumidified
according to thetemperatureselected.
Condensation may drip from theundersideof
thevehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and notasign that there is amalfunc-
tion.
Activating/deactivating
X
To activate: pressthe ¿ or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
lightsup.
X
To deactivate: pressthe ¿ or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button
goes out.The "Coolingwith air dehumidifica-
tion" function has adelayed switch-off fea-
ture.
108
Operating theclimate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in the
¿ or Á button
flashes three times or
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation" function cannot
be switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amal-
function.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
Automatic mode is only available with 3-zone
automatic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at aconstant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally when
the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehu-
midification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-
ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will
not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also
not be dehumidified.The windows can fog up
more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling
with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
Automatic control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X
To switch to manualmode: press the _
button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
Setting the temperature
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control :
clockwise or counter-clockwise (
Y page 104).
Only change the temperature settinginsmall
increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).
i
If you turn control : counter-clockwise to
the lowest temperature setting, air-recircula-
tion mode may activate automatically,
depending on the outside temperature.
3-zone automatic climate control
Differenttemperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To increase or decrease: turn control : or
B clockwise or counter-clockwise
(
Y page 106).
Only change the temperature settinginsmall
increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).
i
If you turn controls : and B counter-
clockwise to the lowest temperature setting,
air-recirculation mode may activate automat-
ically, depending on the outside temperature.
Operating the climate control systems
109
Climatecontrol
Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons.
The correspondingindicator lamp lights up
briefly.
The following air distribution settings can be
selected:
¯
Directsair through the defroster vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air vents
P
Directsair through the center and side air
vents
i
You can also activate several air distribution
settings simultaneously. To do this, press
multiple air distribution buttons. The air is
then directed through various vents.
3-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
The following air distribution settings can be
selected:
P
Directsair through the center and side air
vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air vents
S
Directsair through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯
Directsair through the defroster vents
b
Directsthe airflow through the defroster,
center and side air vents(Canada only)
a
Directsair through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directsthe airflow through the defroster
vents, the center and side air ventsas
well as the footwell air vents(Canada
only)
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. You can only close the side air vents, by
fully closing the adjuster on the side air vents
(
Y page 113).
Setting the airflow
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control C
clockwise or counter-clockwise (
Y page 104).
3-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To increase or reduce: press the K or
I button.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available with 3-zone auto-
matic climate control on vehicles for Canada.
X
To switch on: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up. The temperature settingfor the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
side.
X
To switch off: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out. The temperature settingfor the driver's
side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to defrost the inside of the windshield
and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Switching the "windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To switch on: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
110
Operating the climate control systems
Climatecontrol
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
X
To switch off: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X
Dual-zoneautomatic climate control: press
the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only availableinvehi-
cles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The
previously selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X
Dual-zoneautomatic air conditioning: acti-
vate the à mode button.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Air-conditioning system: press the P or
O button.
X
Dual-zoneautomatic air conditioning: press
the _ button until the P or O sym-
bol appears in the display.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has ahigh current
draw. You should thereforeswitch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems
111
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp on
the ¤ button flashes.
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
The roof is open.
X
Close the roof.
When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be activated
again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i
Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-
vated at high levels of pollution (dual-zone
automatic climate control only) or at high out-
side temperatures. When air-recirculation
mode is activated automatically, the indicator
lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air
is added after about 30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41
(5 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available on
vehicles for Canada.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the stationary
vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has
been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (
Y page 116).
X
To activate: press the Ì or Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
lights up.
i
The blower will run at alow speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
112
Operating the climate control systems
Climatecontrol
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation willbe
activated. The blower runs at mediumspeed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button
goes out.
Residualheat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could resultinburns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is arisk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain asufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary,redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head restraints.
This could resultinburns in the immediate
vicinity of the air vents. There is arisk of injury.
Reduce the heater outputbefore it becomes
too hot.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet grilleonthe hood and in the
engine compartment on the front-passenger
side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or
leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i
You can move the adjusters for the air vents
verticallyorhorizontally to set the direction of
the airflow.
i
For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
X
To open the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : counter-
clockwise.
X
To close the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
wise until it engages.
Setting the side air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
X
To open aside air vent: turn the adjuster in
the side air vent ; to the left.
X
To close aside air vent: turn the adjuster in
the side air vent ; to the right until it
engages.
Setting the air vents
113
Climate control
Z
Setting the blower outputofthe AIR-
SCARF vents
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the ventsinthe head restraints.
This could result in burns in the immediate
vicinity of the air vents. There is arisk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF
vents : using the AIRSCARF button
(
Y page 87).
114
Setting the air vents
Climatecontrol
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle
Important safety notes
Thesensorsystemofsomedriving and driving
safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a
certaindistance is being driven after the vehicle
hasbeendeliveredorafter repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reacheduntilthe end of this
teach-inprocedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
thisbyapplyinggreaterforce to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
Themoreyou look after the engine when it is
new,the moresatisfied youwillbewithits per-
formance in the future.
R
Youshouldtherefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
R
Avoidheavy loads, e.g.driving at full throttle,
during thisperiod.
R
Changegearingoodtime, beforethe tach-
ometer needleis Ô of the waytothe red area
of the tachometer.
R
Do not manuallyshift to alower gear to brake
the vehicle.
R
Try to avoiddepressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the point of resistance(kickdown).
After 1000 miles(1500 km),you can increase
the engine speedgradually and accelerate the
vehicletofullspeed.
Youshouldalsoobserve these notesonbreak-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehiclehavebeenreplaced.
Alwaysobserve the maximum permissible
speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell mayrestrict
the clearancearound the pedals or block a
depressedpedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and roadsafety of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident.
Stow allobjects securelyinthe vehiclesothat
theydonot getinto the driver's footwell.
When using floormats or carpets, make sure
thattheyare properlysecured so thattheydo
not slip or obstruct the pedals.Donot place
several floormats or carpets on top of one
another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitablefootwear can hindercorrectusage
of the pedals,e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is ariskofanaccident.
Wear suitablefootwear to ensurecorrect
usageofthe pedals.
G
WARNING
If youswitch off the ignition whiledriving,
safety-relevant functions areonlyavailable
with limitations,ornot at all. This could affect,
for example, the powersteering and the brake
boosting effect. Youwillrequire considerably
moreeffort to steer and brake. There is arisk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition whiledriving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake hasnot been fully
releasedwhendriving, the parking brake can:
R
overheat and cause afire
R
lose its hold function.
There is ariskoffireand an accident. Release
the parking brake fullybeforedriving off.
!
Do not warm up the engine whilestationary.
Pull away immediately. Avoidhighengine
speeds and full throttle untilthe engine has
reachedits operating temperature.
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
engagepositions Pand Ronlywhenthe vehi-
cle is stationary.
Driving
115
Driving andparking
Z
Where possible, avoid spinningthe drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
Key positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a
SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
start function and adetachable Start/Stop but-
ton.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the differentkey
positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button,the engine startsimmedi-
ately.
Acheck which periodically establishes aradio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether avalid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs,for example, when
starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (
Y page 65).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case.
This can impair the functionality of the KEY-
LESS-GO key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
remotecontrol or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will not be able to start the engine with the
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
116
Driving
Driving and parking
As soonasthe ignition is switched on, allthe
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.Further informationonsituations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go outafterstarting
the engine or lights up whiledriving
(
Y page 204).
If Start/Stop button : hasnot yetbeen
pressed, thiscorrespondstothe key being
removedfrom the ignition.
X
To switchonthe power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The powersupplyisswitched on. Youcan now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The powersupplyisswitched off againif:
R
the driver's door is openedand
R
youpress Start/Stop button : twice when
in thisposition
X
To switchonthe ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If youpress Start/Stop button : once when
in thisposition, the ignition is switched off
again.
Removing the Start/Stopbutton
Youcan remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicleasnormal
using the SmartKey.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
Youdonot have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when youleave the
vehicle. Youshould, however, always take the
SmartKeywithyou when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the Sma
rtKey
isinthe vehicle:
R
the vehiclecan be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children areleftunsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehiclein
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission outofpark
position P
R
start the engine
There is ariskofanaccident and injury.
Never leavechildren or animals unattended in
the vehicle.
Whenleaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. This
also appliestomobilephones if the "Digital
CarKey in smartphone"functionisactivated
via the Mercedes me connect webapp.
G
WARNING
Combustion enginesemitpoisonousexhaust
gases such as carbonmonoxide. Inhaling
theseexhaustgases leadstopoisoning. There
is ariskoffatalinjury.Therefore neverleave
the engine running in enclosedspaces with-
outsufficient ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammablematerialsintroduced through
environmentalinfluence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaustsystem or
parts of the engine thatheatup. There is arisk
of fire.
Carry outregular checks to make sure that
thereare no flammableforeignmaterialsin
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
During acoldstart, the engine runs at higher
speedstoenablethe catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature.The sound of
the engine maychange during thistime.
Automatictransmission
X
Depressthe brake pedaland keepit
depressed.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
Transmission positiondisplay j is shown in
the multifunctiondisplay.
Driving
117
Driving andparking
Z
i
You can startthe engineintransmission
position j and i.
Starting procedurewith theSmartKey
To startthe engineusing the SmartKey instead
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out
of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116)and release it as soon
as the engineisrunning.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start theengine
The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe
vehicle manually without insertingthe SmartKey
intothe ignition lock.The Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
startingthe engineoperates independently of
the ECO start/stopautomatic enginestartfunc-
tion.
X
Depress the brakepedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(
Y page 116).
The enginestarts.
Pulling away
Generalnotes
G
WARNING
If the enginespeed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
arisk of an accident.
When engagingtransmission position D or R,
always firmly depressthe brakepedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
!
Change gear in good timeand avoid spin-
ningthe wheels. You could otherwise damage
the vehicle.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle lockscentrally onceyou have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (
Y page 173).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
position j to the desired position if you
depressthe brakepedal. Only thenisthe shift
lock released.
i
Upshifts takeplace at higher enginespeeds
afteracold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake(
Y page 133).
Hill start assist
Hill startassist helps you when pulling away
forwardorinreverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for ashorttimeafteryou have
removed your foot from the brakepedal. This
gives you enough timetomove your foot from
the brakepedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depressitbeforethe vehicle begins to roll.
G
WARNING
After ashorttime, hill startassist will no lon-
ger brakeyour vehicle and it could roll away.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brakepedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill startassist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on alevel road or on a
downhill gradient
R
the transmission is in position i
R
the electric parking brakeisapplied
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stopfunction switches the
engineoff automatically if the vehicle is stopped
under certain conditions.
The enginestarts automatically when the driver
wantstopull away again. The ECO start/stop
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
118
Driving
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If theengineisswitched off automatically and
you exit thevehicle, theengineisrestarted
automatically. The vehiclemay beginmoving.
Thereisariskofaccidentand injury.
If you wish to exit thevehicle, always turnoff
theignition and secure thevehicleagainst
rollingaway.
General notes
:
ECO start/stopdisplay
The ECO start/stopfunction is activated when-
everyou switch on theengineusingthe Smart-
Key or theStart/Stopbutton.
If theenginehas been switched off automati-
callybythe ECO start/stopfunction,the è
ECO symbol is shown in themultifunction dis-
play.
Automaticengineswitch-off
If thevehicleisbraked to astandstill withthe
transmission in h or i,the ECO start/stop
function switches off theengineautomatically.
The ECO start/stopfunction is operational
when:
R
theindicator lamp in theECO buttonislit
green
R
theoutside temperature is within therange
that is suitable for thesystem
R
theengineisatnormaloperating temperature
R
theset temperature for thevehicleinterior
has been reached
R
thebattery is sufficientlycharged
R
thesystem detects that thewindshield is not
fogged up when theair-conditioning system is
switched on
R
thehoodisclosed
R
thedriver'sdoor is closed and thedriver's
seat belt is fastened
All of thevehicle's systems remain active when
theengineisstoppedautomatically.
Automatic engineswitch-off can takeplacea
maximum of four times in arow (initial stop, then
three subsequentstops).
The HOLD function can be activated if the
enginehas been switched off automatically. It is
then notnecessarytocontinue applyingthe
brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When
you depress theacceleratorpedal,the engine
startsautomatically and thebraking effectof
theHOLDfunction is deactivated.
Automaticenginestart
The enginestartsautomatically if:
R
you switch off theECO start/stopfunction by
pressingthe ECO button
R
you release thebrakepedal in transmission
position h or i and theHOLDfunction is
notactive
R
you depress theacceleratorpedal
R
you engage reversegear k
R
you movethe transmission out of position j
R
you switch to driveprogram S+
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open thedriv-
er'sdoor
R
thevehiclestartstoroll
R
thebrakesystem requiresthis
R
thetemperature in thevehicleinterior devi-
atesfromthe set range
R
thesystem detects moisture on thewind-
shield when theair-conditioning system is
switched on
R
thebattery's condition of charge is toolow
Shifting thetransmission to position j does
notstart theengine.
Driving
119
Driving and parking
Z
Deactivating or activating theECO
start/stop function
X
To deactivate: press ECObutton :.
Indicator lamp ; goesout.
X
To activate: press ECObutton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, theECO start/stop
function has beendeactivated manually or as
theresult of amalfunction.The enginewill then
notbeswitched offautomatically when thevehi-
clestops.
Problemswiththe engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The enginedoesnot
start.
The HOLD function or DistancePilotDISTRONIC is activated.
X
Deactivatethe HOLD function (Y page 148) or DistancePilot
DISTRONIC (
Y page 146).
X
Trytostart theengineagain.
The enginedoesnot
start.The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is amalfunction in theengineelectronics.
R
There is amalfunction in thefuelsupply.
Before attemptingtostart theengineagain:
X
Turnthe SmartKey backtoposition u in theignition lock.
or
X
Press theStart/Stopbuttonrepeatedly until all indicator lampsin
theinstrument cluster go out.
X
Trytostart theengineagain (Y page 117). Avoid excessivelylong
and frequent attemptstostart theengineasthese will drain the
battery.
If theenginedoesnot start after severalattempts:
X
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
The enginedoesnot
start.You cannothear
thestarter motor.
The on-boardvoltageistoo low because thebattery is tooweak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start thevehicle (Y page 253).
If theenginedoesnot start despiteattempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
The starter motorwas exposed to athermal load that was toohigh.
X
Allow thestarter motortocooldown forapproximately twominutes.
X
Trytostart theengineagain.
If theenginestill doesnot start:
X
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
120
Driving
Driving andparking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine is not running
smoothly and is misfir-
ing.
There is amalfunction in the engine electronics or in amechanical
componentofthe engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature
gauge shows avalue
above 248 ‡(120 †).
The coolant warning
lamp may also be on and
awarning tone may
sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 235). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct,the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The
coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainousterrainand stop-and-go traffic.
DYNAMIC SELECTbutton
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the
drive program. Depending on the drive program
selected the following vehicle characteristics
willchange:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspensionorthe adaptive adjustable
damping (only on vehicles with AMG RIDE
CONTROL sports suspension)
R
the sound of the exhaust system (vehicles
with sports exhaust system)
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop function
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (
Y page117).
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
programisselected.
The selected drive programappears in the
multifunction display. After ashort period of
time, the displaygoes out and the symbol for
the selected drive programappears.
In addition, the current drive programsettings
are displayed briefly in the multimediasystem
display.
i
In afew countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
DYNAMICSELECTbutton
121
Driving and parking
Z
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
S Sport Sportydriving characteris-
tics
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sportydriving
characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information for drive programs
(
Y page 125).
Automatic transmission
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If the enginespeed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
arisk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parkingposition P.Preventthe parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
!
If the enginespeed is too high or the vehicle
is in motion,donot shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from h to k,from k to h
or directly to j.
Do not open the driver'sdoor while the vehi-
cle is in motion.Atlow speeds in transmission
position h or k,otherwise park position j
is engaged automatically.
The transmission could be damaged.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The selector lever always returnstoits original
position.The currenttransmission position j,
k, i or h is shown in the transmission posi-
tion display in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43)
:
Transmission position
;
Gear
=
Driveprogram
122
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43
:
Transmission position
;
Drive program
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
Engaging parkposition P
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Press button :.
Engaging parkposition Pautomatically
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the SmartKey
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
R
you open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at avery low speed
and the transmission is in position h or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the infor-
mation on the HOLD function (
Y page 148) and
on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (
Y page 144).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X
Push the selector lever forwards past the first
point of resistance.
The ECO start/stopfunction is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
tion on the ECO start/stopfunction
(
Y page 119).
Shifting to neutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of park
position P
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended in
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital
Car Key in smartphone" function is activated
via the Mercedes me connect web app.
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector lever forwards or back to
the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h,the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to j automatically.
Automatic transmission
123
Driving and parking
Z
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i,e.g. when having the vehi-
cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
towing system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedaland keep it
depressed.
X
Engage neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive positionD
X
When the vehicle is stationary,depressthe
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector lever back past the first
point of resistance.
Transmission positions
B
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from rolling
awaywhen stopped.
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion B (
Y page 122) when the
vehicle is stationary.The parking lock
shouldnot be used as abrake when
parking. Alwaysapplythe electronic
parking brake in addition to the park-
ing lock in order to secure the vehi-
cle.
If the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock, the transmission is
locked.
The automatic transmission shifts to
B automatically:
R
when the SmartKey is removed
from the ignition lock
R
when the engine is switched off
with the transmission in position
C or 7 and one of the doors
is opened
In the event of amalfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position B.Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at aqualifiedspecialist
workshop.
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion C when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
124
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to A
whiledriving.The automatic trans-
mission could otherwisebedam-
aged.
No poweristransmitted fromthe
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brake pedalwillallow
youtomovethe vehiclefreely, e.g.to
push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position A if
the vehicleisindangerofskidding,
e.g.onicy roads.
!
Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
areavailable.
Driving tips
Changinggear
The automatic transmission shifts throughthe
individual gearsautomaticallywhenitisintrans-
mission position h.Thisautomatic gear shift-
ing behaviorisdeterminedby:
R
the selecteddrive program
R
the positionofthe accelerator pedal
R
the roadspeed
Accelerator pedalposition
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle:early upshifts
R
morethrottle:lateupshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdownfor maximum acceleration.
X
Depressthe accelerator pedalbeyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Easeoff the accelerator pedalonce the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Drive programs
Drive program C(Comfort)
In urbantrafficand stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
Driveprogram C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicledelivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in forward
and reversegears,unless the accelerator
pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved driving stability, for
exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
optimalfuelconsumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicleisdriven in the lowengine speed
range and the wheels arelesslikelytospin.
R
thesuspension exhibits comfortabledamping
settings (adaptive damping system onlyin
vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL sports
suspension).
R
the steering exhibits comfortablesteering
characteristics.
Drive program S(Sport)
Driveprogram S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicleexhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehiclepulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possiblybeing higher
as aresultofthe later automatic transmission
shift points.
Automatictransmission
125
Driving andparking
Z
R
the suspensionexhibits firmdamping set-
tings(vehicleswithadaptive damping system
or AMG sports suspension).
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicleexhibits particularly sporty driving
characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possiblybeing higher
as aresultofthe later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspensionexhibits particularly firm
damping settings(vehicleswithadaptive
damping systemorAMG sports suspension).
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
R
the ECO start/stopfunctionisnot available.
Drive program I(Individual)
In drive program I the following propertiesofthe
drive programcan be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension(vehicleswithadaptive damp-
ing systemorAMG sports suspension)
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stopfunction
Informationabout configuringdrive program I
with the multimedia systemcan be found in the
DigitalOperator'sManual.
Drive program E(Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicleexhibits comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in forward
and reversegears,unlessthe accelerator
pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved drivingstability, for
exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shiftingupsooner.
Thevehicleisdriven in the lowengine speed
range and the wheels arelesslikelytospin.
R
the suspensionexhibits comfortabledamping
settings(vehicleswithadaptive damping sys-
tem or AMG sports suspension).
R
duringdeceleration, the engine is disconnec-
ted fromthe drive train. Thevehicleuses
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (coast-
ing mode).
R
the steering exhibits comfortablesteering
characteristics.
Manual gear shifting
General notes
Youcan change gear yourself using the steering
wheelpaddleshifters. Thetransmission must be
in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheelpaddle
shifter is pulled,the automatic transmission
immediatelyshifts into the next gear down or
up,ifpermitted.
To usemanualshifting, youhavetwo options:
R
temporary setting
R
permanent setting
If youactivate manualgearshifting, the multi-
functiondisplay will showthe current gear
insteadoftransmission position h.
If manualgearshiftingisdeactivated,the gears
will be selected automatically.
Temporary setting
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Pull steering wheelpaddleshifter : or ;.
The temporary setting is active for acertain
amount of time. Under certainconditions,the
minimum amount of timeisextended, e.g.inthe
126
Automatictransmission
Driving andparking
case of lateralacceleration, during overrun
modeorwhendriving on steepterrain.
X
To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and holditinplace.
or
X
Use the lever to switch the transmission posi-
tion.
or
X
Use the DYNAMICSELECT button to change
the drive program.
Permanentsetting
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
Shiftinggears
Allvehicles(except for Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43)
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the currently
engaged gearisreached and youcontinueto
accelerate,the automatic transmission auto-
matically shifts up in order to prevent engine
damage.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts downto
the next gear.
Automaticdownshifting occurs whencoast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceedthe maximum
engine speed whenshifting down, the auto-
matictransmission protects against engine
damagebynot shifting down.
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43
!
If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-
vated, the automatic transmission doesnot
shift up automaticallyevenwhenthe engine
limiting speed for the current gearisreached.
Whenthe engine limiting speed is reached,
the fuelsupplyiscut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the
engine speed doesnot reach the red areaof
the tachometer.There is otherwise ariskof
engine damage.
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts downto
the next gear.
Automaticdownshifting occurs whencoast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceedthe maximum
engine speed whenshifting down, the auto-
Automatic transmission
127
Drivingand parking
Z
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43)
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style.The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster.
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style.The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster.
Kickdown
X
For maximumacceleration, depress the
accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheelpaddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximumengine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
128
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at aqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon-
ger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only partly possible to engage the gears, or the transmission is in
position i.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
X
Have the transmission checked at aqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is arisk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is arisk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay.Donot induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic buildupcan create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is arisk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildupis
thereby discharged.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
Refueling
129
Driving and parking
Z
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use afilter when adding fuel from afuel can.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(
Y page 291).
Refueling
General information
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
cle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
Insert the fuel filler cap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
X
Switch the engine off.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
i
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
i
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes.
The ; Check Engine warning lamp may
also light up. Amessage appears in the mul-
tifunction display(
Y page 192).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(
Y page 207).
130
Refueling
Driving and parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G
WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Turn the SmartKey immediately to position u in the ignition lock
(
Y page 116) and remove it.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot
be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 65).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 67).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is arisk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away.Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position j.
R
the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
tion lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away.There is arisk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P.Prevent the parked vehi-
Parking
131
Driving and parking
Z
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
X
Applythe electricparking brake.
X
Shiftthe transmission to position j
(
Y page 123).
X
With the SmartKey:turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO
Start/Stop button (
Y page 116).
The engine stopsand allthe indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
If the driver'sdoorisclosed, this is the same
as SmartKey position 1.Ifthe driver'sdoor
is open, this is the sameasSmartKey position
u (
Y page 116).
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motionbypressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for aboutthree seconds. Thisfunc-
tion operatesindependently of the ECO start/
stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Electric parkingbrake
General notes
G
WARNING
If youleave childrenunsupervised in the vehi-
cle,they could set it in motionby, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission outofthe
parking position P.
R
startthe engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped.There is ariskof
an accident and injury.
Whenleaving the vehicle,alwaystake the
SmartKey with youand lock the vehicle.Never
leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electricparking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage.Ifthe on-
board voltage is low or there is amalfunction in
the system, it may not be possible to applythe
released parking brake.
X
If this is the case,only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
away.
X
Shiftthe automatic transmission to position
j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is amalfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electricparking brake performs afunction
test at regularintervalswhile the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
this is occurring are normal.
Applyingorreleasingmanually
X
To engage: push handle :.
Whenthe electricparking brake is engaged,
the red F (USA only)or ! (Canada
only)indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The electricparking brake can also be applied
whenthe SmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only)or ! (Canada
only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goesout.
The electricparking brake can only be released:
R
whenthe SmartKey is in position 1 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 116)or
R
if the ignition wasswitched on using the
Start/Stop button
132
Parking
Drivingand parking
Applyingautomatically
The electric parking brakeisautomatically
appliedwhen thetransmission is in position j
and:
R
theengineisswitched off or
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To preventthe electric parking brakefrombeing
automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brakeisalso engagedauto-
matically if:
R
DistancePilotDISTRONICbringsthe vehicle
to astandstill or
R
theHOLDfunction is keepingthe vehiclesta-
tionary
In addition,atleast oneofthe followingcondi-
tionsmustbefulfilled:
R
theengineisswitched off
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
there is asystem malfunction
R
thepowersupply is insufficient
R
thevehicleisstationary for alengthy period
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only)
indicator lamp in theinstrumentclusterlights
up.
The electric parking brakeisnot automatically
engagedifthe engineisswitched off by theECO
start/stopfunction.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brakeisreleasedautomat-
ically when all of thefollowingconditionsare
fulfilled:
R
theengineisrunning
R
theseat belt tongue is engagedinthe belt
buckle
R
thetransmission is in position h or k and
you depress theacceleratorpedal or shift
from position j to h or k
R
if thetransmission is in position k,the trunk
lid mustbeclosed
If theseat belt tongue is notengagedinthe seat
belt buckle, thefollowingconditionsmustbe
fulfilled:
R
thedriver's door is closed
R
you movethe transmission out of position j
or you havepreviously driven at aspeed
above2mph (3 km/h)
R
if thetransmission is in position k,the trunk
lid mustbeclosed
When theelectric parking brakeisreleased,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in theinstru-
mentcluster.
Emergency braking
The vehiclecan also be braked during an emer-
gency by usingthe electric parking brake.
X
Whiledriving, push handle : of theelectric
parking brake.
The vehicleisbraked for as longasthe handle
of theelectric parking brakeispressed. The
longer theelectric parking brakehandle is
depressed, thegreaterthe braking force.
During braking:
R
awarning tone sounds
R
the ReleaseParkingBrake message
appears
R
thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in theinstrumentcluster
flashes
When thevehiclehas been braked to astand-
still, theelectric parking brakeisengaged.
Parking thevehicle for along period
If you leavethe vehicleparked for longer than
four weeks, thebattery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leavethe vehicleparked for longer than six
weeks, thevehiclemay suffer damageasa
result of lack of use.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Parking
133
Driving and parking
Z
Drivingtips
General notes
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If you switch offthe ignition whiledriving,
safety-relevant functionsare only available
withlimitations, or notatall. Thiscould affect,
forexample, thepowersteeringand thebrake
boostingeffect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake.There is arisk
of an accident.
Do notswitch offthe ignition whiledriving.
G
WARNING
If you operatemobile communication equip-
mentwhen driving, you may be distracted
from thetraffic situation.You could also lose
controlofthe vehicle. There is ariskofan
accident.
Only operatethisequipmentwhen thevehicle
is stationary.
Observethe legalrequirements forthe country
in whichyou are driving. Some jurisdictionspro-
hibitthe driver from usingamobile phone while
drivingavehicle.
If you makeacallwhiledriving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operatethe telephone
when thetraffic situation permits. If you are
unsure,pull over to asafelocation and stop
beforeoperatingthe telephone.
Bear in mindthatataspeed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), thevehicle coversa
distanceof44ft(approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Drive sensibly –save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
R
The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
ommended tire pressure.
R
Remove unnecessary loads.
R
Warm up the engineatlow enginespeeds.
R
Avoid frequentacceleration or braking.
R
Observe the serviceintervals in the Mainte-
nanceBooklet or in the serviceinterval dis-
play. Have all the maintenancework carried in
accordance with Daimler AG regulations.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinkingand driving and/or takingdrugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even asmall amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of aserious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs.
Emission control
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is arisk of fatal injury. Thereforenever leave
the enginerunning in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficientventilation.
Certain enginesystems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous componentsinexhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.Always have
work on the enginecarried out at aqualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
BenzCenter for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at aqualified specialist
workshop.
The enginesettings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
servicework must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benzservicerequirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
134
Driving tips
Driving and parking
ECO display
The ECO display showsyou how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achievingthe mosteconomical driving style
for theselectedsettings and prevailingcondi-
tions.Your driving style can significantly influ-
encethe vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shownunder Bonus
fr. Start and
represents theadditional range achievedsince
thebeginningofthe journey as aresult of an
adapted driving style.
If thefuel levelhas dropped intothe reserve
range, the FuelLow
message is showninthe
multifunction display instead of range ?.The
8 warning lamp in theinstrumentcluster
also lightsup(
Y page 207).
The ECO display consistsofthree sections,with
an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
spondtothe followingthree categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluationofall accel-
eration processes):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: moderate
acceleration, especiallyathigher
speeds
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluationofall decelera-
tionprocesses):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: anticipatory
driving,keepingyour distanceand
early release of theaccelerator.
The vehicle can coastwithout use
of thebrakes.
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequentheavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
overthe entire journey):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: constant
speedand avoidanceofunneces-
sary accelerationand deceleration
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuationsin
speed
The three inner areas display thecurrentdriving
style and light up green as aresult of aparticu-
larly economical driving style. Dependingonthe
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At thebeginningofthe journey, thethree outer
areas are emptyand fill up as aresult of eco-
nomical driving.Ahigher levelindicates amore
economical driving style. If thethree outer areas
are completely filledatthe same time, thedriver
has adopted themosteconomical driving style
for theselectedsettings and prevailingcondi-
tions.The ECO display border lightsup.
The ECO display does notindicatethe actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achievedrange
displayed under Bonus fr. start
does not
indicateafixed consumptionreduction.
Driving tips
135
Driving and parking
Z
In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
tion is affected by other factors, such as:
R
load
R
tire pressure
R
cold start
R
choice of route
R
active electrical consumers
These factors are not includedinthe ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving ahigher valueinthe categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program C or E.
In urbantraffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
On long journeys at aconstant speed,e.g. on the
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areasatthe start of ajourney. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform amanualrest
(
Y page 167).
Further information on the ECO display
(
Y page 166).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on aslippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheelscould lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on aslippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long, steep gradients, you must reduce
the load on the brakes. To use engine braking,
shift to alowergear in good time. This helps
you to avoid overheating the brakes and wear-
ing them out excessively.
When making use of the engine braking
effect, it is possible that adrive wheel may not
turn for some time, e.g. in the case of sud-
denly changing or slippery road surface con-
ditions. This could cause damage to the drive
train. This type of damage is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Change into alowergear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden.
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control or Distance PilotDISTRONIC.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest yourfoot on the brake pedalwhile
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail.There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedalasafootrest. Never
depressthe brake pedaland the accelerator
pedalatthe same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedalconstantly
results in excessive and premature wearto
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to aheavy
load,donot stop the vehicle immediately,but
drive on for ashort while. This allows the airflow
to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for along time in heavy rain
withoutbraking, there may be adelayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You then have to depressthe brake pedalmore
firmly.Maintainagreater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on awet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly whilepaying attention to
the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
136
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you driveonsalted roads,alayer of salt resi-
due may formonthe brakediscsand brake
pads. This can result in asignificantly longer
braking distance.
R
In ordertoprevent any salt build-up, apply the
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
thetraffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress thebrakepedal and the
beginningand end of ajourney.
R
Maintain agreater distancetothe vehicle
ahead.
Servicing thebrakes
!
The brakefluid level may be toolow, if:
R
if thered brakewarning lamp lightsupin
theinstrumentcluster and
R
you hear awarning tone while theengine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brakefluid level may be toolow due to
brakepad wear or leaking brakelines.
Havethe brakesystem checked immediately.
Consult aqualifiedspecialist workshop to
arrange this.
!
As theESP
®
system operates automatically,
theengine and theignitionmust be switched
off (theSmartKey must be in position u or
1 in theignitionlock), if theelectric parking
brakeistested on abraking dynamometer
(maximum 10 seconds).
Brakingtriggered automatically by ESP
®
may
cause severe damage to thebrakesystem.
All checksand maintenancework on thebrake
system must be carried out at aqualifiedspe-
cialistworkshop.
Havebrakepads installedand brakefluid
replaced at aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
If thebrakesystem has onlybeen subject to
moderateloads, you should testthe functional-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
Information on BAS(Brake Assist)(
Y page 57).
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou onlyhave
brakepads/linings installedonyour vehicle
whichhave been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehiclesorwhichcorrespondtoanequivalent
qualitystandard. Brake pads/linings whichhave
not been approved for Mercedes-Ben
zvehic
les
or whichare not of an equivalent qualitycould
affect your vehicle's operatingsafety.
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou onlyuse
brakefluid that has been specially approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or whichcorre-
sponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake
fluid whichhas not been approved for
Mercedes-Benzvehiclesorwhichisnot of an
equivalent qualitycould affect your vehicle's
operatingsafety.
High-performance brake system
(except Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
AMGbrakesystems are designed for heavy
loads and have componentswith corresponding
properties. This may lead to noise when braking.
This will dependon:
R
Speed
R
Brakingforce
R
Ambientconditions, e.g.temperature and
humidity
The wear of individual componentsofthe brake
system, such as thebrakepads/linings or brake
discs, depends on theindividual driving style
and operatingconditions.
For this reason, it is impossibletostate amile-
age that will be valid underall circumstances. An
aggressivedriving style will lead to high wear.
You can obtain moreinformationonthisfroma
qualifiedspecialist workshop.
New and replaced brakepads and discsonly
reachtheir optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for
this by applyinggreater force to thebrakepedal.
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
braking accordinglyduringthisbreak-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
ingly high brakewear. Observe thebrakesystem
warning lamp in theinstrumentcluster and note
any brakestatus messages in themultifunction
display. Especially for high performancedriving,
it is important to maintain and have thebrake
system checked regularly.
Driving tips
137
Driving and parking
Z
Drivingonwet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to acertaindepthon
theroadsurface, there is adanger of hydro-
planingoccurring.
Forthisreason,inthe event of heavyrain or in
conditionsinwhichhydroplaning may occur,
you mustdrive in thefollowingmanner:
R
loweryour speed
R
avoid ruts
R
avoid sudden steeringmovements
R
brake carefully
Drivingonflooded roads
!
Do notdrive through floodedareas. Check
thedepthofany water beforedrivingthrough
it.Drive slowly through standingwater. Oth-
erwise,water could enterthe vehicle interior
or enginecompartment. It can then damage
theengine's or automatic transmission's
electronic components. It can also be sucked
in by theengine's air intake connection and
cause enginedamage.
Winterdriving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on aslipperyroadsurfacein
an attempt to increase theengine's braking
effect,the drive wheels could losetheir grip.
There is an increaseddanger of skidding and
accidents.
Do notshift down foradditional enginebrak-
ingonaslipperyroadsurface.
G
DANGER
If theexhaustpipe is blockedoradequate
ventilation is notpossible, poisonous gases
suchascarbon monoxide (CO) may enterthe
vehicle. Thisisthe case, e.g. if thevehicle
becomes trappedinsnow. There is ariskof
fatal injury.
If you leavethe engineorthe auxiliaryheating
running,makesurethe exhaustpipe and area
around thevehicle are clear of snow. To
ensureanadequatesupply of fresh air, opena
window on thesideofthe vehicle that is not
facingintothe wind.
Haveyour vehicle winter-proofed at aqualified
specialistworkshop at theonset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slipperyroadsur-
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration,steeringand
braking maneuvers.Donot use cruise control.
If thevehicle threatens to skid or cannotbe
stopped when movingatlow speed:
X
Shift thetransmissiontoposition i.
The outsidetemperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warningdeviceand
is therefore unsuitable forthatpurpose.
Changes in theoutsidetemperature are dis-
playedafter ashort delay.
Indicated temperaturesjustabovethe freezing
pointdonot guarantee that theroadsurfaceis
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
skid if you fail to adapt your drivingstyle. Always
adapt your drivingstyle and drive at aspeed to
suit theprevailingweather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tionswhen temperaturesare around freezing
point.
Formoreinformation on drivingwithsnow
chains, see (
Y page 262).
Formoreinformati
on on drivingwithsummer
tires,see (
Y page 262).
Observethe notesinthe "Winteroperation"sec-
tion (
Y page 262).
Drivingsystems
Cruisecontrol
General notes
Cruise controlmaintainsaconstantroadspeed
foryou. It brakesautomatically in order to avoid
exceedingthe set speed. On longand steep
downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is
laden, you mustselectalowergear in goodtime.
By doingso, you will makeuse of thebraking
effect of theengine. Thisrelieves theload on the
brake systemand prevents thebrakesfrom
overheatingand wearingtoo quickly.
Use cruise controlonlyifroadand traffic con-
ditionsmakeitappropriatetomaintain asteady
138
Driving systems
Driving andparking
speed for aprolonged period. You can store any
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adaptyour driving style, cruise con-
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front,for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain aconstant speed e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is achange of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
Stores the current speed or ahigher speed
;
Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed
=
Stores the current speed or alower speed
?
Deactivating cruise control
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction displayfor
five seconds. The speed is then permanently
displayed in the status indicator together with
the ¯ symbol.
On vehicles with asegment ring in the speed-
ometer, the segments from the currently saved
speed to the end of the segment ring light up.
Storing, maintaining and callingupa
speed
Storing and maintaining aspeed
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
You can store the current speed if you are driv-
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphillgradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing or callingupaspeed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting aspeed
G
WARNING
Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
avalue that the prevailing road conditions and
Driving systems
139
Driving and parking
Z
legal speed limitspermit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
X
To adjust theset speed in 1mph incre-
ments(1km/hincrements): briefly press
the cruisecontrol lever up : to the pressure
point for ahigher speed, or down ? for a
lower speed.
Every timethe cruisecontrol lever is pressed
up or down, the last speed stored is increased
or reduced.
X
To adjust theset speed in 5mph incre-
ments(10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruisecontrol lever up : past the pres-
sure point for ahigher speed, or down ? for
alower speed.
Every timethe cruisecontrol lever is pressed
up or down, the last speed stored is increased
or reduced.
i
The speed indicated in the speedometer
may differslightly fromthe speed stored.
i
Cruise control is not deactivatedifyou
depressthe accelerator pedal. For example, if
you acceleratebriefly to overtake, cruisecon-
trol adjuststhe vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
ing.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruisecon-
trol:
X
Briefly press the cruisecontrol lever for-
wards : .
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
you engagethe electric parking brake
R
you are drivingatless than 20 mph (30km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivateESP
®
R
on vehicles with manual transmission,you
shift to agear that is too high, and as aresult
the enginespeed is too low
R
BrakeAssist intervenes
R
you move out of transmission position h
If cruisecontrol is deactivated, you will hear a
warningtone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
i
When you switchoff the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
General notes
DistanceAssist DISTRONIC regulates the speed
and automatically helps you maintain the dis-
tance fromthe vehicle detected in front.Vehi-
cles are detected with the aid of the radar sen-
sor system. DistanceAssist DISTRONIC brakes
automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed
or to maintain the designated distancefromthe
vehicle in front.
Change intoalower gear in good timeonlong
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
importantifthe vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brakesystem and
preventsthe brakes fromoverheatingand wear-
ing too quickly.
If DistanceAssist DISTRONIC detectsthat there
is arisk of acollision with the vehicle in front,
you will be warnedvisually and audibly. Distance
Assist DISTRONIC cannot prevent acollision
without your intervention. An intermittentwarn-
ing tonewill thensound and the distancewarn-
ing lamp will light up in the instrumentcluster.
Brakeimmediately in order to increase the dis-
tance fromthe vehicle in front,ortakeevasive
action, provided it is safe to do so.
For DistanceAssist DISTRONIC to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
DistanceAssist DISTRONIC operates in the
speed rangebetween0mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
140
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Do not useDistance Assist DISTRONIConroads
with steepgradients.
As Distance Assist DISTRONICtransmits radar
waves,itcan resemble the radardetectors of
the responsibleauthorities. Youcan refer to the
relevant chapterinthe Operator'sManualif
questions areasked aboutthis.
i
USA only: Thisdevicehas been approved by
the FCC as a"VehicularRadar System".The
radarsensor is intendedfor useinanauto-
motive radarsystem only. Removal,tamper-
ing,oraltering of the devicewillvoidany war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC.Do
not tamperwith, alter, or useinany non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice
could voidthe user'sauthority to operate the
equipment.
i
Canadaonly: Thisdevicecomplies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operationis
subject to the following two conditions:
1. Thisdevicemay not cause interference,
and
2. Thisdevicemustacceptany interference
received, including interferencethatmay
cause undesired operationofthe device.
Removal,tampering, or altering of the device
will voidany warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamperwith, alter, or useinany non-
approved way.
Any
unau
thorized modification to thisdevice
could voidthe user'sauthority to operate the
equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICdoesnot react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationaryobjects on the road, e.g.stopped
or parked vehicles
R
oncomingvehicles and crossing traffic
As aresult, Distance PilotDISTRONICmay
neithergivewarnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is ariskofanaccident.
Alwayspay carefulattentiontothe trafficsit-
uationand be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICcannotalways
clearly identify otherroadusers and complex
trafficsituations.
In such cases, Distance PilotDISTRONICmay:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neithergiveawarning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is ariskofanaccident.
Continuetodrive carefullyand be ready to
brake, especially if Distance PilotDISTRONIC
warns you.
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICbrakes your vehicle
with up to 50% of the maximum possible
deceleration. If thisdecelerationisnot suffi-
cient, Distance PilotDISTRONICalerts you
with avisualand acoustic warning. There is a
riskofanaccident.
Apply the brakes yourselfinthese situations
and try to take evasive action.
!
When Distance PilotDISTRONICorthe
HOLD functionisactivated,the vehicle
brakes automaticallyincertain situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
Distance PilotDISTRONICand the HOLD
functioninthe following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
If youfailtoadapt your drivingstyle,Distance
PilotDISTRONICcan neitherreduce the riskof
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Distance PilotDISTRONICcannottake into
account road, weather or trafficconditions. Dis-
tance PilotDISTRONICisonlyanaid.You are
responsiblefor the distance to the vehiclein
front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane.
Driving systems
141
Driving andparking
Z
Do not useDistance PilotDISTRONIC:
R
in roadand trafficconditions which do not
allowyou to maintain aconstant speed, e.g.in
heavytrafficoronwinding roads
R
on slippery roadsurfaces.Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
tractionand the vehiclecould thenskid
R
when there is poor visibility,e.g.due to fog,
heavyrainorsnow
Distance PilotDISTRONICmay not detect nar-
row vehicles drivinginfront, e.g.motorcycles, or
vehicles drivingonadifferent line.
In particular,the detection of obstaclescan be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensorsoranything else
coveringthe sensors
R
there is snow or heavyrain
R
there is interferencebyotherradar sources
R
there arestrong radarreflections, for exam-
ple, in parkinggarages
If Distance PilotDISTRONICnolongerdetects a
vehicleinfront, it mayunexpectedly accelerate
to the speedstored.
Thisspeed may:
R
be too high if youare drivinginafilter lane or
an exitlane
R
be so high when drivinginthe right-hand lane
thatyou overtake vehicles in the left-hand
lane
R
be so high when drivinginthe left-hand lane
thatyou overtake vehicles in the ri
ght-hand
lane
If there is achange of drivers, advisethe new
driver of the speedstored.
Cruisecontrollever
Cruise control lever
:
Storesthe current speedorahigherspeed
;
Setting aspecifiedminimumdistance
=
Storing the current speedorcalling up the
last stored speed
?
Storesthe current speedoralower speed
A
Switching off Distance PilotDISTRONIC
ActivatingDistance PilotDISTRONIC
and storing, maintainingand callingup
aspeed
Important safety notes
!
When Distance PilotDISTRONICorthe
HOLD functionisactivated,the vehicle
brakes automaticallyincertain situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
Distance PilotDISTRONICand the HOLD
functioninthe following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
To activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started.Itmay take up to
two minutesofdrivingbeforeDistance Pilot
DISTRONICisready for use.
R
the electricparkingbrake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, butnot intervening.
R
ParkingPilot must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position h.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from j to h or your seatbeltmustbe
fastened.
R
the front-passengerdoormustbeclosed.
R
the vehiclemustnot skid.
142
Driving systems
Driving andparking
Activating
X
Brieflypull thecruise control levertowards
you ?,up : or down ; .
Distance Pilot DISTRONICisactivated.
X
To adjust theset speed in 1mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
thecruise control leverup : to thepressure
pointfor ahigher speed, or down ; to the
pressurepointfor alower speed.
Every timethe cruise control leverispressed
up or down,the last speedstoredisincreased
or reduced.
or
X
To adjust theset speed in 5mph incre-
ments (10km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : past the pres-
sure point for ahigher speed, or down ; past
the pressure point for alower speed.
Everytime the cruise control lever is pressed
up or down, the last speed stored is increased
or reduced.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Distance
Pilot Suspended mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
set distancetoaslower-moving vehicle in
frontwill then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
set is 20 mph (30km/h).
Activatingatthe currentspeed/last
storedspeed
G
WARNING
If you call up thestoredspeedand it differs
from thecurrentspeed, thevehicleacceler-
atesordecelerates. If you do notknowthe
storedspeed, thevehiclecould accelerate or
brakeunexpectedly. Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Pay attentiontothe road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up thestoredspeed. If you
do notknowthe storedspeed, store the
desired speedagain.
X
Brieflypull thecruise control levertowards
you ?.
X
Remove your footfromthe acceleratorpedal.
The first timeDistance Pilot DISTRONICis
activated, it storesthe currentspeedorreg-
ulates thespeedofthe vehicletothe previ-
ously storedspeed.
Pulling awayand driving
X
If you want to pull awaywith Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your footfromthe
brakepedal.
X
Brieflypull thecruise control levertowards
you ?.
or
X
If Distance Pilot DISTRONICisactivated:
accelerate briefly.
Your vehiclepulls away and adaptsits speed
to that of thevehicleinfront.Ifnovehicleis
detected in front, your vehicleacceleratesto
theset speed.
The vehiclecan also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on adiffer-
entlinefromanother vehicle. The vehiclethen
brakes automatically. Be read
ytobra
keatall
times.
If there is no vehicleinfront,Distance Pilot
DISTRONICoperatesinthe same way as cruise
control.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONICdetectsaslower-
moving vehicleinfront,itbrakes your vehicle. In
this way, thedistanceyou have selected is main-
tained.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONICdetectsafaster-
moving vehicleinfront,itincreases thedriving
speed. However, thevehicleisonlyaccelerated
up to thespeedyou have stored.
Selecting thedrive program
Distance Pilot DISTRONICsupportsasporty
driving style when you have selected the S or S+
driveprogram (
Y page 121). Acceleration
behind thevehicleinfront or to theset speedis
then noticeably moredynamic.Ifyou have
selected the C or E driving program,the vehicle
acceleratesmoregently. This settingisrecom-
mended in stop-and-starttraffic.
Driving systems
143
Driving and parking
Z
Changing lanes
If when driving on multilane roads you wish to
change to theovertakinglane,Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC supportsyou if:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
R
Distance PilotDISTRONICismaintaining the
distance to avehicleinfront
R
youswitch on the appropriate turnsignal
R
Distance PilotDISTRONICdoesnot currently
detect adangerofcollision
If these conditions arefulfilled,yourvehicleis
accelerated.Accelerationwillbeinterruptedif
changing lanes takestoo long or if the distance
between your vehicleand the vehicleinfront
becomestoo small.
i
When youchange lanes,Distance Pilot
DISTRONICmonitors the left lane (onleft-
hand-drivevehicles) or the right lane (onright-
hand-drivevehicles).
Stopping
G
WARNING
If youleave the vehiclewhenitisonlybeing
braked by Distance PilotDISTRONIC, it could
rollawayif:
R
there is amalfunctioninthe system or in
the voltagesupply.
R
Distance PilotDISTRONICisswitched off
using the cruisecontrollever,e.g.byavehi-
cle occupant or fromoutside the vehicle
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses aretam-
pered with.
R
the battery is disconnected
R
the vehicleisaccelerated,e.g.byavehicle
occupant.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
Distance PilotDISTRONICand securethe
vehicleagainst rolling away.
Furtherinformationondeactivating Distance
PilotDISTRONIC(
Y page 146).
If Distance PilotDISTRONICdetects thatthe
vehicleinfront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
untilitisstationary.
Once your vehicleisstationary, it remains sta-
tionaryand youdonot needtodepress the
brake.
i
After atime,the electricparkingbrake
secures the vehicleand relieves the service
brake.
i
Depending on the specifiedminimumdis-
tance,yourvehiclewillcome to astandstillat
asufficient distance behind the vehiclein
front. The specifie
dmi
nimumdistance is set
using the controlonthe cruisecontrollever.
When Distance PilotDISTRONICisactivated,
the transmission is shifted automaticallyto
position j if:
R
the driver's seatbeltisnot fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off,unless it is auto-
maticallyswitched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electricparkingbrake secures the vehicle
automaticallyifDistance PilotDISTRONICis
activated when the vehicleisstationaryand:
R
asystem malfunctionoccurs.
R
the powersupplyisnot sufficient.
If amalfunctionoccurs, the transmission may
also shift to position j automatically.
Settingaspeed
Keepinmindthatitmay take abrief moment
untilthe vehiclehas accelerated or braked to
the speedset.
X
To adjustthe setspeed in 1mph incre-
ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pressure
point for ahigher speed, or down ; for a
lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up or down, the last speed stored is increased
or reduced.
X
To adjust theset speed in 5mph incre-
ments(10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressurepoint for ahigher speed, or down ;
for alower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up or down, the last speed stored is increased
or reduced.
144
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Setting aspecified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance for
DistancePilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance that
DistancePilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
cle in front,dependent on the vehicle speed. You
can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
play (
Y page 145).
The specified minimum distance can be
changed while DistancePilot DISTRONIC is
switched on or off.
Make sure that you maintain asufficiently safe
distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the
distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
Cruise control lever
X
To increase: turn control = toward ;.
DistancePilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
greater distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control = toward :.
DistancePilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
shorter distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in
the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When DistancePilot DISTRONIC is activated,
one or more segments ; in the set speed range
light up.
If DistancePilot DISTRONIC detectsavehicle in
front,segments ; between speed of the vehi-
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed set for DistancePilot DISTRONIC.
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
deactivated
:
Vehicle in front,ifdetected
;
Distanceindicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front;adjustable
?
Your vehicle
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (
Y page 170).
Driving systems
145
Driving and parking
Z
Display when DistancePilot DISTRONIC is
activated
:
Vehicleinfront,ifdetected
;
Specified minimum distancetothe vehicle
in front; adjustable
=
Your vehicle
?
DistancePilotDISTRONIC activated
X
Selectthe AssistanceGraphic function
usingthe on-boardcomputer (
Y page 170).
You will initially see thestoredspeed forabout
fiveseconds when you activateDistance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
Deactivating DistancePilot DISTRONIC
Cruisecontrollever
There are severalways to deactivateDistance
PilotDISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press thecruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake,unless thevehicleisstationary
Whenyou deactivateDistance PilotDISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off
message will appear
in themultifunction display forapproximately
fiveseconds.
i
The last speed storedremainsstoreduntil
you switch offthe engine.
i
DistancePilotDISTRONIC is notdeactivated
if you depress theacceleratorpedal. If you
accelerate to overtake,Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjuststhe vehicle's speed to the
last speed storedafter you havefinished over-
taking.
DistancePilotDISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
R
you engage theelectric parkingbrakeorifthe
vehicleisautomatically secured withthe elec-
tric parkingbrake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivateESP
®
R
thetransmissionisinposition j, k or i
R
you pull thecruise control lever towardsyou
in order to pull away and thefront-passenger
doorisopen
R
you activateParking Pilot
R
thevehiclehas skidded
If DistancePilotDISTRONIC is automatically
deactivated, you will hear awarningtone. The
Distance Pilot Off
message will appear in
themultifunction display forapproximately five
seconds.
Tips for drivingwithDistancePilot
DISTRONIC
General notes
The following containsdescriptionsofcertain
roadand traffic conditionsinwhichyou mustbe
particularlyattentive. In suchsituations, brakeif
necessary. DistancePilotDISTRONIC is then
switched off.
Cornering, going intoand coming out of a
bend
146
Driving systems
Driving andparking
Distance PilotDISTRONICcan detect vehicles
when corneringislimited. Your vehiclemay
brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehiclestraveling on adifferentline
Distance PilotDISTRONICmay not detect vehi-
cleswhich arenot drivinginthe middleoftheir
lane. The distance to the vehicleinfront will be
too short.
Othervehicleschanginglanes
Distance PilotDISTRONIChas not detectedthe
vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to thisvehi-
cle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
Distance PilotDISTRONIChas not yetdetected
the vehicleinfront on the edge of the road
because of its narrow width.The distance to the
vehicleinfront will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Distance PilotDISTRONICdoesnot brake for
obstaclesorstationaryvehicles. If, for example,
the detectedvehicleturns acornerand an
obstacle or stationaryvehicleisrevealed, Dis-
tance PilotDISTRONICwillnot brake for them.
Crossingvehicles
Distance PilotDISTRONICmay mistakenly
detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane.
If youactivate Distance PilotDISTRONICunder
the following conditions, the vehiclecould pull
away unintentionally:
R
at trafficlights with crossing traffic, for exam-
ple
R
if there is avehicleinfront after acrossing
with the HOLD functionactivated
Driving systems
147
Driving andparking
Z
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driverinthe
following situations:
R
when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
R
when maneuvering on steep slopes
R
when waiting in traffic
The vehicleiskept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceledand the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedaltopullaway.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
R
there is amalfunction in the system or in
the voltagesupply.
R
the HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedalorthe brake
pedal, e.g. by avehicleoccupant.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuseshave
been tamperedwith.
R
the battery is disconnected
There is arisk of an accident.
If you wishtoexit the vehicle, alwaysturn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
!
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page148).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
the vehicleisstationary.
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
the driver's door is closed or yourseat beltis
fastened.
R
the electric parking brake is released.
R
the transmission is in position h, k or i.
R
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedalfurther
until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedalthe first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivatingthe HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
R
you depress the accelerator and the trans-
mission is in position h or k.
R
you shift the transmission to position j.
R
you apply the brakes again with acertain
amount of pressure until HOLD
disappears
from the multifunction display.
R
you secure the vehicleusing the electric park-
ing brake.
R
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
i
After atime, the electric parking brake
securesthe vehicleand relieves the service
brake.
148
Driving systems
Driving and parking
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is automatically shifted to position j
if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
asystem malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is not sufficient.
If amalfunction in the electric parking brake
occurs,the transmission may also be shifted
into position j automatically.
Adaptive damping system
General notes
i
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: the adaptive
damping system is called AMG RIDE CON-
TROL sports suspension.
Asuspension with the adaptive damping system
provides improved driving comfort and contin-
uously controls the calibration of the dampers.
The damping characteristicsadapt to the cur-
rent operating and driving situation.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface conditions
R
the selected drive program (Y page 121).
Selecting the Comfort or Economy drive
programs
In the Comfort and Economy drive programs,
the driving characteristicsofyour vehicle are
more comfortable. Select one of these drive
programs if you favor amore comfortable driv-
ing style. Also select these drive programs when
driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight
stretches of highway.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeat-
edly until the Comfort or Economy drive pro-
gram is selected.
Selecting Sport mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuningin
the Sport drive program ensures even better
contact with the road. Select this drive program
when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on
winding country roads.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the Sport drive pro-
gram is selected.
Selecting Sport Plus mode
The firmer suspension settings in the Sport
Plus drive program ensure even better contact
with the road. Select this mode when employing
asporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads or, ideally,when driving on closed race
circuits.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeat-
edly until the Sport Plus drive program is
selected.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensorsinthe
frontbumper and four sensorsinthe rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distancebetween your
vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not areplacementfor your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exitingaparking space. Make sure that there
Driving systems
149
Driving and parking
Z
are no persons, animals or objectsinthe pathof
your vehicle when you are maneuvering or park-
ing.
!
When parking,pay particular attention to
objectsaboveorbelow thesensors, suchas
flowerpotsortrailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
does notdetect suchobjectswhen they are in
theimmediatevicinityofthe vehicle.You
coulddamage thevehicle or theobjects.
The sensorsmay notdetect snow and other
objectsthatabsorbultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources suchasanautomatic car
wash, thecompressed-air brakes on atruck
or apneumatic drill couldcausePARKTRONIC
to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may notfunction correctly on
uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R
switch on theignition
R
shiftthe transmission to position h, k or
i
R
release theelectric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivatedat
speeds above11mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
tedatlower speeds.
Range of thesensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does nottakeinto
accountobstacleslocated:
R
below thedetection range, e.g.people, ani-
mals or objects.
R
abovethe detection range, e.g.overhanging
loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.
:
Sensorsinthe frontbumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensorsmust be free from dirt,ice or slush.
They can otherwise notfunction correctly. Clean
thesensorsregularly, taking carenot to scratch
or damage them (
Y page 242).
Range
Frontsensors
Center Approx.40in(approx.
100cm)
Corners Approx.24in(approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx.48in(approx.
120cm)
Corners Approx.32in(approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx.8in (approx.20cm)
Corners Approx.6in (approx.15cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, therel-
evantwarning displays light up and awarning
150
Driving systems
Driving and parking
tone sounds.Ifthe distance fallsbelow the min-
imum,the distance maynolongerbeshown.
Warningdisplays
Warning displayfor the front area
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
=
Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays showthe distance
between the sensors and the obstacle.The
warning displayfor the front area is locatedon
the dashboard above the centerair vents.The
warning displayfor the rearareaislocated
between the rollbars.
The warning displayfor each side of the vehicle
is divided into fiveyellowand two red segments.
Parking Assist PARKTRONICisoperational if yel-
lowsegments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The selected transmission positionand the
direction in which the vehicleisrolling deter-
mine which warning displayisactive when the
engine is running.
Automatic transmission:
Transmission posi-
tion
Warningdisplay
h
Frontareaactivated
k, i or the vehicle
is rolling backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
j
No areasactivated
One or moresegments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle,depending on the vehi-
cle's distance fromthe obstacle.Inaddition,
warning tonesare issued.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
youwillhearanintermittent warning tone.The
shorter thedistance to the obstacle,the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, youhearacontinuous warning tone.
DeactivatingoractivatingParking
Assist PARKTRONIC
:
Deactivatesoractivates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
;
Indicatorlamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up,Parking Assist
PARKTRONICisdeactivated.Parking Guidance
is also deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONICisautomati-
cally activated when youturnthe SmartKeyto
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Driving systems
151
Driving andparking
Z
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. You also
hear awarning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds, and
the indicator lamp in the
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
vated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five sec-
onds.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or malfunctioning.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 242).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC functions in adifferent
location.
Parking Guidance
Important safety notes
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure
the road on both sides of the vehicle. Asuitable
parking space is indicated by the parking sym-
bol. You receive steering instructions when
parking. You can also still use Active Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (
Y page 149).
Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that there are no per-
sons, animals or objectsinthe maneuvering
area when you are maneuvering or parking.
G
WARNING
If objectsare located above or below the
detection range, Active Parking Assist may
steer too early. This could cause acollision.
There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in these
types of situation.
!
If they cannot be avoided, drive over obsta-
cles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
If Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable.
Parking Guidance may also display spaces not
suitable for parking, e.g.:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
R
paralleltothe direction of travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
that are on the same level as the road, i.e. not
on the pavement, for example. Parking Guid-
ance may not detect flat curbs
152
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Parking tips:
R
on narrow roads, drive as closely as possible
past the parking space
R
parking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly
R
parking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly
R
snowfall or heavy rain may lead to aparking
space being measured inaccurately
R
pay attention to the Active Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning messages during the
parking procedure (
Y page 151)
R
when transportingaload which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Parking
Guidance
R
never use Parking Guidance with snow chains
or an emergencyspare wheel fitted
R
make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has adirect effect on the steer-
ing instructions
R
the way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in frontand
behind it and the conditions of the location. In
some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you
too far or not far enough into aparking space.
In some cases, it may also lead you across or
ontothe curb. If necessary, cancel the park-
ing procedure with Parking Guidance.
Detecting parking spaces
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Parking Guidance is automatically activated
when you drive forwards. The system is opera-
tional at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
(35km/h).While in operation, the system inde-
pendently locatesand measures parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle. Whendriving at
speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), youwillsee
parking symbol ; as astatusindicator in the
instrument cluster.
Whenaparking space hasbeendetected, an
arrow towards the right = or the left : also
appears. Parking Guidance only displayspark-
ing spaces on the front-passenger sideasstand-
ard.Parking spaces on the driver'ssideare dis-
played as soonasthe turn signal on the driver's
sideisactivated. To park on the driver'sside,
youmustleave the driver'ssideturn signal
switched on untilyou have engaged reverse
gear.
Parking Guidance will only detect parking
spaces:
R
that are paralleltothe direction of travel
R
that are at least5ft(1.5 m) wide
R
thatare at least4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer thanyour
vehicle
Aparking space is displayed whileyou are driv-
ing past it, and untilyou are approximately50ft
(15 m) away from it.
Parking
Movingthe vehicle into the stopposition
X
Stop the vehiclewhenthe parking space sym-
bolshows the desired parking space in the
instrument cluster.
X
Vehicles with manualtransmission: shift to
reverse gear.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
the transmission to position k.
The multifunctiondisplay shows the Be
Aware of Obstacles Near the Vehicle
Press 'OK'toConfirm message.
X
Press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheeltoconfirm.
The multifunctiondisplay switches to Parking
Guidance.
Driving systems
153
Driving andparking
Z
Depending on your distance fromthe parking
space,the Please Drive Backward
mes-
sage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.
X
If necessary,reversetowards the parking
space.Thisisindicated by an arrow pointing
backwards.
Continuebacking up untilyou hear atone.
Stop –the stop positionhas been reached.
The arrow is white.
The Please
Steer Wheel to the Right or
Please Steer Wheel to the Left
mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay.
Backingupintothe parking space
X
Whilethe vehicleisstationary, turnthe steer-
ing wheelinthe specifieddirection untilthe
arrow is white and awarning tone sounds.
X
To backupintoaparking space: maintain
the steeringwheel angle and back up care-
fully.
X
Stop as soonasyou hear awarning tone,
The vehiclehas reachedthe positioninwhich
youneedtocountersteer.
The Please
Steer Wheel to the Right or
Please Steer Wheel to the Left
mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
To countersteer: whilethe vehicleisstation-
ary, turnthe steeringwheel in the specified
direction untilthe arrow is white and awarn-
ing tone sounds.
X
To backupintoaparking space: maintain
the steeringwheel angle and back up care-
fully.
X
Stop as soonasyou hear awarning tone,Stop
as soonasParkingAssist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone,ifnot
before.
The Parking
Guidance Finished message
appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay and a
tone sounds.You maybeasked to steerina
different direction and thenchange gear.In
thiscase, furtherdisplaysinthe multifunction
displaywilldirect youtothe finalposition.
X
Maneuver if necessary.
X
Alwaysobserve the warning messagesdis-
played by ParkingAssist PARKTRONIC
(
Y page 151).
CancelingParking Guidance
X
Press the PARKTRONICbutton on the center
console(
Y page 151).
ParkingGuidance is immediatelycanceled
and ParkingAssist PARKTRONICisswitched
off.
ParkingGuidance is canceled automaticallyifit
is no longerpossibletoguide youinto the park-
ing space,orifamalfunctionoccurs.
The parkingspace symbolgoesout and awarn-
ing tone sounds.
Rearviewcamera
General notes
Rear viewcamera : is an opticalparkingand
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
vehiclewithguide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem.
The area behind the vehicleisdisplayed as a
mirror image,asinthe rearviewmirror.
i
The text shown in the multimedia system
displaydepends on the languagesetting. The
following areexamples of rearviewcamera
displays in the multimedia system.
154
Driving systems
Driving andparking
Important safety notes
The rear viewcamera is only an aid. It is nota
replacementfor your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safemaneuveringand parking.Makesure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
themaneuveringarea when you are maneuver-
ing or parking.
Under thefollowingcircumstances, therear
viewcamera will notfunction,orwill function in
alimitedmanner:
R
if thetrunk lid is open
R
in heavyrain,snoworfog
R
at night or in verydark places
R
if thecamera is exposed to verybright light
R
if thearea is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is asuddenchangeintemperature,
e.g. when driving intoaheated garage in win-
ter
R
if thecamera lensisdirtyorobstructed.
Observethe notesoncleaning
(
Y page 242)
R
if therear of your vehicleisdamaged. In this
case, havethe camera position and setting
checkedataqualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functionsofthe rear
viewcamera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on therear of thevehicle(e.g.
license plateholder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles withheight-adjustable chassis,
leaving thestandard height can result in inac-
curaciesi
nthe g
uide lines, depending on tech-
nical conditions.
i
The contrastofthe display may be affected
by thesuddenpresence of sunlightorother
lightsources, e.g. when exiting agarage. Pay
particular attention in this situation.
i
If usabilityisseverely restricted, e.g. due to
pixel errors,have thedisplay repairedor
replaced.
i
The rear viewcamera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by meansofaflap.When the
rear viewcamera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
R
you havefinishedthe maneuveringprocess
R
you switch off theengine
R
you open thetrunk
Observethe notesoncleaning (
Y page 242).
Fortechnical reasons, theflap may remain
open briefly after therear viewcamera has
been deactivated.
Activating/deactivating therearview
camera
X
To activate: makesurethatthe SmartKey is
in position 2 in theignition lock.
X
Makesurethatthe ActivationbyRgear
function is selected in themultimedia system;
see theDigital Owner'sManual.
X
Engage reversegear.
The rear viewcamera flap opens. The multi-
media system shows thearea behind thevehi-
cle withguide lines.
The imagefromthe rear viewcamera is avail-
able throughout themaneuveringprocess.
To deactivate: therear viewcamera deacti-
vates if you driveforwards ashort distances or
shiftthe transmission to j.
The inner segments of thewarning indicator are
displayed in red if there is acomplete system
failure. The indicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC
buttonlights up.
If therear system fails:
R
therear segments are displayed in red when
reversing
R
therear segments are notdisplayed when
driving forwards
Displaysinthe multimediasystem
The rear viewcamera may showadistorted view
of obstacles, showthemincorrectlyornot at all.
The rear viewcamera does notshowobjects in
thefollowingpositions:
R
veryclose to therear bumper
R
under therear bumper
R
in close range abovethe handle on thetrunk
lid
!
Objects notatground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
thebumper of aparked vehicle
R
thedrawbar of atrailer
R
theball couplingofatrailer towhitch
R
therear section of an HGV
R
aslantedpost
Driving systems
155
Driving and parking
Z
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
:
Yellowguide line at adistance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide line without steering input
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
=
Yellowguide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellowlane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
A
Yellowguide line at adistance of approx-
imately 3ft(1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at adistance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position k.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
:
Front warning display
;
Additional measurement operational readi-
ness indicator for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
=
Rear warning display
Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:
when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (
Y page 150), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system. If the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into aparking space
without steering input
:
White guide line without steering input
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
;
Yellowguide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
156
Driving systems
Driving and parking
=
Yellow guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 3ft(1.0m)from the rear of the vehi-
cle
?
Red guide line at adistance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X
Make sure that the rear view camerais
switched on (
Y page 155).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
With the help of white guide line :,check
whether the vehicle will fit intothe parking
space.
X
Usingwhite guide line : as aguide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is thenatthe end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
ing input
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the current
steeringwheel angle (dynamic)
X
Drive past the parking space and bringthe
vehicle to astandstill.
X
Make sure that the rear view camerais
switched on (
Y page 155).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
While the vehicle is at astandstill, turn the
steeringwheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
ing space marking :.
X
Maintain the steeringinput and reverse care-
fully.
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the current
steeringwheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
frontofthe parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
Whiteguide line at the current steeringinput
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steeringwheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at adistance of approximately
12 in (0.30m)from the rear of the vehicle
;
Whiteguide line without steeringinput
=
Endofparking space
Driving systems
157
Driving and parking
Z
X
Back up carefully untilyou havereached the
finalposition.
Redguide line : is then at end of parking
space =.The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
180°view
:
Symbol for the 180° viewfunction
;
Yourvehicle
=
Warning displaysfor Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
You can also use the rearviewcamera to select
a180° view.
WhenParking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional(
Y page 150), asymbol for your own vehi-
cle appears in the multimedia system. If the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays
are active, warning displays = light up in the
multimedia system in yellow or red accordingly.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps youduring long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.Itis
active in the rangebetween 50 mph (80 km/h)
and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators
of fatigueorincreasing lapsesinconcentration
on the part of the driver, it suggests youtake a
break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fati-
gueorlapsesinconcentration by taking the fol-
lowing criteria into account:
R
your personaldriving style, e.g. steering char-
acteristics
R
journey details, e.g. time of dayand length of
journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occuratall:
R
if the roadcondition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
R
if there is astrong sidewind
R
if youhaveadoptedasporty driving stylewith
highcornering speeds or highratesofaccel-
eration
R
if youare predominantly driving slowerthan
50 mph (80 km/h)orfaster than 112 mph
(180 km/h)
R
if youare currently using COMAND or making
atelephone callwithit
R
if the time has beenset incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as whenyou
changelanes or changeyourspeed
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aidtothe driver. It
might not always recognize fatigueorincreasing
inattentiveness in time or failtorecognize them
at all. The system is not asubstitute for awell-
restedand attentive driver.
Warningand display messagesinthe
multifunctiondisplay
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (
Y page 171).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, youwillbe
warned no sooner than 20 minutes afteryour
journey has begun. You then hearaninter-
mittent warning tone twice and the ATTEN‐
TION ASSIST: Take aBreak! message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
If necessary, take abreak.
X
Pressthe a or % button to confirmthe
message.
On long journeys, take regularbreaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo
not take abreak and ATTENTION ASSIST still
detects increasing lapsesinconcentration, you
will be warned againafter15minutes at the
earliest.
ATTENTION ASSIST is resetwhenyou continue
your journey and starts assessing your tiredness
againif:
R
youswitch off the engine
R
youtake off your seatbeltand openthe driv-
er's door, e.g. for achangeofdrivers or to
take abreak
158
Drivingsystems
Drivingand parking
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistancegraphics display.
Vehicles with COMAND: if awarning is output
in the multifunction display, aservice station
search is performed in the multimedia system.
You can select aservice station and navigation
to this service station will then begin. This func-
tion can be activated and deactivated in the
multimedia system.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (
Y page 159) and Lane Keeping
Assist (
Y page 161).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
sors. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
respondingturn signal to change lane, you will
also receive an optical and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with alarge speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As aresult, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations.There is arisk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain asafe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitutefor
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficientdistancetothe side for other road
users and obstacles.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a"Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotiveradar
system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Anyunauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensorsfor Blind Spot Assist are inte-
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensorsmust not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhangingloads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensorsoranything else
coveringthe sensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
R
there are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
R
the road has very wide lanes
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you are not driving in the middle of the lane
R
there are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Driving systems
159
Driving and parking
Z
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areaupto10ft
(3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly nextto
your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this
purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensorsin
the rear bumper.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane nexttoyour vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if thereare vehicles driving at the inner
edge of their lanes.
Due to the natureofthe system:
R
warningsmay be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
R
warningsmay be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for apro-
longed time.
Indicator and warning display
:
Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Blind Spot Assist is not activeatspeeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrorslights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30km/h).Atspeeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goesout and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If avehicleisdetected within the blind spot
monitoring rangeatspeeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing sidelights up red.Thiswarning is always
emitted when avehicleentersthe blind spot
monitoring rangefrom behind or from the side.
Whenyou overtake avehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goesout if reverse
gearisengaged.Inthis event, Blind Spot Assist
is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjustedautomaticallyaccording to the ambi-
ent light.
Collisionwarning
If avehicleisdetected in the monitoring rangeof
Blind Spot Assist and youswitch on the corre-
sponding turn signal,adoublewarning tone
sounds. Redwarning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.
SwitchingonBlind SpotAssist
X
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 171)isactivatedinthe on-board
computer.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exteriormirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
LaneKeeping Assist monitors thearea in front of
your vehicle with camera :,whichismounted
at thetop of thewindshield. LaneKeeping Assist
detectslane markingsonthe road and warns
you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
If you select km
on theon-board computerinthe
DisplayUnitSpeed-/Odometer
function
(
Y page 172), LaneKeeping Assist is active
starting at aspeed of 60 km/h. If the miles
display unit is selected,the assistance range
beginsat40mph.
Awarning may be givenifafront wheel passes
over alane marking.Itwill warn you by meansof
intermittent vibrationinthe steeringwheel for
up to 1.5seconds.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
LaneKeeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, LaneKeeping Assist can:
R
give an unnecessarywarning
R
not give awarning
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to thetraffic
situationand keepwithin thelane, especially
if LaneKeeping Assist alertsyou.
G
WARNING
The LaneKeeping Assist warning does not
return thevehicle to theoriginal lane. Thereis
arisk of an accident.
You should always steer, brakeoraccelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeep-
ing Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeep-
ing Assist can neither reducethe risk of an acci-
dentnor override thelaws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot takeintoaccount the
road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for thedistancetothe vehicle in front,for vehi-
cle speed,for braking in good timeand for stay-
ing in your lane.
The LaneKeeping Assist does not keepthe vehi-
cle in thelane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g.due to insufficient
illuminationofthe road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
R
there is glare,e.g.fromoncomingtraffic, the
sun or reflections(e.g. when theroad surface
is wet)
R
thewindshieldisdirty, fogged up, damagedor
covered,for instance by asticker, in thevicin-
ity of thecamera
R
there are no, several or unclear lane markings
for alane, e.g.inareas with road construction
work
R
thelane markingsare worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g.bydirt or snow
R
thedistancetothe vehicle in front is toosmall
and thelane markingsthuscannot be detec-
ted
R
thelane markingschange quickly, e.g.lanes
branch off,cross one another or merge
R
theroad is narrow and winding
R
there are strongshadows cast on theroad
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on LaneKeeping Assist usingthe on-
board computer; to do so, select Standard
or Adaptive (Y page 171).
If you driveatspeedsabove 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
thelinesinthe assistance graphicsdisplay
(
Y page 170) are showningreen. LaneKeep-
ing Assist is ready for use.
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for acertain
period of time
R
adriving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS,BAS or ESP
®
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for acertain
period of time
R
adriving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown
R
you brake hard
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly
R
you cut the corner on asharp bend
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. afreeway
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you cut the corner on abend
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe vehi-
cle when driving,you may be distractedfrom
thetraffic situation.You could also lose con-
trol of thevehicle. Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsurethatthis
is possible,park thevehiclepayingattention
to traffic conditionsand operate theequip-
mentwhen thevehicleisstationary.
You must observethe legal requirements for the
country in whichyou are currentlydriving when
operating theon-board computer.
G
WARNING
If theinstrumentclusterhas failedormal-
functioned, you may notrecognize function
restrictionsinsystems relevanttosafety. The
operating safetyofyour vehiclemay be
impaired.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Drive on carefully. Havethe vehiclechecked
at aqualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messagesor
warningsfromcertainsystems in themultifunc-
tion display. You should thereforemakesure
your vehicleisoperating safely at all times.
If theoperating safetyofyour vehicleis
impaired,pull overassoonasitissafetodoso.
Contactaqualified specialist workshop.
Foranoverview, see theinstrumentpanel illus-
tration (
Y page 32).
Displaysand operation
Instrumentcluster lighting
The lighting in theinstrumentcluster, in thedis-
plays and thecontrols in thevehicleinterior can
be adjusted usingthe brightness control knob.
The brightness control knob is locatedonthe
bottomleftofthe instrumentcluster
(
Y page 32).
X
Turn thebrightness control knob clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
If you turnthe lightswitch (
Y page 95)tothe
Ã, T or L position,the brightness
will depend upon thebrightness of theambi-
entlight.
The lightsensor in theinstrumentcluster
automatically controlsthe brightness of the
multifunction display. In daylight, thedisplays
in theinstrumentclusterare notilluminated.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in thespeedometer indicate
whichspeedrange is available.
R
Cruisecontrolactivated (Y page 138):
The segments lightupfromthe storedspeed
to themaximum speed.
R
DistancePilot DISTRONICisactivated
(
Y page 140):
Oneortwo segments in theset speedrange
lightup.
R
DistancePilot DISTRONICdetects avehiclein
frontmoving moreslowly than thestored
speed:
The segments between thespeedofthe vehi-
cle in frontand thestoredspeedlightup.
Tachometer
!
Do notdriveinthe overrevving range, as this
could damagethe engine.
The red bandinthe tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supplyisinterrupted to protect the
enginewhen thered bandisreached.
Outsidetemperaturedisplay
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tionswhen temperatures are aroundfreezing
point.
Bearinmindthatthe outside temperature dis-
play indicates thetemperature measured and
does notrecord theroad temperature.
The outside temperature display is in themulti-
function display (
Y page 165).
Achangeinthe outside temperature is shown in
themultifunction display after adelay.
Displaysand operation
163
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Coolanttemperaturegauge
G
WARNING
Opening thehood when theengineisover-
heated or when there is afireinthe engine
compartmentcouldexpose you to hot gases
or other serviceproducts. Thereisariskof
injury.
Let an overheatedenginecooldown before
opening thehood.Ifthere is afireinthe
enginecompartment, keep thehood closed
and contactthe firedepartment.
!
Adisplay message is shown if thecoolant
temperatureistoo high.
If thecoolant temperatureisover248
(120†), do notcontinue driving.The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperaturegage is in theinstru-
mentclusteronthe right-handside (
Y page 32).
The H markinginthe coolant temperaturegauge
corresponds to acoolant temperatureof
approximately 248‡(120†).
Under normal operatingconditionsand at the
correctcoolant level, thecoolant temperature
gauge may risetothe H marking.
Operatingthe on-boardcomputer
Overview
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Leftcontrol panel
X
To activate theon-boardcomputer: turn
theSmartKey to position 1 in theignition
lock.
You can control themultifunction display and
thesettings in theon-board computer usingthe
buttons on themultifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
R
Calls up themenuand menubar
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrollsinlists
R
Selectsasubmenuorfunction
R
In the Audio menu: selectsthe
previous or next station, when the
preset list or stationlist is active,
or an audio track or videoscene
R
In the Tel (telephone)menu:
switches to thephonebook and
selects anameortelephone num-
ber
164
Displays and operation
On-boardcomputer and displays
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the Audio menu: selects apre-
set list or astation list in the
desired frequency range, selects
an audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display
message
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Switches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice
Control System
R
Hides display messages or calls up
the last Trip
menu function used
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Callsupthe standard display in the
Trip
menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends acall
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts acall
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
?
R
Switches on voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice
Control System
You can find further information on voice-oper-
ated control for navigation in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions in vehicles with an
Audio 20 multimedia system.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system:
you can find further information on the Voice
Control System in the separate operating
instructions.
Multifunction display
:
Drive program (Y page 122)
;
Transmission position (Y page 122)
=
Text field
?
Menu bar
A
Time
B
Outside temperature or speed
(
Y page 172)
Set the time using the multimedia system; see
the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after afew seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu and display messages.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (
Y page 128)
R
j Parking Guidance (Y page 152)
R
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 138)
R
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 98)
R
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 118)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 148)
Displays and operation
165
On-board computer and displays
Z
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer(
Y page164).
Depending on the vehicleequipment, you can
select the following menu:
R
Trip menu (Y page166)
R
Navi menu (navigationinstructions)
(
Y page167)
R
Audio menu (Y page168)
R
Tel menu (telephone) (Y page169)
R
DriveAssist menu (assistance)
(
Y page170)
R
Serv. menu (Y page171)
R
Sett. menu (settings) (Y page172)
R
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
(
Y page175)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the steer-
ing wheeluntil the Trip
menu with trip odom-
eter : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start
or From Reset.
The values in the From
Start submenu are cal-
culated from the start of ajourney whilst the
values in the From Reset
submenu are calcu-
lated from the lasttime the submenu was reset
(
Y page167).
In the following cases,the trip computerisauto-
matically reset From Start
:
R
the ignitionhas been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hourshave beenexceeded.
R
9,999 mileshave been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 mileshave been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset
.
ECOdisplay
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignitionremains switched off for longer
than four hours,the ECO display willbeauto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display,see
(
Y page135).
Displayingthe range and current fuel
consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Trip
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the display with
approximate range : and current fuel con-
sumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to yourcurrent driving
166
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only asmall amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, avehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles.
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
Agearshift recommendation Z may also
appearinthe display.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation when shifting manually
(
Y page 128).
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43: agearshift recom-
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction displayand not in the digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO displayare
also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on naviga-
tion in the Digital Operator's Manual of the mul-
timedia system.
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi
menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course" symbol
Menus and submenus
167
On-board computer and displays
Z
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
:
Road intowhichthe change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distancedisplay
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When achange of direction is announced,you
will see change-of-direction symbol = and dis-
tance graphic ;.The distanceindicator short-
ens towards thetop of thedisplay as you
approach thepointofthe announced change of
direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Road intowhichthe change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distancedisplay
=
Lanes notrecommended
?
Recommendedlane and new lane duringa
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads,new lane recommendations
can be displayedfor thenextchange of direction
if thedigital map supportsthisdata. During the
change of direction,new lanesmay be added.
Lanenot recommended =:you will notbeable
to completethe nextchange of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Recommendedlane and new lane duringa
change of direction ?:inthislane you will be
able to completethe nexttwo changes of direc-
tionwithout changinglane.
Other status indicators of thenaviga-
tion system
The navigation system displays additional infor-
mation and thevehicle status.
Possible displays:
R
New Route... or Calculating Route...
Anew routeiscalculated.
R
RoadNot Mapped
The vehicle position is inside thearea of the
digital map but theroad is notrecognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parksorprivate land.
R
No Route
No routecouldbecalculatedtothe selected
destination.
R
O
You have reached thedestination or an inter-
mediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting aradio station
:
Activestationlist
;
Stationfrequency with memory position
The multifunction display showsstation ; with
stationfrequency or stationname. The preset
position is only displayedalongwith station ; if
this has been stored.
X
Switch on themultimedia system and select
radio (see theDigital Operator's Manual).
X
Pressthe = or ; button on thesteering
wheel to selectthe Audio
menu.
X
To select apreset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
168
Menusand submenus
On-boardcomputer and displays
the presetlistorstationlistinthe desired
frequency range is shown.
X
To select astation: brieflypress 9
or :.
SIRIUS XM
®
satellite radioacts like anormal
radio.
For moreinformation on radiooperation, see
"Satellite radio" in the DigitalOperator'sMan-
ual.
Operatinganaudioplayer or audio
media
Audio data fromvarious audiodevices or media
can be played,depending on the equipment
installedinthe vehicle.
X
Switch on the multimedia systemand select
CD or MP3mode(seethe DigitalOwner's
Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Audio
menu.
X
To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select atrackfromthe tracklist(rapid
scrolling): press and holdthe 9 or :
button untildesired track : appears.
If youpress and holdthe 9 or : button,
the rapidscrolling speedisincreased. Not all
audiodrives or data carriers support thisfunc-
tion.
If track information is stored on the audio
deviceormedium, the multifunctiondisplay
will showthe numberand titleofthe track.
VideoDVD operation
X
Switch on the multimedia systemand select
video DVD (see the DigitalOperator'sMan-
ual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Audio
menu.
X
To select the next or previous scene:
brieflypress the 9 or : button.
X
To select ascene fromthe scenelist
(rapid scrolling): press and holdthe 9
or : button untildesired scene :
appears.
Telephonemenu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If youoperate information systems and com-
municationequipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, youmay be distracted from
the trafficsituation. Youcould also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is ariskofanacci-
dent.
Onlyoperate thisequipment when the traffic
situationpermits. If youare not sure thatthis
is possible, park the vehiclepayingattention
to trafficconditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicleisstationary.
When telephoning,you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which youare
currentlydriving.
X
Switch on the mobilephone (see the manu-
facturer’soperating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimedia system(seethe
DigitalOperator'sManual)
X
EstablishaBluetooth
®
connectiontothe mul-
timedia system(
Y page 215).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the Tel
menu.
Youwillsee one of the following displaymes-
sagesinthe multifunctiondisplay:
R
Phone READY or the nameofthe network
provider: the mobilephone hasfound anet-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No Service:there is no network
availableorthe mobilephone is searching for
anetwork.
Menus and submenus
169
On-board computer and displays
Z
Accepting acall
If someonecallsyou when you are in the Tel
menu, adisplay message appearsinthe multi-
function display.
You can accept acall at any time regardless of
themenuselected.
X
Press the 6 buttononthe steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejects or endsacall
X
Press the ~ buttononthe steering wheel
to rejectorend acall.
Selecting an entry in thephone book
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 9, : or a buttonto
switch to thephone book.
X
Authorizeaccess to thephone book on the
phone.
X
Press : or 9 to select thenames one
after theother.
or
X
To startrapid scrolling: press and hold
the : or 9 buttonfor longer than one
second.
The names in thephone book are displayed
quicklyone after theother.
Rapid scrollingstops when you release the
buttonorreachthe endofthe list.
X
If only one telephone number is storedfor
aname: press the 6 or a buttonto
start dialing.
or
X
If there is morethanone number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
buttontodisplay thenumbers.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect the
number you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a buttontostart dialing.
or
X
To exit thetelephone book: press the ~
or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves thelast names or
numbersdialed in theredial memory.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 6 buttontoswitch to theredial
memory.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect the
desired nameornumber.
X
Press the 6 or a buttontostart dialing.
or
X
To exit theredial memory: press the ~
or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Dependingonyour vehicle's equipment, in the
DriveAssist
menu, you havethe following
options:
R
Displaying theassistancegraphic
(
Y page 170)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
(
Y page 171)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(
Y page 171)
R
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 171)
R
Activating/deactivating LaneKeepingAssist
(
Y page 171)
Displaying theassistance graphic
170
Menusand submenus
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Assist. Graphic
.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The multifunction display shows the Distance
Assist DISTRONIC distancedisplay in the
assistancegraphic display.
The assistancegraphic shows you the status
of and/or information from other driving sys-
tems or driving safety systems:
R
Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 140)
R
Active Brake Assist (Y page 58)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 158)
R
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 161)
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
You can use this function to activateordeacti-
vate Active Brake Assist.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistancegraphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(
Y page 58).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistancegraphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (
Y page 158).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
Further information on Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 159).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keeping Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The currentselection appears.
X
Press a again.
X
Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard or
Adaptive
.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
multifunction display shows the lane mark-
ings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.
Further information on Lane Keeping Assist
(
Y page 161).
Service menu
Dependingonthe equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv.
menu:
R
Calling up display messages (Y page 178)
R
Restartingthe tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (
Y page 267)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(
Y page 267)
R
Calling up the service due date
(
Y page 237)
Menus and submenus
171
On-board computer and displays
Z
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, in the Sett.
menu you have the follow-
ing options:
R
Changing the instrumentcluster settings
(
Y page 172)
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 172)
R
Changing the vehicle settings (Y page 173)
R
Changing the convenience settings
(
Y page 174)
R
Restoring the factory settings (Y page 175)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allowsyou to choose whether certain dis-
playsappear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
func-
tion.
The current setting km
or miles appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
appliesto:
R
the digital speedometer in the Trip menu
R
the odometer and trip odometer
R
the trip computer
R
the current consumption and the range
R
navigation instructions in the Navi menu
R
cruise control
R
DistanceAssist DISTRONIC
R
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allowsyou
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display:
function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature
or Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
[mph],appears.
X
To change the setting: press a again.
Lights
Setting the daytime running lamps
This function is not available in Canada.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running Lights
function.
If the Daytime
Running Lights function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the
W symbol in the multifunction display are
shown in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
(
Y page 95).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-
function.
The current settingappears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off
to Level 5
(bright).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
172
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Setting the ambient lighting color
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light Col.
function.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set the color
to SOLAR
, SOLAR Orange or SOLAR Red.
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Activating/deactivating surround light-
ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-
off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Surround
Lighting function.
If the Surround
Lighting function is activa-
ted, the multifunction display shows the light
cone and the area around the vehicle in
orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating exterior lighting delayed switch-off
temporarily:
X
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey
to position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Exterior lighting delayed switch-offisdeacti-
vated.
Exterior lighting delayed switch-offisreactiva-
ted the next time you start the engine.
If you have activated the Surround Lighting
function and you turn the light switch to Ã,
the following functions are activated when it is
dark:
R
surround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the
surround lighting is switched off and auto-
matic headlamp mode is activated
(
Y page 95).
R
exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close all
the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light-
ing goes off after 15 seconds.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when
the surround lighting and delayed switch-off
exterior lighting are on, the following light up:
R
parking lamps
R
low-beam headlamps
R
daytime running lamps
R
side marker lamps
R
surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay
function, the interior lighting remains on for
20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting Delay
function.
When the Interior Lighting Delay
func-
tion is activated, the vehicle interior is dis-
played in orange in the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of approximately 9mph (15 km/h).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
Menus and submenus
173
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock
function.
When the Automatic Door Lock
function is
activated, the multifunction display shows the
left-hand vehicle door in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (
Y page 71).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-
cle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock
function.
If the Acoustic Lock
function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display
lights up orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Comfort
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXITfeature
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steeringwheel, you and other vehicle
occupants–particularly children –could
become trapped. There is arisk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function position
buttons, or
R
move the switch for steeringwheel adjust-
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steeringwheel is moving.
The adjustmentprocess is stopped.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9,select the Easy Entry/
Exit function.
If the Easy
Entry/Exit function is activated,
the multifunction display shows the steering
wheel in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (
Y page 89).
Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment
function.
When the Belt Adjustment
function is acti-
vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in
the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment, see
(
Y page 42).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only availablewhen the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
This function is only availableinCanada.
When you activatethe Auto.
Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(
Y page 91), they will not fold out automatically.
The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out
using the button on the door.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
174
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding
function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding
function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the exterior mirror in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Restoring the factorysettings
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?
function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes
.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
If you have selected Yes
and confirmed, the
multifunction display shows aconfirmation
message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is only
reset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Transmission oil temperature
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP
=
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine and transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at nor-
mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
SETUP
:
Engine mode Eco/Comfort/Sport/
Sport +
/Manual
;
Steering Comfort/Sport
=
ESP
®
On/Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport
SETUPdisplays the following information, func-
tions and settings:
R
the digital speedometer
R
the gear indicator
R
the engine mode
R
the steeringsetting
R
the setting of the ECO start/stop function
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode
X
Press = or ; on the steeringwheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUPappears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER
The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
Menus and submenus
175
On-board computer and displays
Z
:
Lap
;
RACE TIMER
You can start the RACE TIMER when the engine
is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheeltoselect the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
Starting anew lap
:
RACE TIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
It is possible to store amaximum of sixteen laps.
The 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐
ish Lap.
Stopping the RACE TIMER
X
Press the % button on the steering wheel.
X
Confirm Yes with a.
The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop the
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and then press a to confirm
Start
,timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACE TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap
.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All lapsare
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X
Resetthe current lap.
X
Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race-Timer?
appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the : button to select Yes and press
the a button to confirm.
All lapsare deleted.
176
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMERoverall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distance covered
A
Maximum speed
If you save at least one lap and then stop RACE-
TIMER, an overall evaluation is available.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap
evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in aseparate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select adif-
ferentlap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning toneoracontinuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 148)
R
Parking(Y page 131)
Display messages
177
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hidesthe display message.
High-priority display messages are showninred in the multifunction display.Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display showsthese messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computersavescertain display messages in the messagememory.You can call up
the display messages:
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheeltoselect the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2Messages
,for example.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignitionisswitched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are alsodeleted.
178
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitabledistance, making slight steering move-
ments at aspeed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the displaymessage disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction displaystill shows the displaymessage:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canadaonly), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
179
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition,the ÷ and å warning lampslightupinthe instru-
mentcluster.
The self-diagnosis function might notbecomplete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above.
The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at aspeed above12mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lampslightupinthe instru-
ment cluster.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally,but withoutthe
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unabletostabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
180
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T !
÷
Inoperative See
Operator'sManual
EBD(electronic brakeforce distribution), ABSand ESP
®
are malfunc-
tioning.
Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition,the ÷, å and ! warning lampslightupinthe
instrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above. The frontand rear wheels could thereforelock
if you brakehard, for example.
The steerabilityand braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only)
! (Canada
only)
TurnOnthe Igni‐
tion to Release the
ParkingBrake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attemptedtorelease theelectric parking brakewhile theignition
was switched off.
X
SmartKey: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.
X
KEYLESS-GO: switch on theignition.
F (USA
only)
! (Canada
only)
Please
Release Park‐
ing Brake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and awarning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic release of the
electric parking brakeisnot fulfilled (
Y page 132).
You are drivingwiththe electric parking brakeapplied.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and awarning tone sounds.
You are usingthe electric parking brakefor emergencybraking
(
Y page 132).
F (USA
only)
! (Canada
only)
ParkingBrake See
Operator'sManual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Press theelectric parking brakehandle for at least tenseconds.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
181
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp lightup.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
or
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 132).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and theyellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
To apply:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brakemanually.
If thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinuestoflash:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 281).
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Turn thefront wheels towardsthe curb.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
182
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brake.
If it is notpossibletoengage theelectric parking brake:
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
If it is notpossibletorelease theelectric parking brake:
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 132).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release theelectric parking brake, thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.Itisnot possibletoapply
theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j,asthe electric parking brake
is notappliedautomatically.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
F (USA
only)
! (Canada
only)
ParkingBrake Inop‐
erative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning,e.g.because of over-
voltageorundervoltage.
X
Remove thecausefor theovervoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging thebattery or restarting theengine.
X
Engage or release theelectric parking brake.
If it remainsimpossible to apply or release theelectric parking brake:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Engage or release theelectric parking brake.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbeapplied:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
183
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and thered F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is notpossibletoapply theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
$ (USAonly)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is notenough brakefluid in thebrakefluid reservoir.
In addition,the $ (USAonly) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
lights up in theinstrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effectmay be impaired.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Do notadd brakefluid.This does notcorrect themalfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad Wear
The brakepads/linings havereached their wear limit.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
Oneormoremain features of thembrace system are malfunctioning.
X
Havethe mbrace system checkedataqualified specialist work-
shop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tive See Operator's
Manual
ImportantfunctionsofPRE-SAFE
®
havefailed. Allother occupant
safetysystems,e.g.air bags,remain available.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
LimitedSee Opera‐
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation.
R
The system is outside theoperating temperature range.
R
The on-boardvoltageistoo low.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Active Brake Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Restart theengine.
184
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Brake Assist
Functions Limited
See Operator'sMan
ual
Active Brake Assistisunavailable due to amalfunction.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Radar Sensors Dirty
See Operator'sMan
ual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possiblecauses are:
R
Dirt on sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Whendrivingoninter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least onedrivingsystem or drivingsafetysystem is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
DistancePilotDISTRONIC
Once thecauseofthe problem is no longer present, thedrivingand
drive safetysystems will be available again.The display message dis-
appears.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Switchoff theengine.
X
Clean all sensors(Y page 242).
X
Restart theengine.
The display message disappears.
6
SRS Malfunction Ser
viceRequired
The restraintsystem is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Forfurther information about therestraintsystem, see (Y page 38).
6
Front LeftMalfunc‐
tionService
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
ServiceRequired
The restraintsystem has malfunctioned at thefront on theleftorright.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
185
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
LeftSideCurtain
Airbag Malfunction
ServiceRequired or
Right SideCurtain
Airbag Malfunction
ServiceRequired
There is amalfunction in theleft-handand/orright-hand head bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The leftorright head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in
theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
186
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air
bag Disabled See
Operator'sManual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
tivated during thejourney, although:
R
an adult
or
R
aperson of thecorrespondingstatureisonthe front-passenger seat
If additional forcesare appliedtothe seat,the system may interpret
theoccupant's weightaslower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and frontpassenger knee bag may
notbetriggered in theevent of an accident.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Havethe occupant on thefront-passenger seat get out of thevehi-
cle.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifunction display and checkthe following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFand
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightupsimulta-
neouslyfor approximately six seconds
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlightup
and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp is on,
OCS has deactivated thefront-passenger frontair bag and front-
passenger knee bag (
Y page 46)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messagesmustnot be shown in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem
checks havebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindicator
lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies theoccu-
pant.
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating correctly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observethe additional information on OCS (Y page 46).
Display messages
187
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air
bag EnabledSee
Operator'sManual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
during thejourney, eventhough:
R
achild, asmall adult or an objectweighing less than thesystem's
weightthreshold is locatedonthe front-passenger seat
or
R
thefront-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detectobjects or forcesapplyingadditional weighton
theseat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and thefront-passenger knee bag
may be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Openthe front-passenger door.
X
Remove thechild and thechild restraintsystem from thefront-
passenger seat.
X
Makesurethatthere are no objects on theseat addingtothe
weight.
The system might otherwise detectthe additional weightand inter-
pretthe seat occupant's weightasgreaterthanitactually is.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifuncti
on display and checkthe following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFand
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightupsimulta-
neouslyfor approximately six seconds
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlightup
and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated thefront-
passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag
(
Y page 46)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messagesmustnot be shown in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem
checks havebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindicator
188
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies theoccu-
pant.
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating correctly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observethe additional information on OCS (Y page 46).
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left Low Beam
(Example)
The correspondingbulb is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
or
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 99).
LEDlightsources: thedisplay message for thecorrespondinglamp
only appearswhen all theLEDsinthe lamp havefailed.
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active lightfunction is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator'sManual
The exteriorlighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
AutoLampFunction
Inoperative
The lightsensor is defective.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leavethe vehicle. Awarning
tone also sounds.
X
Turn thelightswitch to position Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator'sManual
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisdeactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
The windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.
R
Visibilityisimpaireddue to heavyrain,snoworfog.
X
Clean thewindshield.
If thesystem detects that thecamera is fullyoperational again,the
Adaptive
Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisoperational again.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisfaulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
189
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
Check Coolant Level
See Operator'sMan‐
ual
The coolant levelistoo low.
!
Avoid making longjourneys with toolittle coolant in theengine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X
Add coolant,observing thewarning notesbefore doingso
(
Y page 235).
X
If you needtoadd coolant moreoften than usual, have theengine
coolant system checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
?
The fan motor is malfunctioning.
X
If thecoolant temperaturegage is below the H marking
(
Y page 164), driveontothe nextqualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavyloads on theengine as you do so, e.g.driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
?
CoolantToo Hot
StopVehicleTurn
Engine Off
The coolant is toohot.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do notdrivewhen your engine is overheated. This can causesome
fluids whichmay have leaked intothe engine compartmenttocatch
fire.
Steam from theoverheatedengine can also causeserious burnswhich
can occur justbyopening thehood.
Thereisarisk of injury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely and switch off theengine,pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure thevehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).
X
Leavethe vehicle and keep asafe distancefromthe vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
X
Makesure that theair supply to theengine radiator is notblocked,
e.g.bysnow, slush or ice.
X
Do notstart theengine again until thedisplay message goes out and
thecoolant temperaturegage is below the H marking(
Y page 164).
Otherwise, theengine couldbedamaged.
X
Pay attention to thecoolant temperaturegage, observing thewarn-
ing notes(
Y page 235).
X
If thetemperatureincreases again,visitaqualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Under normal operatingconditionsand at thecorrectcoolant level,
thecoolant temperaturegage may rise to the H marking
(
Y page 164).
190
Displaymessages
On-boardcomputer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
See Operator'sMan
ual
The battery is notbeingcharged.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses are:
R
adefective alternator
R
atornpoly-V-belt
R
amalfunction in theelectronics
!
Do notcontinue driving. The enginecould otherwise overheat.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-
ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
#
StopVehicleSee
Operator'sManual
The battery is no longer beingcharged and thecondition of chargeis
toolow.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-
ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Observethe instructionsinthe # See Operator'sManual
display message.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine Oil At
NextRefueling
The engineoil level has dropped to theminimum level.
Awarning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longjourneys withtoo littleengineoil. The enginewill oth-
erwise be damaged.
X
Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at thelatest (Y page 234).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 235).
X
Havethe enginechecked at aqualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engineoil moreoften than usual.
Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from aqualified
specialist workshop or on theInternetathttp://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add1quart)
Mercedes-AMG SLC43:
The engineoil level is toolow.
!
Avoid longjourneys withtoo littleengineoil. The enginewill oth-
erwise be damaged.
X
Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at thelatest (Y page 234).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 235).
X
Havethe enginechecked at aqualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engineoil moreoften than usual.
Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from aqualified
specialist workshop or on theInternetathttp://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
Display messages
191
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
Engine Oil Level
Low StopVehicle
TurnEngine Off
Mercedes-AMG SLC43:
The engineoil level is toolow.
There is ariskofenginedamage.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-
ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Checkthe engineoil level (Y page 234).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 235).
8
FuelLevel Low
The fuel level has dropped intothe reserverange.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station.
C
There is only averysmall amount of fuel in thefuel tank.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is notclosed correctlyorthe fuel system is leaking.
X
Checkthatthe fuel filler cap is correctlyclosed.
If thefuelfiller cap is not correctlyclosed:
X
Closethe fuel filler cap.
If thefuelfiller cap is correctlyclosed:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Ø
Check additive See
Owner'sManual
The DEFtankisempty.
X
HaveDEF refilled as soonaspossibleataqualified specialist work-
shop.
Ø
Remaining starts: 10
Awarning tone also sounds. The DEFsystem is still malfunctioning.If
you switch off theengine, theenginewill notrestart.
X
Visit or consult aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ø
Remaining starts: 16
The DEFlevel has fallen to aminimum.
X
HaveDEF refilled as soonaspossibleataqualified specialist work-
shop.
192
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Drivingsystems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
TakeaBreak!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detectedfatigue or
alackofconcentration on thepartofthe driver.Awarningtonealso
sounds.
X
If necessary, take abreak.
Duringlongjourneys, take regular breaksingoodtimesoyou get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
Awarningtonealso sounds.
X
Reactivatethe HOLD function later (Y page 148).
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
LaneKeepingAssistisdeactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
The windshield in thecamera's field of vision is dirty.
R
Visibilityisimpaireddue to heavyrain,snoworfog.
R
There havebeennolanemarkingsfor an extended period
R
The lanemarkingsare wornaway, darkorcovered up, e.g. by dirtor
snow
Whenthe causes stated abovenolonger apply,the display message
disappears.
LaneKeepingAssistisoperational again.
If thedisplay messagedoesnot disappear:
X
Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicle against rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Clean thewindshield.
Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
LaneKeepingAssistisfaulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
Display messages
193
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind SpotAssist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Blind Spot Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
Function is impaireddue to heavyrain or snow.
R
The radar sensor system is outside theoperating temperature
range.
R
The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Clean thesensors(Y page 242).
X
Restart theengine.
Blind SpotAssist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assistisfaulty.
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ParkingGuidance
Inoperative
Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 152).
X
Restart theengine.
If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ParkingGuidance
Canceled
Parking Guidance is deactivated.
Possiblecauses are:
R
The vehicleisskidding.
R
The sensorsare dirty.
R
Amalfunction has occurred.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
ReactivateParking Guidance later (Y page 152).
If themultifunction display does notshowthe parking spacesymbol at
speeds below19mph (30 km/h):
X
Clean thesensors(Y page 242).
X
Restart theengine.
If themultifunction display still does notshowthe parking spacesym-
bol at speeds below19mph (30 km/h):
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
194
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer
followingthe recommended path.
X
Park again and,while doingso, observethe display messagesinthe
multifunction display.
ParkingGuidance
Finished
The vehicleisparked. Awarning tone also sounds.
The display message disappearsautomatically.
Distance Pilot Off
DistancePilotDISTRONICisdeactivated (Y page 140).
If it was deactivated automatically, awarning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Now
Available
DistancePilotDISTRONICisoperational again after having been tem-
porarily unavailable.You can nowreactivateDistance Pilot
DISTRONIC(
Y page 140).
Distance Pilot Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator'sMan
ual
DistancePilotDISTRONICistemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation.
R
The system is outside theoperating temperature range.
R
The on-boardvoltageistoo low.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
DistancePilotDISTRONICisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Restart theengine.
Distance Pilot Inop‐
erative
DistancePilotDISTRONICismalfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Distance Pilot Sus
pended
You havedepressed theacceleratorpedal.Distance PilotDISTRONIC
is no longer controllingthe speed of thevehicle.
X
Remove your footfromthe acceleratorpedal.
Distance Pilot ---
mph
Acondition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(
Y page 140).
Cruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If awarning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (
Y page 138).
Display messages
195
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cruise Control--
-mph
Cruisecontrolcannotbeactivated, since notall of theactivation con-
ditionshavebeen met.
X
Checkthe activation conditionsfor cruise control (Y page 138).
Cruise Control Inop‐
erative
Cruisecontrolismalfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check Tire Pressure
Soon
Canada only:
The tire pressureloss warning system has detectedasignificant loss
in pressure.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses:
R
you havechanged thepositionsofthe wheels and tires or installed
newwheels and tires
R
thetirepressureinone or moretires has dropped
G
WARNING
Tirepressures that are toolow posethe followinghazards:
R
they may burst, especially as theload and vehiclespeed increase
R
they may wear excessivelyand/orunevenly, whichmay greatly
impair tire traction.
R
thedrivingcharacteristics,aswell as steering and braking,may be
greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (
Y page 246).
X
Checkthe tire pressures and,ifnecessary, correctthe tire pressure.
X
Restart thetirepressureloss warning system when thetirepres-
sureiscorrect (
Y page 267).
Check Tire Pressure
ThenRestartRun
FlatIndicator
Canada only:
The tire pressureloss warning system generated adisplay message
and has notbeen restartedsince.
X
Setthe correcttirepressureinall fourtires.
X
Restart thetirepressureloss warning system (Y page 267).
196
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Run FlatIndicator
Inoperative
Canada only:
The tire pressureloss warning system is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Please Correct Tire
Pressure
USAonly:
The tire pressureistoo low in at least oneofthe tires,orthe tire
pressuredifference between thewheels is toogreat.
X
Checkthe tire pressures at thenextopportunity (Y page 267).
X
If necessary, correctthe tire pressure.
X
Restart thetirepressuremonitor (Y page 270).
TirePressure Soon
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped significantly. The
wheelposition is shown in themultifunction display.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tirepressures that are toolow posethe followinghazards:
R
they may burst, especially as theload and vehiclespeed increase
R
they may wear excessivelyand/orunevenly, whichmay greatly
impair tire traction.
R
thedrivingcharacteristics,aswell as steering and braking,may be
greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (
Y page 246).
X
Checkthe tire pressure(Y page 267).
X
If necessary, correctthe tire pressure.
WarningTireMal
function
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position is shown in themultifunction display.
G
WARNING
Drivingwithaflat tire poses ariskofthe followinghazards:
R
aflat tire affects theabilitytosteer or brakethe vehicle
R
you could lose control of thevehicle.
R
continued drivingwithaflat tire will causeexcessive heat build-up
and possiblyafire
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (
Y page 246).
Display messages
197
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor
Currently Unavaila‐
ble
Becausethere is interferencefromastrongsource of radiowaves, no
signals from thetirepressuresensorsare detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressuremonitor restarts automatically as soonasthe
problem has been resolved.
TirePress.Sen
sor(s) Missing
There is no signal from thetirepressuresensor of oneorseveral
wheels. The pressureofthe affectedtiredoes notappear in themul-
tifunction display.
X
Havethe faultytirepressuresensor replacedataqualified special-
ist workshop.
TirePressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounteddonot haveasuitable tire pressuresensor.The
tire pressuremonitor is deactivated.
X
Mountwheels withsuitable tire pressuresensors.
The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor
afew minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor
Inoperative
The tire pressuremonitor is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N'
to Start Engine
You haveattemptedtostart theenginewiththe transmission in posi-
tion k or h.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j or i.
Apply Brake to
Shift from'P'
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission to position h, k or i
without depressing thebrakepedal.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
To Shift out of P
or N, Depress Brake
and Switch on Engine
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission out of position j or i
intoanother transmission position withthe engineswitched off.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
X
Start theengine.
Driver's DoorOpen
&Transmission Not
in PRiskofVehi‐
cle RollingAway
The driver's door is notfully closed and thetransmission is in position
k, i or h.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehiclemay rollaway.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Whenparking thevehicle, shift thetransmission to position j.
198
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
OnlySelect Park
(P) When Vehicle is
Stationary
The vehicleismoving.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
Apply Brake to
Select R
You haveattemptedtoshift from position h to position k.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
X
Shift thetransmission to position k.
Service Required Do
Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannotchangethe transmission position due to amalfunction.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to aqualified specialist workshop without shifting thetrans-
mission from position h.
If position k, i or j is selected:
X
Notify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possi‐
ble Service Required
You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to amalfunc-
tion.
Transmission positions j, i or h continuetobeavailable.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal
function Stop
Amalfunction has occurred in themechanical transmission compo-
nents.
Awarning tone also sounds. The transmission shiftsautomatically to
position i.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Notify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
StopVehicleLeave
Engine Running Wait
Transmission Cool‐
ing
The transmission has overheated. Pullingaway can be temporarily
impairedornot possible.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Wait until thedisplay message disappearsbefore pullingaway.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for theautomatic transmission is no longer being
charged.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop at thenextopportunity.
X
Untilthen, always shift thetransmission to position j before you
switch off theengine.
X
Beforeleaving thevehicle, apply theelectric parking brake.
Display messages
199
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
N
The trunk lid is open.
X
Closethe trunk lid.
M
The hoodisopen.
G
WARNING
The open hoodmay blockyour viewwhen thevehicleisinmotion.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Closethe hood.
C
At least onedoor is open.Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Closeall thedoors.
Ð
Power Steering Mal
function See Opera‐
tor's Manual
The powersteering is malfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use moreforce to steer.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Checkwhether you are able to apply theextra force required.
X
If you areabletosteer safely: carefully drive on to aqualified
specialist workshop.
X
If you areunable to steer safely: do notdrive on.Contactthe
nearestqualified specialist workshop.
J
Trunk Partition Open
The trunk partition is open or thetrunk is loadedtoo high.
X
Stow theload suchthatthe trunk partition can close unhindered
and is notpushed upwards.
X
Closethe trunk partition (Y page 80).
Phone No Service
Your vehicleisoutside thenetwork provider'stransmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until themobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in themultifunction display.
K
Decrease Speed
You wantedtoopen theroofwhile thevehiclewas in motion.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Openthe roof(Y page 78).
K
Vario-RoofLowering
The roofisnot fullyopened or closed.The hydraulicsare depressur-
ized.
X
Fullyopen or close theroof(Y page 78).
200
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
K
Open/CloseVario-
RoofCompletely
The roofisnot locked.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Push or pull and hold theroofswitch until theroofisfullyopen or
closed (
Y page 78).
K
Start Engine See
Operator'sManual
The on-boardvoltageistoo low.
X
Start theengine.
X
Afterapproximately tenseconds, repeat theopening or closing
procedure (
Y page 78).
The roofhas been opened and closed several times in arow.The roof
drive has been switched off automatically for safetyreasons.
You can open and close theroofagain after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Repeat theopening or closingprocedure (Y page 78).
Close Rear Side Win
dows
You leavethe vehicleand at least onerear side window is open.
X
Closethe side windows (Y page 75).
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluidlevel in thewasher fluidreservoir has dropped below
theminimum.
X
Addwasher fluid(Y page 236).
Wiper Malfunction‐
ing
The windshield wipersare malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning
The hazard warning lampsare faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
You haveput thewrong SmartKey in theignition lock.
X
Use thecorrect SmartKey.
Â
TakeYourKey from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in theignition lock.
X
Remove theSmartKey.
Â
Obtain aNew Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
201
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
ReplaceKey Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change thebattery (Y page 68).
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The SmartKey is notinthe ignition lock. You haveopened thedriver's
door withthe engineswitched off.
The multifunction display shows thedisplay message amaximum of
60 seconds and is simply areminder.
X
Takethe SmartKey withyou when you leavethe vehicle.
Â
Key Not Detected
(reddisplay message)
The SmartKey is notinthe vehicle.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If theengineisswitched off,you can no longer lockthe vehiclecen-
trally or start theengine.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Locate theSmartKey.
X
Press a on thesteering wheeltoconfirmthe display message.
Becausethere is interferencefromastrongsource of radiowaves, the
SmartKey is notdetectedwhilstthe engineisrunning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 131).
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand bring intokey mode.
Â
Key Not Detected
(whitedisplay message)
The SmartKey is currentlyundetected.
X
Change thelocation of theSmartKey in thevehicle.
If theSmartKey still cannotbedetected:
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand turnittothe desired
position.
Â
Remove 'Start'But
ton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning
tone also sounds.
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand turnittothe desired
position.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
Generalnotes
Some systems carry out aself-diagnosis when theignition is switched on.Therefore,someindicator
and warning lampsmay lightuporflashtemporarily. This behaviorisnon-critical.These indicator
202
Warning andindicator lamps
On-board computerand displays
and warning lamps only indicateamalfunctioniftheylight up or flashafter starting theengine or
whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signaltype
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N Afterstarting theengine,the red seat belt warning lamp lightsupfor six sec-
onds.
The seat belt warning lamp remindsthe driver and frontpassenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 42).
ü
N Afterstarting theengine,the red seat belt warning lamp lightsup. In addition,a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver'sseat belt is notfastened.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 42).
The warning tone ceases.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lightsupafter theengine starts, as soon as the
driver'sorthe front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or frontpassenger has notfastenedtheir seat belt.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 42).
The warning lamp goes out.
Thereare objectsonthe front-passenger seat.
X
Removethe objectsfromthe front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or frontpassenger has notfastenedtheir seat belt.The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittentwarning tone ceases.
There are objectsonthe front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25km/h).
X
Remove theobjects from thefront-passenger seat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and theintermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps
203
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The multifunction display also shows adisplay message with the # symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also apossibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
204
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
$J
֌
!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
ESP
®
,ESP
®
OFF and ABS warning lampsare lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may alsomalfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels couldtherefore lock if you brake hard,for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicleisinmotion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is arisk of skidding or at
least one wheelhas started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedalasfar as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedalwhile the vehicleisinmotion.
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page61) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page60).
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may alsomalfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
Warning and indicator lamps
205
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page61) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page60).
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have ESP
®
checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
M
N Only Mercedes-AMG SLC 43:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (
Y page61).
F!
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bagsorEmergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggereduninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact aqualified specialist workshopand have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page38).
206
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signaltype
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
;
N The yellow CheckEnginewarning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is running.
Theremay be amalfunction, for example:
R
in theengine management
R
in thefuel injection system
R
in theexhaust system
R
in theignition system
R
in thefuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and theengine may be in emergency
mode.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshop immediately.
In somestates, you must immediately visitaqualified specialist workshop as soon
as theyellow CheckEnginewarning lamp lightsup. This is due to thelegal require-
ments in effect in these states. If in doubt,check whether suchlegal regulations
apply in thestate in whichyou are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reservefuel warning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is running.
The fuel levelhas dropped intothe reserverange.
X
Refuel at thenearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reservefuel warning lamp flashes while thevehicle is in motion.
In addition,the ; CheckEnginewarning lamp may light up.
The fuel fillercap is notclosed correctly or thefuel system is leaking.
X
Checkthatthe fuel fillercap is correctly closed.
X
If thefuelfiller cap is not correctly closed: close thefuel fillercap.
X
If thefuelfiller cap is closed: visitaqualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is runningand the
coolant temperaturegauge is at thestart of thescale.
The temperaturesensor for thecoolant temperaturegauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperatureisnolonger beingmonitored. Thereisarisk of engine
damageifthe coolant temperatureistoo high.
X
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely and switch off theengine,payingattention
to road and traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving underany circumstances.
X
Secure thevehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
207
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant levelistoo low.
If the coolant leveliscorrect, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Y page131).
X
Leave the vehicleand keep asafe distance from the vehicleuntil the engine has
cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page235).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gauge is below the H
marking (
Y page164). Otherwise, the engine couldbedamaged.
X
Drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature gauge has exceededthe H marking (
Y page164).The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooledsufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when yourengine is overheated. This can causesome fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can alsocauseserious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is arisk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Y page131).
X
Leave the vehicleand keep asafe distance from the vehicleuntil the engine has
cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page235).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
208
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
X
If the coolant temperature gauge is below the H marking (Y page164),drive on
to the next qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicleisinmotion. Awarning
tone alsosounds.
You are approaching avehicle, apedestrian or astationary obstacleinyourline of
travel at too high aspeed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay carefulattention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (
Y page140).
Further information on Active Brake Assist (
Y page58).
Warning and indicator lamps
209
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequencesand M
Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor hasdetectedalossofpressure in at leastone of the tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures thatare too lowposethe following hazards:
R
theymay burst, especially as the load and vehiclespeed increase
R
theymay wear excessivelyand/or unevenly, which maygreatlyimpairtire trac-
tion.
R
the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steeringand braking,may be greatly
impaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any sudden steeringorbraking maneuvers. Pay
attentiontothe trafficconditions as youdoso.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away (Y page 131).
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Check the tiresand,ifnecessary,followthe instructions for aflattire
(
Y page 246).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 267).
X
If necessary,correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashesfor approximately one minute and thenremains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possiblyunabletorecognize or register lowtire pressure.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
210
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manualdescribes the basicprinciples for
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
municationequipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle.There is arisk of an acci-
dent.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legalrequirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination withouttaking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rulesand regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
adiverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of aone-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must alwaysobserve road
and traffic rulesand regulations during your
journey. Roadand traffic rulesand regulations
alwayshave priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you whiledriving withoutdiverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please alwaysuse this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radiofrequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement CtoOET65.
This equipment has very low levelsofRFenergy
that is deemedtocomply withoutmaximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is
recommended to insta
ll it at adistance
of at least 8inches (approx. 20 cm) betweenthe
radiation source and aperson's body (not
including limbssuch as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as wellaswiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.There is an increasedrisk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as wellaselec-
tronic components or their software.You
shouldhave all work to electricaland elec-
tronic equipment carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable whilethe vehicle is in motion.
You willnotice this, for example, because either
you willnot be abletoselect certain menu items
or amessagewillappear to this effect.
Function restrictions
211
Multimedia system
Z
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in frontofthe display
for storage. Objects placed here could dam-
age the display or impair its function.Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairmentstothe display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching.Ifyou have to clean the
screen,however, use amild cleaningagent
and asoft,lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaningit, as this could cause irreversible dam-
age to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during an active call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
COMAND:navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functionswith system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select adestination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit amenu or to
call up the main menu of the currentoperating
mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the currentoperating
mode.
X
To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the currentoperatingmode.
212
Operating system
Multimedia system
Favorites button
You can assign predefinedfunctionsusingthe
g favoritesbuttonand call them up by press-
ing thebutton(
Y page 213).
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the g buttononthe con-
troller.
X
Selectafavorite,e.g. Vehicle.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
To exit: press the g buttonagain.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the g button.
X
COMAND: slide 6 thecontroller.
X
Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 thecontroller.
The menubar is displayed.
X
Select Reassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Selectacategory.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
Selectafavorite.
X
COMAND: to add thefavorite to thedesired
position,turnand press thecontroller.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
X
Audio 20: to add thefavorite to thedesired
position,turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the
controller.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Adding yourown favorites
You can add climatecontrolasafavorite,for
example.
X
Select VehicleQVehicle Settings.
X
Press and hold the g buttonuntil the
favoritesare displayed.
X
Addafavorite to thedesired position.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe vehi-
cle when driving,you may be distractedfrom
thetraffic situation.You could also lose con-
trol of thevehicle. Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsure that this
is possible,park thevehiclepayingattention
to traffic conditionsand operate theequip-
mentwhen thevehicleisstationary.
You must observethe legal requirements for the
country in whichyou are currentlydriving when
operating thenavigation system.
General notes
Amongother things, correct functioning of the
navigation system dependsonGPS reception.In
certainsituations, GPS reception may be
impaired,there may be interferenceorthere
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped withGarmin
®
MAPPILOT
(see themanufacturer'soperating instructions).
The Garmin
®
MAPPILOT operating instructions
are storedonthe SD cardasaPDF file.The SD
cardbox contains aquickguide.
The followingdescriptionsapply to navigation
withCOMAND.Further information can be
foundinthe Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting aroute type and route options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows thevehicle's currentposition.
X
Slide 6 thecontroller.
X
Select OptionsQRouteSettings.
Notes for routetypes:
R
Eco Route
R
DynamicTrafficRoute
Operating system
213
Multimedia system
Z
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account (not availablein
all countries).
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traffic
reports should be included in the route cal-
culation (not availableinall countries).
R
Calculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of Start
,select the menu
item Continue
.
X
To avoid/use routeoptions: select Avoid
Options.
X
Select aroute option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay ausage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only availableinthe USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street,house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street,city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes availablefor the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
X
.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for akeyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragmentsofwords.
R
select the last destination
R
select acontact
R
select aPOI
You can search for aPOI by location, name or
telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
tions.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X
Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
aprompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as IntermediateDestination
.
Cancel Active Route Guidance
cancels
the current route guidance and startsroute
calculation to the new destination.
Set as IntermediateDestination
adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
214
Operating system
Multimedia system
Connecting amobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via theBluetooth
®
interface, you
require aBluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phonemust support Hands-Free Profile
1.0orabove.
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobilephone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and,ifnecessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibilityfor other devices (see the
manufacturer'soperatinginstructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of oneman-
ufacturer'sproductsmightbeidentical. To
makeitpossible to clearly identifyyour mobile
phone, changethe device name(see theman-
ufacturer'soperatinginstructions).
If themobile phonesupportsthe PBAP(Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP(Message
Access Profile)Bluetooth
®
profiles, thefollow-
ing informationwill be transmittedafter you
connect:
R
Phonebook
R
Call lists
R
Textmessages and e-mail
i
Further informationonsuitable mobile
phones can be foundat: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In theUSA,you can get in touch withthe
Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistanceCenter
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searchingfor and authorizing (connect-
ing) amobile phone
Before using yourmobilephone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you willneed to
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobilephone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering apasskey.The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for yourmobilephone
available. The mobilephone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using amobilephone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobilephone, this may be due to particular
security settings on yourmobilephone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobilephone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searchingfor amobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/®QConn.
DeviceQSearchfor PhonesQStart
Search.
The available mobilephones are displayed.
Symbols in the devicelist
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobilephone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobilephone is authorized, but is
not connected.
Connecting amobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobilephone.
Acode is displayedinthe multimedia system
and on the mobilephone.
X
If codesmatch: select Yes on the multimedia
system.
X
Confirm code on the mobilephone. Depend-
ing on the mobilephone used,confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed(see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
If the codesare different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
Operating system
215
Multimedia system
Z
Authorization by entering apasskey(passcode):
X
Select the Bluetooth
®
nameofthe mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkeyisdisplayed.
X
Chooseaone to sixteen-digitnumbercombi-
nation as apasskey.
X
Enter the passkeyonthe multimedia system.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkeyonthe mobile
phone. Depending on the mobilephone used,
confirm the connectiontothe multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm maytake up
to two minutes to be displayed (seethe man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Connectingamobilephone(Audio 20)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require at leastone Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phone depending on useof one-telephone
mode or two-telephonemode.The mobile
phone must support Hands-FreeProfile1.0 or
above.
In two-telephonemode youcan useall the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone.Withthe additional tele-
phone,you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobilephone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and,ifnecessary,Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for otherdevices(seethe
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for allofone man-
ufacturer's products might be identical.To
make it possibletoclearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name(seethe man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobilephone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile)and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing informationistransmittedafteryou connect
the main telephone:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further informationonsuitablemobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, youcan getintouch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, youcan getintouch with the Cus-
tomerRelations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
ing) amobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect)it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by enteringapasskey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using amobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Searching for amobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/®QConn. DeviceQCon‐
nect New Device.
X
Select Connect via Vehicle.
X
Select mobile phone.
Connecting amobile phone
X
One-telephone mode: select Connect as
New Main Phone.
X
Two-telephone mode: select Connect as
Additional Phone when amobile phone is
already connected.
216
Operating system
Multimedia system
X
AuthorizationusingSecureSimple Pair-
ing:
Acodeisdisplayed in themultimedia system
and on themobile phone.
X
Confirmcodeonthe mobile phone. Depend-
ing on themobile phoneused, confirm the
connection to themultimedia system and for
thePBAPand MAPBluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may takeuptotwo
minutestobedisplayed (see themanufactur-
er'soperatinginstructions).
X
If thecodes are different:select No on the
multimedia system.
The processiscanceled.
Repeat authorization.
or
X
Authorizationbyentering apasskey
(passcode): enterany one- to sixteen-digit
number sequencewhichyou have chosen
yourself intothe passkeyinput menu.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enterand confirm thepasskeyonthe mobile
phone. Dependingonthe mobile phoneused,
confirm theconnectiontothe multimedia sys-
temand for thePBAPand MAPBluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may takeup
to two minutestobedisplayed (see theman-
ufacturer'soperatinginstructions).
Symbols in thedevice manager
The symbols are shown in color dependingon
their use.
Symbol Explanation
Mobile phoneconnected to the
multimedia system
Main telephone withfull range of
functions
Additional telephone for incoming
calls in two telephone mode
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external mediasources,the
appropriatemediamodemust alreadybeturned
on.Further informationonmediamode(see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
The followingexternalmediasources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices(e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USBdevices(e.g. USBstick,MP3 player)
(
Y page 218)
R
CD
R
DVD(COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
via devicesconnected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on single CD/DVDdriveorDVD
changer (see theDigital Operator's Manual).
Selecting usingthe device list
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaQDevices.
The available mediasources will be shown.
The # dot indicates thecurrentsetting.
X
Select themediasource.
Playable filesare played.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are smallparts. They can be swal-
lowed and causechoking. This posesan
increased riskofinjury or evenfatal injury.
Keep theSDcardout of thereachofchildren.
If aSDcardisswallowed, seek medical atten-
tionimmediately.
!
If you are no longer usingthe SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside thevehi-
cle.Hightemperatures can damagethe card.
InsertinganSDcard
The SD cardslot is locatedonthe control panel.
X
Insertthe SD cardintothe SD cardslot until
theSDcardengages.The side withthe con-
tacts must facedown.
Removing an SD card
X
Press theSDcard.
The SD cardisejected.
X
Remove theSDcard.
Operatingsystem
217
Multimedia system
Z
Connecting USB devices
X
Connectthe USBdevice to theUSB port.
Thereare two USBportsinthe stowage space
underthe armrest.
X
Select themediasource (Y page 217).
218
Operating system
Multimedia system
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objectsinthe passenger compartmentare
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objectsthey contain. There is arisk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or asudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objectssothat they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objectsdonot pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
startingajourney.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objectsin
the trunk.
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
The glove box flap contains brackets for coins,
pens, and credit and service cards.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
the mechanical key.
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it to position 2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it to position 1.
Stowage compartment/telephone
compartment under the armrest
X
To open: push button : up and raise arm-
rest ;.
The stowage compartmentcan be locked and
unlocked centrally using the SmartKey
(
Y page 65).
i
Depending on the vehicle equipment, aUSB
port and aMedia Interface is installed in the
stowage compartment. AMedia Interface is a
universal interface for mobile audio equip-
ment,e.g. for an iPod
®
or MP3 Player.
Stowage areas
219
Stowage and features
Z
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: pressmarking :.
Makesure that theeyeglasses compartmentis
always closed while thevehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in thecenter
console
X
To open: briefly pressthe lower sectionof
cover :.
X
To remove theinsert: pull theleft-hand side
of theinsert up and out.
X
To install theinsert: pressthe insert intothe
housing.
X
To close: fold cover : downwards until it
engages.
Dependingonthe vehicle equipment,there may
be an ashtray in thecenterconsole instead of a
storagecompartment.
Stowage compartment in thedoors
Ruffled pocket ; with parking disc holder : is
locatedinthe door panel.
Stowage box in therearwall between
theseats
Astowage compartment, in theformofaruffled
pocket, is locatedonthe rear wall between the
seats.
:
Ruffled pocket
Stowage net
Stowage netsare locatedinthe front-passenger
footwell and on therear wall behindthe driver's
seat.
220
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Reversible floor panelinthe trunk
The trunk floor is level when youuse the outer
sideofthe reversiblefloor panel.Ifyou turn the
floor panel over, youcan transportobjects such
as abeverage crate on the undersideofthe
panel.
Twoflexible straps ; are attached to the rever-
sible floor panel,use thesetosecure objects,
such as wind screen =,whenreversiblefloor
panel : hasbeenturnedover.
Roofcarrier
!
Thisvehicleisnot designed to transport
itemsonthe roof. Roof carriers and other
deviceswhich are mounted on the roofthat
have not beenspecifically approved for this
model by Mercedes-Benz mustnot be used as
they could damagethe vehicleand the
retractable hardtop(vario-roof).
At the time of going to print, Mercedes-Benz
doesnot offerany roofcarrierorotherroof-
installed devicesfor this model.
!
Thisvehicleisnot designed to transportany
itemsonthe trunk lidortoallow luggage car-
riers or equipment of any kind to be installed
to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehicleand the
retractable hardtopcould be damaged.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrownaround and hit vehicleoccupants. In
addition, cup holders, openstowagespaces
and mobilephone brackets cannotalways
retain allobjects they contain. There is arisk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or asuddenchange in direction.
R
Alwaysstow objects so that they cannotbe
thrownaround in such situations.
R
Alwaysmake sure that objects do not pro-
trudefrom stowagespaces, parcel nets or
stowagenets.
R
Close the lockable stowagespaces before
starting ajourney.
R
Alwaysstow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
G
WARNING
The heating elements of the cup holder can
become very hot. Youcould burn yourselfon
them.
There is ariskofinjury.
Do not touch the hot heating elements of the
cup holder.Alwaysmake sure that children
cannotaccess the hot heating elements of the
cup holder.Neverleave children unsuper-
vised in the vehicle.
!
Only usethe cup holdersfor containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the areaofthe center con-
Features
221
Stowage and features
Z
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Cup holder in the center console
X
To open: slide cover ; back.
X
To remove the insert: slide catch : inwards
on both sides in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove the cup holder insert upwards.
X
To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X
Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the
arrow until it engages.
You can remove the cup holder insert for clean-
ing. Cleanwith clear, lukewarm water only.
Bottle holder
Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
"Stowage compartments" section (
Y page 219).
!
Make sure that any bottles weighing more
than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle
holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle
holder could otherwise be damaged.
X
Press the outer edge of button : and slide in
the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits
into the opening.
X
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
The bottle holderdoesnot securethe bottles; it
merelyprevents themfromtipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirrorcoverofthe vanity mirrorisfolded
up when the vehicleisinmotion, youcould be
blinded by incident light. There is ariskofan
accident.
Alwayskeepthe mirrorcoverfoldeddown
whiledriving.
:
Mirrorlight
;
Bracket
=
Retaining strip, e.g.for aparking lotticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirrorcover
i
When drivingathighspeeds with the side
windoworroofopen:
If youhaveinsertedacar park ticketinto
retaining strip =,makesurethatitisnot
blownawaybythe wind.
222
Features
Stowageand features
Ashtray
X
To open: push thelower section of cover :.
The cover opens.
X
To remove theinsert: lift insert = up ; and
out.
X
To re-install theinsert: press insert = into
theholder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch thehot
heating elementorthe socketofthe cigarette
lighter.
In addition,flammablematerials can igniteif:
R
thehot cigarette lighterfalls
R
achild holdsthe hot cigarette lighterto
objects,for example
There is ariskoffireand injury.
Always hold thecigarette lighterbythe knob.
Always makesurethatthe cigarette lighteris
out of reachofchildren.Never leavechildren
unsupervised in thevehicle.
Your attention mustalways be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use thecigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditionspermit.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tion lock(
Y page 116).
X
To open: push thelower section of cover :.
The ashtray opens.
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when theheating elementisred-hot.
12 Vsockets
Generalnotes
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 in theigni-
tion lock(
Y page 116).
The sockets can be used for accessories witha
maximum draw of 180W(15 A).Accessories
include suchitems as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use thesockets for longperiods when the
engineisswitched off,the battery may dis-
charge.
i
An emergencycut-out ensures that theon-
boardvoltagedoes notdroptoo low. If theon-
boardvoltageistoo low, thepowertothe
sockets is automatically cut.This ensures
that there is sufficientpowertostart the
engine.
Socket in thefront center console
X
To open: push thelower section of cover :.
The stowage compartmentopens.
X
Liftupthe cover of socket ;.
Features
223
Stowage and features
Z
mbrace
General notes
Youmusthavealicenseagreementtoactivate
the mbraceservice. Make sure thatyoursystem
is activatedand operational.Tolog in, press the
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps
mentioned arenot carried out, the systemmay
not be activated.
If youhavequestions aboutthe activation, con-
tactone of the following telephone hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortlyafter successfullyregistering with the
service, auserIDand password will be sent to
youbypost.
USA only: youcan usethispassword to logonto
the mbraceareaunder "Owners Online"at
http://www.mbusa.com.
Thesystemisavailable if:
R
it hasbeenactivatedand is operational
R
the corresponding mobilephone network is
availablefor transmitting data to the Cus-
tomerCenter
R
aservice subscription is available
R
the starterbatteryissufficiently charged
i Determining the locationofthe vehicleona
mapisonlypossibleif:
R
GPSreceptionisavailable.
R
the vehiclepositioncan be forwardedto
the Customer AssistanceCenter.
The mbracesystem
To adjustthe volumeduringacall, proceedas
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volumecontrollerofthe audiosys-
tem/COMAND.
Thesystemoffers variousservices,e.g.:
R
Automatic and manualemergency call
R
Roadside Assistancecall
R
MB Info call
USA only: youcan find information and a
description of allavailable features under "Own-
ers Online"athttp://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
Afteryou have switched on the ignition, the sys-
tem carries outaself-diagnosis.
Amalfunctioninthe systemhas been detected
if one of the following occurs:
R
Theindicator lamp in the SOS button does not
comeonduringthe systemself-test.
R
Theindicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistancebutton does not lightupduring
self-diagnosis of the system.
R
Theindicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not lightupduringself-diagnosis
of the system.
R
Theindicator lamp in one or moreofthe fol-
lowing buttons continuestolight up red after
the systemself-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F Roadside Assistancecallbutton
-
ï MB Info call button
R
Afterthe systemself-diagnosis,the Inoper‐
ative or Service Not Activated message
appearsinthe multifunction display.
If amalfunctionisindicated as outlined above,
the systemmay not operate as expected. In the
event of an emergency,helpwillhavetobe
summoned by other means.
Have the systemchecked at the nearestauthor-
izedMercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-
lowing service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
224
Features
Stowageand features
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in thevehicle,
even if you have pressed theSOS button in an
emergency if:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of thevehi-
cle,e.g.ifthere is afireafter an accident
R
thevehicle is on adangerous sectionof
road
R
thevehicle is notvisible or cannoteasily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibilityconditions
Thereisarisk of an accidentand injury.
Leavethe vehicle immediately in this or simi-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Movetoasafe locationalongwith other vehi-
cle occupants. In suchsituations,secure the
vehicle in accordancewith national regula-
tions,e.g.with awarning triangle.
You must have alicenseagreementtoactivate
thembrace service. Makesure that your system
is activated and operational. To register, press
the ï MB Info call button.Ifany of thesteps
mentioned are notcarried out,the system may
notbeactivated.
If you have questionsabout theactivation,con-
tactone of thefollowingtelephone hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372)or1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergencycall is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency TensioningDevice is trig-
gered.
i
You cannot end an automatically triggered
emergencycall yourself.
An emergencycall can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergencycall has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call
message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
All important information on the emergencyis
transmitted, for example:
R
current location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
R
vehicle identification number
R
information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergencycall has been initi-
ated, avoice connection is automatically estab-
lished between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupantsrespond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attemptstoget more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
The Call Failed
message appears in the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
Features
225
Stowage and features
Z
X
To initiate an emergencycallmanually:
press cover : brieflytoopen.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
untilthe emergency callisconcluded.
X
Wait for avoice connectiontothe Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
i
If the mobilephone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emer-
gencycall. If youleave the vehicleimmedi-
ately afterpressing the SOS button, youwill
not know whethermbrace placedthe emer-
gencycall. In thiscase, always summon assis-
tance by othermeans.
Breakdownassistancebutton
X
Press Roadside Assistance button :.
Thisinitiates acalltothe Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomerAssistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flasheswhile the callisactive. The
multifunctiondisplay shows the Connect‐
ing Call message. The audiooutputis
muted.
If aconnectioncan be made,the CallCon‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If amobilephone network and GPSreception
are available,the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicleidentificationnumber
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
catesthatacallisactive. During the call, you
can change to the navigationmenu by press-
ing the NAVI button on COMAND, for exam-
ple.
i
Voice outputisnot available.
Avoice connectionisestablished between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicleoccupants.
From the remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(
Y page 227).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sendsaqualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearestMercedes-Benz
Service Center.
Youmay be chargedfor servicessuchasrepair
work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i The system hasnot been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
callbutton : is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connectiontothe Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center wasestab-
lished.
Thiscan occurifthe relevant mobilephone
network is not available,for example.
The CallFailed
message appears in the
multifunctiondisplay.
X
To endacall: press the ~ button on the
multifunctionsteering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
MB Info callbutton
226
Features
Stowageand features
X
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates acall to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐
necting Call message. The audio system is
muted.
If aconnection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If amobile phone networkand GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
currentlocation of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
cates that acall is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by press-
ing the NAVI button on COMAND,for exam-
ple.
Voice output is not available.
Avoice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
networkisnot available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end acall: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steeringwheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active
calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergencycall can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel
R
the corresponding button on the audio sys-
tem or on COMAND for ending atelephone
call
i
When acall is initiated, the audio system is
muted. The mobile phone is no longer con-
nected to COMAND.However, if you want to
use your mobile phone, do so only when the
vehicle is stationary and in asafe location.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existingcall, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center. The customer ser-
vice representative can use the received data to
decide what kind of assistanceisrequired. You
are then,for example, guided to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or arecovery
vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
MB Info call or aRoadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐
nected message in the COMAND display. If the
vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis can be
started, the Request for vehicle diagno‐
sis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
X
Confirm the message with Yes.
X
When the Vehicle diagnosis: Please
start ignition message appears, turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(
Y page 116).
X
When the Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and move
your vehicle to asafe position mes-
Features
227
Stowage and features
Z
sage appears, follow the customer service
representative's instructions.
The message in the displaydisappears.
If you select Cancel
the remote malfunction
diagnosis is canceled completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins. You
will see the Vehicle
diagnosis activated
message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐
fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voice
connection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent to the Customer Assis-
tance center.
X
Press OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If aservice is overdue, the
COMAND displayshows amessage about vari-
ous special offers at your workshop.
USA only: this information can also be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(
Y page 28).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(
Y page 25).
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allowsyou to operate up
to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
When programming agarage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(
Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada:IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
sons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is arisk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is arisk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
228
Features
Stowage and features
Programming
Programming the buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 228).
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-
trol the garage door drive.
X
To startprogramming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After ashort time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
If the selected button has already been pro-
gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?.Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To programthe remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at adis-
tance of 2to8in(5to20cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (
Y page 229).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attemptsmight be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 228).
If the garage door system uses arolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
the manufact
urer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
ing out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually,you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadianradio frequency laws require a"break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for afew seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
recognized during programming. Comparable
Features
229
Stowage and features
Z
with Canadian law, some U.S.garage door open-
ers also feature a"break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada.
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when following theprogramming steps.
X
Pressand hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After ashorttime, indicator lamp : lightsup
yellow.
X
Release thebutton.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Pressbutton B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then releaseitfor two
seconds.
X
Pressbutton B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lightsup
green.
When indicator lamp : lightsupgreen: pro-
grammingisfinished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
grammingwas successful. The nextstepisto
synchronize therollingcode.
X
Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
When indicator lamp : lightsupred: repeat
theprogramming process for thecorrespond-
ing button on therear-view mirror. When
doingso, vary thedistancebetween remote
control A and therear-view mirror.
The required distancebetween remote con-
trol A and theintegrated garage door opener
depends on thegarage door drivesystem.
Several attemptsmightbenecessary. You
should testeveryposition for at least
25 secondsbefore trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencingproblems programming
theintegrated garage door opener on therear-
view mirror, takenoteofthe following instruc-
tions:
R
Check thetransmitter frequencyused by
garage door driveremote control A and
whether it is supported.The transmitter fre-
quencycan usually be foundonthe back of
remote control A for thegarage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have unitswhich
operate in thefrequencyrange of 280to
433MHz.
R
Replace thebatteries in garage door remote
control A.This increasesthe likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strongand precise signal to theintegrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varyingdistances and anglesfrombut-
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various anglesatadistancebetween 2and
8inches (5to20cm) or at thesame angle but
at varyingdistances.
R
If afurther remote control A is available for
thesame garage door drive, repeat thesame
programming steps with this remote control
A.Before performing these steps, makesure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door driveremote control A.
R
Notethatsome remote controls only transmit
for alimited amountoftime(theindicator
lamp on theremote control goes out).Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
R
Alignthe antennacable of thegarage door
opener unit.This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing thegarage door
After it has been programmed, theintegrated
garage door opener performsthe function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read theoperatinginstructions for thegarage
door system.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock (
Y page 116).
X
Presseither button ;, = or ? which you
have programmed to operate thegarage
door.
Garage door system with afixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lightsupgreen.
Garage door system with arollingcode: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit asignal as long
as thebutton is pressed. The transmission is
halted after amaximum of ten secondsand
indicator lamp : lightsupyellow.
X
Pressbutton ;, = or ? again if necessary.
230
Features
Stowage and features
Clearing thememory
Makesure that you clear thememory of the
integratedgaragedoor opener before sellingthe
vehicle.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock(
Y page 116).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lightsupyellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of theintegratedgaragedoor
opener in therear-view mirror is cleared.
Compass
Callingupthe compass
Compass ; displays thecompass direction in
whichthe vehicle is currently traveling: N
, NE, E,
SE
, S, SW, W or NW.
To receive acorrectdisplay in rear-view mir-
ror :,the compass must be calibrated and the
magnetic fieldzoneset.
Settingthe compass
North Americazonemap
South Americazonemap
X
Set your locationusingthe zone maps.
X
Push aroundpen intoopening =
(
Y page 231) for approximately three sec-
onds.
The zone currently selectedappearsincom-
pass display ; (
Y page 231).
X
To select thezone: push aroundpen into
opening = (
Y page 231) until thedesired
zone is selected.
If,after afew seconds, thedisplay in compass
display ; (
Y page 231) changes direction,
thezonehas been selected.
Features
231
Stowage and features
Z
Calibratingthe compass
X
Makesure that there is sufficient spacefor
you to driveinacircle without impedingtraf-
fic.
In order to calibratethe compass correctly, do
thefollowing:
R
calibratethe compass in theopen and notin
thevicinity of steel structures or high-voltage
transmission lines.
R
switch off electrical consumers suchasthe
climate control, windshield wipersorrear win-
dow defroster.
R
close all doorsand thetrunk lid.
X
Switch on theignition.
X
Push aroundpen intoopening =
(
Y page 231) for approximately six seconds,
until symbol C
is shown in compass display ;
(
Y page 231).
X
Drive your vehicle in afull circle at approx-
imately 3mph (5 km/h)to6mph (10 km/h).
When thecalibration has successfully been
completed, thecurrentdirection is shown in
compass display ; (
Y page 231).
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objectsinthe driver'sfootwell may restrict
theclearance aroundthe pedals or blocka
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes theoper-
atingand road safety of thevehicle.Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Stow all objectssecurely in thevehicle so that
they do notget intothe driver'sfootwell.
When usingfloormats or carpets, makesure
that they are properlysecured so that they do
notslip or obstructthe pedals.Donot place
several floormats or carpetsontop of one
another.
X
Slidethe seat back.
X
To install: placethe floormat in thefootwell.
X
Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
To remove: pull thefloormat off retainers ;.
X
Remove thefloormat.
232
Features
Stowage and features
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If thehood is unlatched, it may open up when
thevehicle is in motion and blockyour view.
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Never unlatch thehood while driving.Before
everytrip, ensure that thehood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closingthe hood,itmay
suddenly fall intothe closed position.Thereis
arisk of injury to personswithin range of
movementofthe hood.
Open and close thehood only when no oneis
within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening thehood when theengine is over-
heated or when there is afireinthe engine
compartmentcouldexpose you to hot gases
or other serviceproducts. Thereisarisk of
injury.
Let an overheatedengine cooldown before
opening thehood.Ifthere is afireinthe
engine compartment, keep thehood closed
and contactthe firedepartment.
G
WARNING
The engine compartmentcontainsmoving
components. Certain components, suchas
theradiator fan,may continue to run or start
again suddenly when theignition is off.There
is arisk of injury.
If you needtodoany work inside theengine
compartment:
R
switch off theignition
R
never reachintothe area wherethere is a
risk of danger from moving components,
suchasthe fan rotationarea
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
Opening thehood
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe engine compart-
ment, suchasthe engine,radiator and parts
of theexhaust system, can become veryhot.
Workinginthe engine compartmentposesa
risk of injury.
Wherepossible, let theengine cooldown and
touch only thecomponentsdescribedinthe
following.
G
WARNING
When thehood is open and thewindshield
wipersare set in motion,you can be injured by
thewiper linkage. Thereisarisk of injury.
Always switch off thewindshield wipersand
theignition before opening thehood.
!
Makesure that thewindshield wipersare
notfolded away from thewindshield. You
couldotherwise damagethe windshield wip-
ers or thehood.
X
Makesure that thewindshield wipersare
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on thehood.
The hood is released.
Engine compartment
233
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Reachintothe gap, pull hoodcatch handle ;
up and lift hood :.
If you lift thehoodbyapproximately 15 in
(40 cm), thehoodisopened and held open
automatically by thegas-filled strut.
Closingthe hood
X
Lowerthe hoodand let it fall from aheight of
approximately 8in(20 cm).
X
Checkthatthe hoodhas engagedproperly.
If thehoodcan be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
withalittlemoreforce.
Engine oil
Notes on theoil level
Dependingonyour driving style, thevehicle
consumes up to 0.9USqt(0.8 liters)ofoil per
600miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumption may
be higher than this when thevehicle is neworif
you frequently driveathigh enginespeeds.
Dependingonthe engine, theoil dipstick may be
in adifferent location.
When checking theoil level:
R
park thevehicle on alevelsurface
R
theengineshould be switched off for approx-
imately fiveminutesifthe engineisatnormal
operatingtemperature
R
if theengineisnot at normal operatingtem-
perature, e.g.ifthe enginewas only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying
out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe engine compart-
ment,such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Workinginthe engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Only touch the following componentsdescri-
bed.
Example
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;,the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.0 liter of engine oil.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
Example
234
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
X
Pull out oil dipstick :.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;,the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment,such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Workinginthe engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponentsinthe engine compartment,itmay
ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck.Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponentsbefore starting the engine.
H
Environmentalnote
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil entersthe soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
!
Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with aservice system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordancewith
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is availableatany authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
above the "max" mark on the dipstick,too
much oil has been added. This can lead to
damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
verter.Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick,add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(
Y page 234).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 292).
Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment,such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Engine compartment
235
Maintenance and care
Z
Workinginthe engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the componentsdescribed in the
following.
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is arisk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
open the cap to relieve pressure.
Example
X
Park the vehicle on alevel surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on alevel surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 116).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (
Y page 116).
X
Check the coolant temperature gage in the
multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡(70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u
(
Y page 116) in the ignition lock.
X
Slowly turn cap : half aturn anti-clockwise
to allow excesspressure to escape.
X
Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank :.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm)above marker bar = in the fuel filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant in
expansion tank :.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
Further information on coolant (
Y page 293).
Windshield washer system
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe engine compart-
ment,such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Workinginthe engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the componentsdescribed in the
following.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is arisk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Example
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : ontothe filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
mended minimum fluid level of 1USqt(1liter),
236
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
amessage appearsinthe multifunction display
prompting you to add washer fluid (
Y page 201).
Further informationonwindshield washer fluid/
antifreeze(
Y page 294).
Overview of theengine compartment
Example:gasoline engine
:
Engineoil cap
;
Oil dipstick
=
Brake fluid reservoir
?
Washerfluid reservoir
A
Coolantexpansion tank
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
informsyou of thenextservicedue date.
Information on thetype of serviceand service
intervals (see theseparate Maintenance Book-
let).
You can obtain further informationfroman
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).
i
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
does notshow any informationonthe engine
oil level. Observethe notesonthe engine oil
level(
Y page 234).
The multifunction display showsaservicemes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
R
ServiceAin..Days
R
ServiceADue
R
ServiceAExceeded by .. Days
Dependingonthe operatingconditionsofthe
vehicle,the remainingtimeordistanceuntil the
nextservicedue dateisdisplayed.
The letter A
or B,possibly in connectionwith a
number or another letter, showsthe type of ser-
vice. A
stands for aminor serviceand B for a
major service.
You can obtain further informationfroman
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display does
nottakeintoaccountany periods of timeduring
whichthe battery is disconnected.
Maintaining thetime-dependentservicesched-
ule:
X
Notedown theservicedue datedisplayedin
themultifunction display before disconnect-
ing thebattery.
or
X
Afterreconnectingthe battery, subtractthe
battery disconnectionperiods from theser-
vicedateshownonthe display.
Hiding aservice message
X
Pressthe a or % button on thesteering
wheel.
Displaying service messages
X
Switch on theignition.
X
Pressthe = or ; button on thesteering
wheel to selectthe Serv.
menu.
X
Pressthe 9 or : button to selectthe
ASSYST
PLUS submenu and confirmbypress-
ing the a button.
The servicedue dateappearsinthe multi-
function display.
Information aboutService
Resettingthe ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If theASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
has been inadvertently reset,thissettingcan
be correctedataqualified specialist work-
shop.
Haveservicework carried out as describedin
theMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
ASSYST PLUS
237
Maintenance and care
Z
lead to increased wear and damage to the
majorassemblies or the vehicle.
Aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-BenzCenter, will reset the
ASSYSTPLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can also
obtain further information on maintenance
work,for example.
Specialservice requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account.Under arduous operating conditionsor
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for
example:
R
regular citydrivingwith frequent intermediate
stops
R
if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
if the engineisoften left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engineoil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g.
an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-BenzService network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information fromany authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Care
Notes on care
H
Environmental note
Dispose of emptypackaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
!
When cleaning your car, do not use:
R
dry, coarse or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
solvents
R
cleaning agentscontaining solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touchthe surfaces and films with hard
objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,
you may scratchordamage the surfaces and
films.
!
Do not park your vehicle for along period of
timedirectly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
rosionofthe brakediscs and pads. Therefore,
drive for afew minutes after cleaning. By
heatingupthe brakes, the brakediscs and
pads dry. The vehicle can thenbeparked for a
long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is acondition for
retainingthe quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agentsrecom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing thevehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiencyisreduced after washing
the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditionsuntil full braking power is restored.
!
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLDfunc-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLDfunction in
the followingorsimilar situations:
R
when towingthe vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
It is preferable to use car washes with
adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that
corresponds to the specification for the Cab-
riolet program. In car washes that use high
water pressures, there is arisk that asmall
amount of water may leak intothe vehicle.
238
Care
Maintenance and care
!
Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic
car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be
damaged.
!
Never clean your vehicle in aTouchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
If you have your vehicle cleaned in ahigh-
pressure automatic car wash, small amounts
of water may enter the vehicle.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in position N when washing your vehicle in
atow-through car wash. The vehicle could be
damagedifthe transmission is in another
position.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and the roof are com-
pletely closed
R
the climate control blower is switched off
R
the windshieldwiper switch is at position 0
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car
wash from the very start.
Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car
washes that use textile washing elements with-
out brushes. This prevents fine scratches from
forming on the paintwork and film.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshieldand the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
i
Vehicles with decorative film: select awash
program without hot wax at the automatic car
wash.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at speciallyequipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use asoft sponge to clean.
X
Use amild cleaning agent, such as acar
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agen-
tle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlet or the edges of decorative foils.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with achamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work or the decorative foils.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Powerwashers
G
WARNING
The water jet from acircular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nentsdamagedinthis way may fail unexpect-
edly.There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis componentsreplaced imme-
diately.
!
Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative foil. Main-
tain adistance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
between the foil-wrappedparts of the vehicle
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner.
Information aboutthe correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the high-pressure
cleaner must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C).
!
Alwaysmaintain adistance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information aboutthe
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
tires
R
door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
electrical components
R
battery
R
plug-type couplings
R
lights
Care
239
Maintenance and care
Z
R
seals
R
trim
R
ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical componentscan
lead to leaks or failures.
!
Do not use high-pressure cleaners if the
tank recess is open while you clean it. This
can cause damage to the seals or other com-
ponents.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately,where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull,the paint cleaner recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use asuitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
Up Stick,torepair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
Mattefinish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following can give the paint aglossy
appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:
R
Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents
R
Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
considerable surface damage or, more spe-
cifically,toshiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Only use automatic car washes which cor-
respond to the latest technological stand-
ards. Never use wash programs which finish
by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
aclear matte finish.
i
Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the decorative film
!
The following may have an effect on the ser-
vice life and coloring of decorative film:
R
sunlight
R
temperature, e.g. hot-air fan
R
weather conditions
R
stone impacts and dirt
R
chemical cleaning agents
R
greasy substances
!
Do not use any types of polish on matt dec-
orative film. Polishing surfaces covered with
film gives it ashiny finish.
!
Do not treat matt or structured decorative
film with wax. This may lead to marks that
cannot be removed.
240
Care
Maintenance and care
Observe the notes in the section on the care and
treatment of matt paintwork (
Y page 240);
these notes also apply to decorative film.
To clean, use plenty of water and amild cleaning
agent without additional or abrasive products,
e.g. acar shampoo approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
X
Remove bird droppings, tree resin or fuel as
soon as possible.
The decorative film may be irreparably dam-
aged.
X
Dry vehicles covered with film using asoft,
absorbent cloth after every wash.
Water marks could otherwise form.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit aqualified specialist workshop.
The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has
been approved and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz,should be used when dirt has
penetrated the decorative film surface or the
decorative film has become dull.
The manufacturer can provide you with infor-
mation on special care and cleaning products.
Surfaces covered with film may appearshinier
after the decorative film has been removed.
i
Have work or repairs on decorative film car-
ried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose.
Cleaning the vehicleparts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from acircular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nentsdamaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly.There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis componentsreplaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park your vehicle for along period of
time directly after cleaning, particularlyafter
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for afew minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshieldorwiper blades. There is arisk of
injury.
Alwaysswitch off the windshieldwipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshieldor
wiper blades.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise arisk of damaging the windows.
!
Cleanthe water drainage channels of the
windshieldand the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
X
Cleanthe inside and outside of the windows
with adamp cloth and acleaning product that
is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
If the windshieldwipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is arisk of
injury.
Care
241
Maintenance and care
Z
Alwaysswitch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield.
!
Do not pull the wiperblade.Otherwise, the
wiperblade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiperbladestoo oftenand do
not rubthem too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged.Thiscould
cause wipernoise.
!
Holdthe wiperarm securelywhenfolding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiperarm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Foldthe windshield wiperarmsawayfrom the
windshield.
X
Carefully clean the wiperbladeswithadamp
cloth.
X
Foldthe windshield wiperarmsbackagain
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaningthe exterior lighting
!
Onlyuse cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which aresuitablefor plastic light lenses.
Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses.
X
Cleanthe plastic lenses of the exteriorlights
with awet sponge and amildcleaning agent,
e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampooorcleaning
cloths.
Cleaningthe mirrorturn signals
!
Onlyuse cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
thatare suitablefor plastic lenses.Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X
Cleanthe plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nalsinthe exteriormirror housing using awet
sponge and mildcleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampooorwithcleaning
cloths.
Cleaningthe sensors
!
If youclean the sensors with apower
washer, make sure thatyou keepadistance
of at least11.8 in (30 cm)between the vehicle
and the powerwashernozzle. Information
aboutthe correct distance is availablefrom
the equipment manufacturer.
X
Cleansensors : of the driving systemswith
water, car shampooand asoftcloth.
Cleaningthe rear view camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rearviewcamera with apower
washer.
X
Openthe camera flap(Y page 155).
X
Use clean water and asoftcloth to clean
camera lens :.
The camera flapcloses:
R
if the ignition is switched off
R
if the camera system is deactivated
R
starting at vehiclespeedsabove 6.2 mph
(10 km/h)
242
Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning theexhaust pipe
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become veryhot.Ifyou comeintocontact
withthese partsofthe vehicle,you couldburn
yourself. Thereisariskofinjury.
Always be particularly careful aroundthe
exhaust tail pipe and thetail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cooldown before touch-
ing them.
!
Do notclean theexhaust pipe withacid-
based cleaningagents,suchasbathroom
cleanerorwheel cleaner.
X
Clean theexhaust pipe withachromecare
product tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Impurities combined withthe effectsofroad grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flashrust to formonthe surface. You can
restore theoriginal shineofthe exhaust pipe by
cleaningitregularly, especiallyinwinter and
after washing.
Care
243
Maintenance and care
Z
Where will Ifind...?
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
Warning triangle ; is securedonthe insideof
the trunk lid.
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Turn lever : in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove warning triangle ;.
Setting up the warning triangle
X
Fold feet = downand out to the side.
X
Pullside reflectors ; upwards to form atri-
angleand lock them at the top using upper
press-stud :.
First-aid kit
First-aidkit : is located in the stowage well
under the trunk floor.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page221).
X
Remove first-aidkit :.
Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at
least once ayear. Replace the contents if nec-
essary, and replace missing items.
Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing reflective safety
jackets
The reflective safety jackets are located in the
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors.There are also
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the rear doors,inwhich reflec-
tive safety jackets can be stowed.
X
To remove: pullout safety jacket bag : with
the reflective safety jacket by the loop.
X
Open safety jacket bag : and pullout the
reflective safety jacket.
244
Where will Ifind...?
Breakdown assistance
X
To stow: foldthe reflective safety jacket, roll
it up and stow it in safety jacketbag :.
X
Slide safety jacketbag : along the lower
edge of the armrestinto the safety jacket
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that
loop ; hangs outwellwithinreach.
i
Remove anew reflective safety jacketfrom
its packaging material before sliding it into
the safety jacketcompartment. The packag-
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out
or make removing it difficult.
Observethe legalrequirements in each country.
Notesonthe reflective safety jacket
:
Maximumnumberofwashes
;
Maximumwashtemperature
=
Do not bleach
?
Do not iron
A
Do not usealaundry dryer
B
Do not dry-clean
C
Thisisaclass 2vest
R
The reflective safety jackets meetthe require-
ments definedbythe legalstandard onlyif:
-
the correct size is used and
-
the reflective safety jacketiscorrectlyfas-
tened
R
Before use, ensure thatthe reflective safety
jacketisclean and intact. The specialprop-
erties mayotherwise be compromised.
R
The reflective safety jackets shouldbestored
in theiroriginal packaging in adry place away
from sources of heatand light.
R
The maximumnumberofwashesspecified is
not the onlyfactor influencing the life spanof
the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
R
The reflective safety jackets shouldbedis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
-
after15washes, and/or
-
if the reflective strips have become
scratched,and/or
-
if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiledand cannotbe
cleanedoff, and/or
-
the reflective safety jacket's fluorescence
hasfaded,e.g.due to the effects of sunlight
R
Dispose of the reflective safety jacketinan
environmentally responsiblemanner. To do
so, contact your local
waste d
isposalcom-
pany.
Vehicletoolkit
General notes
The vehicletool kit can be found in the trunk or
in the stowagewellunder the trunk floor.
Apart from certain country-specificvariations,
the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change
tool kit. Some toolsfor changing awheel are
specifictothe vehicle. For more informationon
which toolsare required to performawheel
change on your vehicle, consult aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing toolscan include, for
example:
R
jack
R
wheelchock
R
lugwrench
R
ratchet wrench
R
alignment bolt
Where will Ifind...?
245
Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with aTIREFITkit
:
Tire sealant fillerbottle
;
Fuseallocation chart
=
Tire inflation compressor
?
Towing eye
X
Liftthe trunk floor up.
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 247).
i
Example:equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicles with acollapsiblespare wheel
The collapsiblespare wheelcan be found in the
stowagewellunder the trunk floor (
Y page 221).
:
Folding wheelchock
;
Fuseallocation chart
=
Jack
?
Sheetfor faulty wheel
A
Alignment bolt
B
Lugwrench
C
Towing eye
D
Valve extractor
E
Tire inflation compressor
X
Remove the collapsiblespare wheel
(
Y page 286).
Flat tire
Preparingthe vehicle
Your vehiclemay be equipped with:
R
tireswithrun-flatcharacteristics
(MOExtended tires) (
Y page 247)
Vehiclepreparation is not necessary on vehi-
cleswithMOExtendedtires
R
an emergency spare wheel(Y page 285)
Vehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gencycallsystem: in the event of aflattire,you
can contact the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system customercenter.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtendedtiresare
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.It
is therefore recommendedthatyou additionally
equipyourvehiclewithaTIREFIT kit if youmount
tiresthatdonot feature run-flatcharacteristics,
e.g.winter tires. ATIREFIT kit maybeobtained
from aqualified specialist workshop.
Informationonchanging and mounting wheels
(
Y page 280).
X
Stop the vehicleonsolid,non-slippery and
level ground,asfar away as possiblefrom
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away
(
Y page 131).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-aheadposition.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles withoutKEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
er'sdoor.
T
he vehicleelectronics now have status 0.
Thisisthe same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(
Y page 116).
X
Make sure thatthe passengersare not endan-
gered as they do so. Make sure thatnoone is
nearthe danger areawhile awheel is being
changed.Anyone whoisnot directlyassisting
in the wheelchange should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X
Getout of the vehicle. Payattentiontotraffic
conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver'sdoor.
246
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive yourvehi-
cle even if there is atotal loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize aMOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewallofthe tire. You willfind this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speedindex (
Y page275).
MOExtended tires may only be usedinconjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If apressure losswarningmessageappears
in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages(
Y page196)
R
check the tire for damage
R
if driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flatmode is
approximately 50 miles(80 km) when the vehi-
cle is partiallyladen and approximately 19 miles
(30 km) when the vehicleisfullyladen.
In addition to the vehicleload, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
vehiclespeed
R
road condition
R
outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flatmode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flatmode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed amaximumdesign speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for yourvehicle's
tires:
R
size
R
type and
R
the "MOExtended"mark
If atire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with aMOExtended tire, astandard tire may be
usedasatemporary mea
sure. Make sure that
you use the propersize and type (summer or
winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommendedthat you additionally
equip yourvehiclewith aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics,
e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit can be obtained
from aqualified specialist workshop, for exam-
ple.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is arisk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximumspeed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This appliesinparticulartoaladen
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
R
you hearbanging noises.
R
the vehiclestarts to shake.
R
you see smoke and smell rubber.
R
ESP
®
is intervening constantly.
R
there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheelrims checked at aqualified specialist
workshopwith regard to their further use.The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is atire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal puncturesofupto
0.16 in (4 mm),particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures downto Ò4‡(Ò20 †).
Flat tire
247
Breakdown assistance
Z
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to providesufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R
there are cuts or puncturesinthe tire larger
than those mentioned above.
R
the wheelrim is damaged.
R
you have drivenatvery low tire pressures or
on aflat tire.
There is arisk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmfuland causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyesorclothing or be swallowed.Donot
inhaleTIREFIT fumes.Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is arisk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from yourskin
immediatelywith water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
youreyes, immediatelyrinse them thor-
oughly with cleanwater.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed,immediately
rinse yourmouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reactionoccurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eightminutes at atime without
abreak. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooleddown.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreignobjects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage wellunder-
neath the trunk floor (
Y page245).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster withinthe driver's fieldof
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheelwith the defective tire.
X
Remove filler hose B and plug = from the
bottom section of the tire inflation compres-
sor housing.
X
Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the
mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant bot-
tle : until the plugengages.
X
With the sealing rings in front, slideyellow cap
A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting
of tire inflation compressor ;.
The cap must engageinboth hooks.
248
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
Remove thecap from valve C on thefaulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto thevalve.
X
Insertplug = intothe cigarette lightersocket
(
Y page 223) or intoa12Vpower socketin
your vehicle(
Y page 223).
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 in theignition
lock(
Y page 116).
X
Press on and off switch ? on thetireinflation
compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First,tiresealantispumped intothe tire. The
pressuremay briefly risetoapproximately
500kPa (5.0bar/73psi).
Do not switch off thetireinflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let thetireinflation compressor run for a
maximum of tenminutes. The tire should then
haveattained apressureofatleast 200kPa
(2.0bar/29 psi).
If atirepressureof200 kPa(2.0bar/29 psi) is
achieved after amaximum of tenminutes, see
(
Y page 249).
If atirepressureof200 kPa(2.0bar/29 psi) is
notachieved after amaximum of tenminutes,
see (
Y page 249).
If tire sealanthas escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
If your clothes are soiled withtiresealant, have
them cleanedwithperchloroethyleneatadry
cleanerass
oonaspo
ssible.
Tire pressure not reached
If atirepressureof200 kPa(2.0 bar/29 psi) has
beenachieved after ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escapewhenyou
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After amaximumoften minutes,the tire pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is arisk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
Atire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitablefor higher speeds. There is arisk of
accident.
You should thereforeadapt yourdriving style
accordingly and drive carefully.Donot exceed
the specified maximumspeedwith atire that
has beenrepaired using tire sealant.
The maximumspeedfor atire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of
the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-
ment cluster in the driver's fieldofvision.
!
Residuefrom the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use.This couldcause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Flat tire
249
Breakdownassistance
Z
H
Environmentalnote
Havethe used tiresealantbottle disposed of
professionally, e.g.ataqualifiedspecialist
workshop.
If tirepressure of 200kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has
beenachieved after amaximumperiod of ten
minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
tion compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for ashort period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is arisk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
i
In cases such as the one mentioned above,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure tableinthe
fuel filler flapfor values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
tire inflation compressor.
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button : next to pressure
gauge ;.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X
To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire
inflation compressor, press together the lock-
ing tabs on the yellow cap.
X
Pullthe tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tion compressor.
The filler hose remains attachedtothe tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changedthere.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
replaced as soon as possibleataqualified
specialist workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at aqualified specialist workshop.
250
Flat tire
Breakdownassistance
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Specialtoolsand expert knowledgeare required
when working on the battery,e.g.removaland
installation. Youshouldtherefore have allwork
involving the battery carriedout at aqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Workcarriedout incorrectly on the battery
can lead,for example, to ashort circuitand
thusdamagethe vehicleelectronics.Thiscan
lead to functionrestrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g.the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system)orthe
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehiclemay be restricted.
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the roadconditions
There is ariskofanaccident.
In the event of ashort circuitorasimilar inci-
dent, contact aqualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further.You
shouldhaveall work involving the battery car-
riedout at aqualified specialist workshop.
For further informationabout ABS and ESP
®
,
see (
Y page 57)and (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
Electrostaticbuild-upcan lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplo-
sive gases of abattery.There is ariskofan
explosion.
Before handling the battery,touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highlyflammablegas mixture formswhen
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Alwaysmakesurethatneither younor the bat-
tery is electrostaticallycharged. Abuild-upof
electrostatic charge can be caused,for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
duetofrictionbetween clothing and seats
R
if youpushorpullthe battery across the car-
petorothersyntheticmaterials
R
if youwipethe battery with acloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process,abattery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If ashort circuitoccurs or
sparks are created,the hydrogen gascan
ignite.There is ariskofanexplosion.
R
Make sure thatthe positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicleparts.
R
Never place metalobjects or toolsonabat-
tery.
R
It is important thatyou observe the descri-
bedorder of the battery terminalswhen
connecting and disconnecting abattery.
R
Whenjump-starting,makesurethatthe
battery poleswithidentical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
describedorder when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminalswhile the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acidiscaustic.There is ariskofinjury.
Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhaleany battery gases.Donot lean over
the battery.Keepchildren away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acidimmediatelywith
plenty of clean water and seekmedicalatten-
tion.
H
Environmental note
Batteriescontain pollu-
tants.Itisillegal to dispose
of them with the household
Battery (vehicle)
251
Breakdown assistance
Z
rubbish. They must be col-
lected separately and dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tallyresponsible recycling
system.
Dispose of batteriesinan
environmentally responsi-
ble manner. Take dis-
chargedbatteriestoaquali-
fied specialist workshop or
to acollection point for
used batteries.
!
Have the battery checked regularlyata
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervalsinthe Mainte-
nance Booklet or contact aqualified specialist
workshop for more information.
!
Always have work on batteriescarriedout at
aqualified specialist workshop.
Shouldit, in exceptionalcircumstances, be
absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-
lowing:
R
Secure the vehicletoprevent it from rolling
away.
R
Switch off the ignition.
R
Disconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal.
The transmission is locked in position j
after disconnecting the battery.
After the work has been done, install the bat-
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Riskofexplosion.
Fire, open flamesand smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyesorclothing.
Wearsuitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apronand face-
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clearwater. Contact aphysician
if necessary.
Weareye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batterieswhich have
been tested and approved for yourvehicleby
Mercedes-Benz. These batteriesprovide
increasedimpact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life,itmust alwaysbesuffi-
ciently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehiclebattery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop.You can also
charge the battery with achargerrecommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified special-
ist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehiclemainlyfor
short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a
lengthy period. Consult aqualified specialist
workshop if you wishtoleave yourvehicle
parked for along periodoftime.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electricalconsumers.
The vehiclewillthen use very little energy,thus
conserving battery power.
If the powersupply has been interrupted,e.g. if
you reconnect the battery,you willhave to:
R
reset the function for automatically folding
the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mir-
rors out once (
Y page91)
R
set the clock
On vehicles with amultimedia system, the
time is set automatically.
252
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Charging thebattery
G
WARNING
During chargingand jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from thebattery. Thereisa
riskofanexplosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilationwhile chargingand jump-starting.
Do notlean overabattery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic.Thereisariskofinjury.
Avoid contactwithskin, eyes or clothing.Do
notinhale any battery gases.Donot lean over
thebattery. Keep childrenaway from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean waterand seek medical atten-
tion.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freezeattempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing thevehicle or chargingthe battery, gases
can escape from thebattery. Thereisariskof
an explosion.
Allow thefrozenbattery to thaw out before
chargingitorjump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers withamaximum
chargingvoltage of 14.8 V.
!
Only charge thebattery usingthe jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-startingconnection pointisinthe
enginecompartment.
If theindicator/warning lamps do notlight up at
low temperatures, it is verylikely that thedis-
chargedbattery has frozen.Inthiscase, you
may neither charge thebattery norjump-start
thevehicle.The servicelife of athawed-out bat-
tery may be shorter. The starting characteristics
can be impaired, particularly at low tempera-
tures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Read thebattery charger's operatinginstruc-
tions before chargingthe battery.
X
Open thehood.
X
Connect thebattery chargertothe positive
terminal and ground pointinthe same order
as when connecting thedonor battery in the
jump-startingprocedure (
Y page 253).
Jump-starting
For thejump-startingprocedure, use only thejump-startingconnection pointinthe enginecom-
partment, consisting of apositiveterminal and aground point.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic.Thereisariskofinjury.
Avoid contactwithskin, eyes or clothing.Donot inhale any battery gases.Donot lean overthe
battery. Keep childrenaway from batteries.Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of
clean waterand seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During chargingand jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from thebattery. Thereisarisk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilationwhile chargingand jump-starting. Do notlean overabattery.
Jump-starting
253
Breakdown assistance
Z
G
WARNING
During the charging process,abattery produces hydrogen gas. If ashort circuitoccurs or sparks
are created,the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is arisk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into contact with
vehicleparts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on abattery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminalswhen connecting
and disconnecting abattery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poleswith identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularlyimportant to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminalswhile the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicleorcharging the battery,gasescan escapefrom the battery.There is arisk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter couldbe
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lampsdonot light up at low temperatures, it is very likelythat the dis-
chargedbattery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the
vehicle. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired,particularlyatlow temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at aqualified
specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicleusing arapidcharging device. If yourvehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicleorfrom asecond battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-
start the vehicleusing asecond battery or ajump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehiclewhen the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batterieswith a12Vvoltagerating.
R
Only use jumper cables which have asufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
If the battery is fullydischarged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
afew minutes before attempting to start. This chargesthe battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper
cables are connected to the ba
ttery.
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Secure the vehiclebyapplying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
254
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it
(
Y page 116).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X
Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?,then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =.Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X
Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X
Have the battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be anormal operating condition.
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
255
Breakdown assistance
Z
Towingand tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-startinganothervehicle
and its weight is greaterthanthe permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eyecould detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combinationcould roll-
over.
There is ariskofanaccident.
When towing or tow-startinganothervehicle,
its weight shouldnot be greaterthanthe per-
missiblegross weight of your vehicle.
Detailsonthe permissiblegross vehicleweight
of your vehiclecan be found on the vehicleiden-
tification plate (
Y page 289).
!
When ActiveBrake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONICorthe HOLD functionisactivated,
the vehiclebrakes automaticallyincertain
situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
these systemsinthe following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Onlysecurethe tow ropeortow baratthe
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehiclecould be
damaged.
!
Do not usethe towing eyefor recovery, this
could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover
the vehiclewithacrane.
!
When towing,pullawayslowly and
smoothly. If the tractivepower is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
!
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment.This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO,use the key insteadofthe Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission mayoth-
erwiseshift to position j when youopenthe
driver's or front-passengerdoor, which could
damage the transmission.
!
Make sure thatthe electricparkingbrake is
released.Ifthe electricparkingbrake is faulty,
visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
!
The vehiclecan be towed amaximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speedof30mph
(50 km/h)mustnot be exceeded.
If the vehiclehas to be towed morethan
30 miles (50km), the entire vehiclemustbe
raised and transported.
!
If youtow or tow-start anothervehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missiblegross vehicleweightofyourvehicle.
It is better to have the vehicletransportedthan
to have it towed away.
The automatic transmission must be in position
i when the vehicleisbeing towed away.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannotturnthe SmartKeytoposition 2 in
the ignition lock.
R
cannotshift the automatic transmission to
position i.
Deactivate the automatic locking featureb
efo
re
the vehicleistowed (
Y page 173).You could
otherwisebelocked outwhenpushing or towing
the vehicle.
Installing/removingthe towingeye
Installing the towingeye
G
WARNING
The exhaust tailpipemay be veryhot. There is
ariskofburns when removing the rearcover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe.Takeparticular
carewhenremoving the rearcover.
256
Towingand tow-starting
Breakdownassistance
The bracketsfor the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front and
at the rear, behind the covers.
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (
Y page 245).
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Take cover : off the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing avehicle with both axles on
the ground
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steeringwheel lock has been engaged. There
is arisk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with atow cable or atow bar.
The automatic transmission shifts to position
j automatically when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-
sion stays in position i when towing away the
vehicle, you must observe the following points:
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(
Y page 97).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Smart-
Key instead of the Start/Stop button
(
Y page 116).
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
In order to signal achange of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. When you reset
the combination switch, the hazard warning
flashers start flashing again.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(
Y page 256).
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
!
The ignition must be switched off if you are
towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised.
Intervention by ESP
®
could otherwise dam-
age the brake system.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Towing and tow-starting
257
Breakdown assistance
Z
Transporting the vehicle
Vehicleswithautomatic transmission
!
When the vehicleisloaded for transport, the
front and rearaxles must be stationaryand on
the same transportationvehicle. Positioning
overthe connectionpoint of the transport
vehicleisnot permitted.The drive train may
otherwisebedamaged.
Allvehicles
!
Youmay onlysecurethe vehiclebythe
wheels,not by parts of the vehiclesuchas
axleorsteeringcomponents. Otherwise, the
vehiclecould be damaged.
The towing eyecan be used to pull the vehicle
onto atrailer or transporterfor transporting pur-
poses.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition 2 in the igni-
tionlock.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehiclefromrolling away by
applying the electricparkingbrake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition u in the igni-
tionlockand remove the SmartKeyfromthe
ignition lock.
X
Secure the vehicle.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.You could otherwisedam-
agethe automatic transmission.
Youcan find informationon"Jump-starting"at
(
Y page 253).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If youmanipulate or bridgeafaulty fuse or if
youreplace it with afusewithahigheramper-
age, the electriccablescould be overloaded.
Thiscould resultinafire. There is ariskofan
accident and injury.
Alwaysreplace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses havingthe correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating,which youcan recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratingsare listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is locatedinthe vehicle
tool kit in the stowagecompartment under the
trunk floor (
Y page 245).
If anewly insertedfusealsoblows,havethe
cause traced and rectifiedataqualified special-
istworkshop,e.g.anauthorizedMercedes-Benz
Center.
!
Onlyuse fuses thathavebeenapproved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Otherwise, components or systemscould be
damaged.
!
Make sure thatnomoisture can enterthe
fuse boxwhenthe coverisopen.
!
When closing the cover, make sure thatitis
lying correctlyonthe fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwiseimpairthe oper-
atio
n of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicleserve to close down
faulty circuits. If afuseblows,all the compo-
nents on the circuitand their functions stop
operating.
Before changingafuse
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Switch off allelectrical consumers.
258
Fuses
Breakdownassistance
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(
Y page 116).
or
X
When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey
to position u in the ignition lock and remove
it (
Y page 116).
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 131).
All indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartmentonthe
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the trunk
Fuse box in the engine compartment
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 258).
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is arisk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Open the hood.
X
Use adry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X
To open: open clamps ;.
X
Remove fuse box cover : forwards.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-
rectly in cover :.
X
Insert cover : at the rear of the fuse box into
the retainer.
X
Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the trunk
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 258).
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the
partition covering.
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
To open: release cover : on the right and
left-hand sides with aflat object.
X
Open cover : downwards in the direction of
the arrow.
Fuses
259
Breakdown assistance
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If wheels and tires of thewrong sizeare used,
thewheelbrakes or suspension components
may be damaged. Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires withthose
that fulfill thespecificationsofthe original
part.
When replacing wheels, makesuretouse the
correct:
R
designation
R
model
When replacing tires,makesuretouse the
correct:
R
designation
R
manufacturer
R
model
G
WARNING
Aflat tire severely impairs thedriving,steer-
ing and braking characteristics of thevehicle.
Thereisariskofaccident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
do notdrivewithaflat tire.
R
immediately replace theflat tire withyour
emergencysparewheelorsparewheel, or
consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Tires withrun-flat characteristics:
R
pay attention to theinformation and warn-
ing noticesonMOExtended tires (tireswith
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are notapprovedfor your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benzorare notbeingused cor-
rectlycan impair theoperating safety.
Before purchasing and usingnon-approved
accessories, visit aqualified specialist work-
shopand ask about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be foundunder "Wheel/tire combinations"
(
Y page 284).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinationsatanauthorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Information on tire pressurecan be found:
R
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
(
Y page 271)
R
in thetirepressuretable in thefuel filler flap
(
Y page 130)
R
in the"Tirepressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
Checkthe tire pressurewhen thevehicleis
heavily laden and adjust priortoatrip.
While driving,pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handlingcharacteristics,e.g.pull-
ing to oneside.This may indicatethatthe
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspectthat
atireisdefective, reduce your speedimmedi-
ately. Stop thevehicleassoonaspossible to
checkthe wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damagecould also be causing theunusual
handlingcharacteristics.Ifyou findnosignsof
damage, havethe tires and wheels checkedata
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, makesurethatthe
tires do notget deformed by thecurborother
obstacles. If they cannotbeavoided, driveover
obstacles suchascurbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels
or tires.
Regularchecking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can causetireinflation pres-
sureloss.Asaresult,you could lose control of
your vehicle. Thereisariskofaccident.
Checkthe tires regularly for signsofdamage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
260
Operation
Wheels and tires
Checkwheelsand tires for damageatleast once
amonth.Checkwheelsand tires after driving
off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels
can causealoss of tirepressure. Pay particular
attentiontodamagesuchas:
R
cutsinthe tires
R
punctures in thetires
R
tears in thetires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformationorsevere corrosiononwheels
Regularly check thetiretread depthand the
conditionofthe tread across thewhole widthof
thetire(
Y page 261). If necessary, turnthe
frontwheelstofull lockinorder to inspectthe
inner side of thetiresurface.
All wheelsmust have avalvecap to protect the
valveagainst dirt and moisture. Do notmount
anythingontothe valveother than thestandard
valvecap or other valvecaps approved by
Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle.Donot use any
other valvecaps or systems,e.g.tirepressure
monitoringsystems.
Regularly check thepressureofall thetires par-
ticularly priortolongtrips. Adjustthe tirepres-
sure as necessary (
Y page 263).
Observethe notesonthe emergencyspare
wheel (
Y page 285).
The servicelife of tires depends, amongother
things, on thefollowingfactors:
R
driving style
R
tirepressure
R
distancecovered
Notes on tiretread
G
WARNING
Insufficient tiretread will reduce tiretraction.
The tireisnolonger able to dissipatewater.
This meansthatonwet road surfaces,the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speedisnot adapted to suit thedriving con-
ditions. Thereisariskofaccident.
If thetirepressureistoo high or toolow, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
entlocations on thetiretread. Thus,you
should regularly check thetread depthand
theconditionofthe tread across theentire
widthofall tires.
Minimum tiretread depthfor:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace thetires before
thelegally prescribedlimit for theminimum
tiretread depthisreached.
Marking : shows wherethe bar indicator for
tread wear (arrow) is integratedintothe tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)are required by law.
Six indicators are positionedonthe tiretread.
They are visible once atread depthofapprox-
imately á in (1.6mm) has been reached. If this
is thecase, thetireissoworn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
R
Only mounttires and wheelsofthe same type
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mountadiffer-
enttype or makeinthe event of aflat tire.
Observethe "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics)" section
(
Y page 247).
R
Only mounttires of thecorrectsizeontothe
wheels.
R
Break in newtires at moderatespeeds for the
first 60 miles(100km). The newtires only
reachtheir full performance after this dis-
tance.
R
Do notdrivewithtires whichhave toolittle
tread depth. This significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads(hydroplaning).
R
Replacethe tires after six years at thelatest,
regardless of wear.
Operation
261
Wheels and tires
Z
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
characteristics)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive yourvehi-
cle even if there is atotal loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be usedinconjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (
Y page247).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommendedthat you additionally
equip yourvehiclewith aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics,
e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit can be obtained
from aqualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have yourvehiclewinter-proofed at aqualified
specialist workshopatthe onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing awheel"
section (
Y page280).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle
to M+S tires.Using summertires at very cold
temperatures couldcausecracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can causetire inflation pres-
sure loss. As aresult, you couldlose control of
yourvehicle. There is arisk of accident.
Check the tires regularlyfor signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with atire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
arisk of an accident.
M+S tires with atread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both typesoftire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possiblegrip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires willallow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP
®
to function optimally in
winter. Thesetires have beendeveloped specif-
ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Always observe the maximumpermissible
speedspecified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page266).
X
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (
Y page267).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(
Y page267).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (
Y page285).
Snowchains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is arisk of an accident.
262
Winteroperation
Wheels and tires
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
alwaysinstall snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz,orare of acorresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact aqualified specialist workshop.
If you intendtomount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-
tire combinations (
Y page 284).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to aroad that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pulling
away with snow chains installed (
Y page 60).
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner,achieving an increased driv-
ing force (cutting action).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (
Y page 285).
Tire pressure
Tire pressurespecifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning along journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correctthe tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specificationsare vehi-
cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factorycan be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency sparewheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(
Y page 286).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at aqualified specialist workshop.
Tirepressure
263
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire and LoadingInformationplacard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (
Y page 271).
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard con-
tains the recommendedtire pressures for cold
tires. The recommendedtire pressures arevalid
for the maximum permissibleloadand up to the
maximum permissiblevehiclespeed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the insideofthe fuel
fillerflap. It shows the tire pressure for alltires
permitted at the factory for thisvehicle; see
illustration(example).
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
dedpressures for coldtiresfor various operat-
ing conditions, i.e.differingloadand speedcon-
ditions.
If atire size precedes atire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure informationisonlyvalid for
thattire size; see illustration(example).
The load conditions "partiallyladen"and "fully
laden" aredefinedinthe table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage.The
actual numberofseats maydiffer.
Some tire pressure tablesshowonlythe rim
diameters insteadofthe full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rimdiameterispartofthe tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (
Y page 275).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighterloads and/or lowerroad
speeds,the pressures shouldbereset to the
highervalues:
R
if youwanttodrive with an increased load
and/or
R
if youwanttodrive at higherroadspeeds
The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or
higherroadspeeds, shown in the tire pressure
table,may have anegative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan
lead to an excessive build-upofheatand asud-
denlossofpressure.
For moreinformation, contact aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
264
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If thetirepressuredrops repeatedly, the
wheel, valveortiremay be damaged. Tire
pressurethatistoo low may result in atire
blow-out.Thereisariskofanaccident.
R
Checkthe tire for foreign objects.
R
Checkwhether thewheelislosing air or the
valveisleaking.
If you are unable to rectify thedamage, con-
tactaqualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, thetirevalves may be overloaded and
malfunction,whichcan causetirepressure
loss.Due to their design,retrofittedtirepres-
suremonitors keep thetirevalveopen.This
can also result in tire pressureloss.Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Only screw thestandard valvecap or other
valvecapsapprovedbyMercedes-Benzfor
your vehicleontothe tire valve.
Use asuitable pressuregauge to checkthe tire
pressure. The outer appearanceofatiredoes
notpermit any reliable conclusionabout thetire
pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe elec-
tronic tire pressuremonitor, thetirepressure
can be checkedinthe on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressureincrease
when thevehicleisinmotion.This is dependent
on thedriving speedand theload.
Therefore, you should only correcttirepres-
sures when thetires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if thevehiclehas been parked withthe tires
out of direct sunlightfor at least three hours
and
R
if thevehiclehas notbeen driven further than
1mile (1.6km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, thevehiclespeedand the
tire load. If thetir
etemp
erature changes by
18 ‡(10 †), thetirepressurechanges by
approximately 10 kPa(0.1bar/1.5 psi).Take
this intoaccountwhen checkingthe pressureof
warm tires.Onlycorrect thetirepressureifitis
toolow for thecurrentoperating conditions. If
you checkthe tire pressurewhen thetires are
warm,the resulting value will be higher than if
thetires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reduce thetirepressuretothe value specified
for cold tires.The tire pressurewould otherwise
be toolow.
Observethe recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
R
in thetirepressuretable on theinside of the
fuel filler flap
R
printedinyellow on therim of theemer-
gency/collapsible sparewheel(dependingon
vehicleequipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires withpressurethatistoo low can over-
heat and burstasaconsequence.Inaddition,
they also suffer from excessiveand/orirreg-
ular wear, whichcan severely impair thebrak-
ing properties and thedriving characteristics.
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Avoid tire pressures that are toolow in all the
tires,includingthe sparewheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leadingtotiredefects
R
adversely affecthandling
R
wear excessively and/orunevenly
R
haveanadverse effectonfuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires withexcessively high pressurecan burst
because they are damaged moreeasilyby
road debris, potholesetc.Inaddition,they
also suffer from irregular wear,whichcan
severely impair thebraking properties and the
driving characteristics.Thereisariskofan
accident.
Tire pressure
265
Wheels and tires
Z
Avoidtire pressures thatare too high in allthe
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tiresmay:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adverselyaffect handling
R
wear excessivelyand/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ridecomfort
R
be more susceptibletodamage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximumpermissibletire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximumpermissibletire
inflation pressure. Alwaysobserve the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen
adjusting the tire pressure (
Y page 263).
i
The actual values for tiresare vehicle-spe-
cificand maydeviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checkingthe tire pressures
Important safety notes
The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof:
R
incorrectly set tire pressure
R
sudden loss of tire pressure, e.g.from afor-
eign object thathas penetrated the tire
Observethe notes on tire pressure
(
Y page 263).
Informationonair pressure for the tiresonyour
vehiclecan be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar
R
on the tire pressure table in the fuel fillerflap
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checkingtire pressuresmanually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceedasfollows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire thatistobe
checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gaugesecurelyonto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compareittothe
recommendedvalue on the Tire and Loading
Informationplacard or the tire pressure table
(
Y page 263).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommendedvalue.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metalpin in the valve,
using the tip of apen for example. Thencheck
the tire pressure againusing the tire pressure
checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat thesestepsfor the othertires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicleisinmotion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
Thisenables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in atire.Ifthe speed of rotationof
awheel changesasaresultofaloss of pressure,
acorresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunctiondisplay.
Youcan recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run FlatIndicator Active Press
'OK'toRestart message which appearsin
the Serv.
menu of the multifunctiondisplay.
Informationonthe message display can be
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system"section(
Y page 267).
266
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
Important safety notes
The tire pressurewarning system does notwarn
you of an incorrectlyset tire pressure. Observe
thenotes on therecommended tire pressure
(
Y page 263).
The tire pressureloss warning does notreplace
theneedtoregularly checkthe tire pressure. An
evenloss of pressureonseveral tires at the
sametimecannotbedetectedbythe tire pres-
sureloss warning system.
The tire pressuremonitor is notable to warn you
of asuddenloss of pressure, e.g. if thetireis
penetrated by aforeign object. In theevent of a
suddenloss of pressure, bringthe vehicletoa
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abruptsteering
movements.
The function of thetirepressureloss warning
system is limitedordelayedif:
R
snow chainsare mountedonyour vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditionsare wintry.
R
you are driving on sandorgravel.
R
you adopt averysportydriving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of
acceleration).
R
you drivewithaheavyload.
Restarting thetirepressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart thetirepressureloss warning system if
you have:
R
changed thetirepressure
R
changed thewheels or tires
R
mountednew wheels or tires
X
Before restarting,makesurethatthe tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
therespective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressurecan be found
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar.Additionally, atirepressure
table is attached to thefuel filler flap.The tire
pressureloss warning system can only give
reliable warningsifyou have set thecorrect
tire pressure. If an incorrecttirepressureis
set,these incorrectvalueswill be monitored.
X
Alsoobservethe notesinthe section on tire
pressures (
Y page 263).
X
Makesurethatthe SmartKey is in position 2
in theignition lock(
Y page 116).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
TirePressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The Run FlatIndicator Active Press
'OK'toRestart message appearsinthe
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm therestart:
X
Press the a button.
The TirePressure Now OK?
message
appearsinthe multifunction display.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect Yes.
X
Press the a button.
The Run FlatIndicator Restarted
mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunction display.
Afterateach-in period, thetirepressureloss
warning system will monitor theset tire pres-
sures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel therestart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
If the TirePressure Now OK? message
appears, use the 9 or : buttonto
select Cancel
.
X
Press the a button.
The tire pressurevaluesstoredatthe last
restartwill continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If atirepressuremonitor is installed, thevehi-
cle's wheels havesensorsthatmonitor thetire
pressures in all four tires.The tire pressuremon-
itor warnsyou if thepressuredrops in oneor
moreofthe tires.The tire pressuremonitor only
functionsifthe corresponding sensorsare
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. Afterafew minutesof
driving,the currenttirepressureofeachtireis
shown in the Serv.
menuofthe multifunction
display.
Tire pressure
267
Wheels and tires
Z
Example: current tire pressure display
For informationonthe message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section(
Y page 269).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire,including the spare(if provided),
shouldbechecked at leastonce amonth
when coldand inflatedtothe pressure rec-
ommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on
the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
labelonthe insideofthe fuel fillerflap. If your
vehiclehas tiresofadifferent size thanthe
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mationplacard or the tire pressure label, you
shoulddetermine the propertire pressure for
thosetires.
As an addedsafety feature, your vehiclehas
been equipped with atire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)thatilluminatesalow tire pres-
sure telltale when one or moreofyourtires
aresignificantlyunderinflated.Accordingly,
when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates,
youshouldstop and check your tiresassoon
as possible, and inflate themtothe proper
pressure. Driving on asignificantlyunderin-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflationalso
reducesfuelefficiency and tire treadlife, and
mayaffect the vehicle's handling and stop-
ping ability.
Please note thatthe TPMS is not asubstitute
for propert
ire ma
intenance,and it is the driv-
er'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, evenifunderinflationhas not
reachedthe level to triggerillumination of the
TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.
Your vehiclehas also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly.The TPMS
malfunctionindicator is combinedwiththe
lowtire pressure telltale.Whenthe system
detects amalfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately aminute and then
remaincontinuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated,
the system maynot be able to detect or signal
lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions mayoccurfor avariety of reasons,
including the installationofincompatible
replacement or alternate tiresorwheelson
the vehiclethatprevent the TPMS fromfunc-
tioning properly.Alwayscheck the TPMS mal-
functiontelltale after replacing one or more
tiresorwheelsonyourvehicletoensurethat
the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels
allowthe TPMS to continue to functionprop-
erly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to thatrecommendedfor coldtires
which is suitablefor the operating situation
(
Y page 263).Note thatthe correct tire pressure
for the curre
nt operating situationmustfirst be
taught-intothe tire pressure monitor. If asub-
stantiallossofpressure occurs, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the taught-inreference values. Restart the tire
pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
the coldtires(
Y page 270). The current pres-
sures aresaved as new reference values. As a
result, awarning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notesonthe recommendedtire pressure
(
Y page 263).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of asuddenlossofpressure, e.g.ifthe tire is
penetrated by aforeign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicletoa
halt by braking carefully. Avoidabruptsteering
movements.
268
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
The tire pressure monitor has ayellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or amalfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether atire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-
functioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for approximately
aminute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, amessage
appears in the multifunction display.Observe
the information on display messages
(
Y page 196).
It may take up to ten minutes for amalfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after afew minutes of
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at agas station with apressure gage. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to those measured at sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gage are higher than those shown by
the on-board computer. In this case, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interferencefrom radio transmit-
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way
radios) that may be being operated in or near the
vehicle.
Checking the tire pressureelectroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
(
Y page 116) in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press a.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving afew minutes
message appears.
After ateach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
itor automatically detectsnew wheels or new
sensors. As long as aclear allocation of the tire
pressure value to the individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Active
display message is shown instead of the tire
pressure display.The tire pressures are already
being monitored.
If an emergencyspare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for afew
minutes. Be aware that the value displayed for
the position where the emergencyspare wheel
is fitted is not the same as the current tire pres-
sure of the emergencyspare wheel.
Tire pressuremonitor warning mes-
sages
The tire pressure monitor detectsapressure
loss in one or more tires:
R
If the tire pressure monitor detectsapressure
loss in one or more tires, awarning message
is shown in the multifunction display.The yel-
low tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
R
If the Please Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
The tire pressure must be corrected when the
opportunityarises.
R
If the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display,the tire pressure in at
least one tire has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
R
If the Warning Tire Malfunction message
appears in the multifunction display,the tire
pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-
denly. The tires must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
display messages in the "Tires" section
(
Y page 196).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified
after afew minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correctpositions.
Tirepressure
269
Wheels and tires
Z
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
Whenyou restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rentlyset tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
monitor will automaticallydetect the new refer-
ence valuesafteryou have changed the tire
pressure. However, youcan also set reference
valuesmanually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver'ssideB-pillar (
Y page 263).
Additionaltire pressure valuesfor different
loadscan also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuelfillerflap
(
Y page 263).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
allfourwheels.
X
Ensurethat the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press a.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for the individual tiresorthe
Tire pressure will be displayed
afterdriving afew minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The Use
Current Pressures as New Ref‐
erence Values message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press a.
The Tire
Press. Monitor Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for afew minutes, the system
checks whetherthe current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
sures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.
If you wish to cancelthe restart:
X
Press %.
The tire pressure valuesstoredatthe last
restart will continuetobemonitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 Thisdevice
complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standardsofIndustry Can-
ada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions.(1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) Thisdevice
mustaccept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired oper-
ation. Le present appareilest
conforme d'industrieCanada
applicables auxappareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploita-
tion est authorisee auxdeuxcon-
ditions suivantes. (1) L'appareil
ne doitpas produire de brouil-
lage, et (2) L'autisatuerdel'ap-
pareildoitaccepter toutbrouil-
lage radioelectriquesubi, meme
si le brouillageest susceptible
d'encompromettre le fonc-
tionnement. WARNING:Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
blefor compliance could voidthe
user'sauthority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before
the radio certification number
only signifies Canadatechnical
specifications were met.
FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standardsofIndus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions.(1)
Thisdevice may not cause harm-
ful interference, and (2) This
device mustaccept any interfer-
ence received,
inclu
ding interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation. Le present appareil
est conforme d'industrieCanada
applicables auxappareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploita-
tion est authorisee auxdeuxcon-
ditions suivantes. (1) L'appareil
270
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
Country Radio type approval number
ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'ap-
pareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonc-
tionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by thepartyresponsi-
ble for compliance could void the
user'sauthoritytooperate the
equipment.The term"IC:"before
theradio certification number
onlysignifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 This devicecom-
plies with part 15 of theFCC
rules and with licenseexempt
RSS standards of Industry Can-
ada. Operationissubject to the
following conditions. (1) This
devicemay not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference
received,includinginterference
that may cause undesiredoper-
ation. Le present appareil est
conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio
exemptsdelicence. L'exploita-
tionest authorisee aux deux con-
ditionssuivantes.(1) L'appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'ap-
pareil doit accepter tout brouil-
lage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonc-
tionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by thepartyresponsi-
ble for compliance could void the
user'sauthoritytooperate the
equipment.The term"IC:"before
theradio certification number
onlysignifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading thevehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloadedtires can overheat,causing a
blowout.Overloadedtires can also impair the
steeringand driving characteristicsand lead
to brakefailure. Thereisarisk of accident.
Observe theload rating of thetires. The load
rating must be at least half of theGAWR of
your vehicle.Never overload thetires by
exceedingthe maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and LoadingInformation placardis
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside. The Tire
and LoadingInformation placardshows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
pantsand themaximum permissible vehicle
load. It also containsdetails of thetiresizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at thefactory.
(2) The vehicle identification plateisonthe
B-pillar on thedriver'sside. The vehicle
identification plateinformsyou of thegross
vehicle weight rating.Itismade up of the
vehicle weight,all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and thecargo. You can also findinfor-
mation about themaximum gross axle
weight rating on thefront and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
themaximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).Never exceed
themaximum load or themaximum gross
axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.
:
B-pillar,driver'sside
Loading thevehicle
271
Wheels and tires
Z
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximumgross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Informationplacard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicleoccupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shownonthe Tire and
Loading Informationplacard in the illustration
are examples. The maximumpermissible
gross vehicleweight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differfrom that in the illustration.
You can find the validmaximumpermissible
gross vehicleweight rating for yourvehicleon
the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
Number of seats
Maximumnumber of seats : indicates the
maximumnumber of occupants allowedto
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Informationplac-
ard.
i
The specifications shownonthe Tire and
Loading Informationplacard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differfrom the details shown.
The number of seats in yourvehiclecan be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determiningthe correct load limit
Step-by-stepinstructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
CodeofU.S. FederalRegulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Trafficand Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on yourvehicle’s
Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driverand passengers that willberiding in
yourvehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
ableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapa-
city. For example, if the "XXX"amount equals
1400 lbs and there willbefive 150-lb pas-
sengers in yourvehicle, the amount of avail-
ablecargo and luggage loadcapacity is
650 lbs (1400 -750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safelyexceed the
available cargo and luggage loadcapacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example:steps 1to3
The following table showsexamples on how to
calculate total and cargo loadcapacities with
varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. The following examples use a
loadlimitof1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illus-
tration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actualloadlimitfor yourvehiclestated
on yourvehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (
Y page271).
272
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
The greater the combined weight of the occu-
pants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2
Combined max-
imum weight of
occupants and
cargo (data
from the Tire
and Loading
Information
placard)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number of peo-
ple in the vehi-
cle (driver and
occupants)
1 2
Weight of the
occupants
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 2:
195 lbs
(88 kg)
Gross weight
of all occupants
175 lbs
(80 kg)
370 lbs
(168 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissible
load (maxi-
mum gross
vehicle weight
rating from the
Tire and Load-
ing Information
placardminus
the gross
weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
175 lbs
(80 kg) =
1325 lbs
(600 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
370 lbs
(168 kg) =
1130 lbs
(512 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (
Y page 271).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross
weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the
load must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants and the load) weighed on asuitable vehi-
cle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North Americaare provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
All about wheelsand tires
273
Wheels and tires
Z
Quality grades can be found,where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand
maximum sectionwidth.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Tractiongrade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passengercar tires must conform to the stat-
utory safety requirements in additiontothese
grades.
i
The actualvalues for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadweargradeisacomparativerating
based on the wearrate of the tire whentested
undercontrolled conditions on aspecified U.S.
government course. For example, atire graded
150 would wearone and one-half times as well
on the government test track as atire graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actualconditions of their use,however, and
may depart significantly from the norm dueto
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The tractiongradeassignedtothis tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and doesnot include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning,orpeaktractionchar-
acteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. Thiscan leadtodamage to
the drivetrain.
The tractiongrades –from highest to lowest
are AA, A, Band C. Thosegrades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
uredundercontrolled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphaltand con-
crete. Atire marked Cmay have poortraction
performance.
The safe speedonawet, snow coveredoricy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay specialattentiontoroadcondi-
tions whentemperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends aminimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm)onall four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (
Y page261). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparisonwithsummer tires. The braking dis-
tance is stillmuch furtherthan on surfaces that
are not icy or coveredwithsnow. Take appro-
priate care whendriving.
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature gradefor this tire is estab-
lished for atire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading,eitherseparately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possibletire failure.
The temperature grades are A(the highest),B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heatand its ability to dissipate
heatwhentested undercontrolled conditions
on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tainedhightemperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can leadtosudden tire
failure. The gradeCcorresponds to alevelof
performance which allpassengercar tires must
meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
274
Allabout wheelsand tires
Wheels and tires
Tire labeling
Overview
:
UniformTireQualityGradingStandard
(
Y page 278)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(
Y page 277)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 277)
?
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 266)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 278)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speedrating (
Y page 275)
D
Loadindex (Y page 277)
E
Tire name
The markings describedabove areonthe tire in
additiontothe tire name(sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate
fromthe data in the example.
Tire size designation,load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speedcould
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is ariskofaccident.
Therefore,onlyuse tire types and sizes
approved for your vehiclemodel.Observe the
tire load rating and speedrating required for
your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominalaspectratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rimdiameter
A
Loadbearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards,the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or maycontain one letter
thatprecedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion(as shown above): these arepassenger
vehicletiresaccording to Europeanmanufac-
turing standards.
If "P"precedes the size description: these are
passengervehicletiresaccording to U.S. man-
ufacturingstandards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tiresaccording to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T"precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
areonlydesignedfor temporary useinanemer-
gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width and
is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifiesthe tire type.
"R"represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
onaltire
s; "
B" represents diagonalradial tires.
Optionally,tireswithamaximum speedofover
149 mph (240km/h)may have "ZR" in the size
Allabout wheels andtires
275
Wheelsand tires
Z
description, dependingonthe manufacturer
(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacityofatire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver'sside (
Y page 271).
Example:
Load-bearingindex 91 indicates amaximum
load of 1,356lb(615 kg) that the tires can bear.
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (
Y page 277).
For further information on the load bearing
index,see "Load index"(
Y page 277).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drivecarefully and adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer
tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with amaximum speed of
over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in
the sizedescription, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g.245/40ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-
bearingindex A and speed rating B.
R
If the sizedescription of your tireincludes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tiremanufacturer in order to findout
the maximum speed.
If aservice specification is available, the max-
imum speed is limited accordingtothe speed
rating in the service specification.Example:
245/40ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification.The letter "Y" rep-
resentsthe speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tireislimited to 186 mph
(300km/h).
R
The sizedescription for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40ZR18(99 Y). Speedrating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tireis
over 186 mph (300km/h).Ask the tireman-
ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-
weather
tires and
winter
tires
Index Speed rating
QM+S
1
up to 100 mph (160km/h)
TM+S
1
up to 118 mph (190km/h)
HM+S
1
up to 130 mph (210km/h)
VM+S
1
up to 149 mph (240km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
additiontothe M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflakesymbol on the tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tiretraction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
276
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
An electronic speed limiterprevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding aspeed of 130 mph
(210km/h).
The speed rating of tiresmounted at the factory
maybehigherthanthe maximumspeed thatthe
electronic speed limiterpermits.
Make sure thatyourtireshavethe required
speed rating,e.g.whenbuyingnew tires. The
required speed rating for your vehiclecan be
found in the "tires"section(
Y page 284).
Further informationabout reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
In additiontothe load-bearing index, load
index : mayalsobeimprintedonthe sidewall
of the tire.You will find thisafterthe letter that
identifiesthe speed rating (
Y page 275).
R
If no specification is given: no text (asinthe
exampleabove), represents astandard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents areinforced tire
R
Light Load: represents alight load tire
R
C, D, E: represents aloadrange thatdepends
on the maximumloadthatthe tire can carry at
acertain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate
from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximumtire load : is the maximumpermis-
sibleweightfor which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tiresbyexceeding the
specified load limit. The maximumpermissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 271).
i
The actual values for tiresare vehicle-spe-
cificand maydeviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire IdentificationNumber(TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate thatevery tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint aTIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is auniqueidentificationnumber. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturersorretreaders
to inform purchasersofrecallsand othersafety-
relevant matters.Itmakes it possiblefor the
purchaser to easily identify the affectedtires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tioncode ;,tire size =,tire typecode ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT(Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks thatthe tire complies with the
Allabout wheels and tires
277
Wheelsand tires
Z
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation.
Manufacturer identificationcode: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have acode
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have acode
with four symbols.
For further informationabout retreaded tires,
see (
Y page284).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as acode to describespecific
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides informationabout the age of atire. The
first and second positions represent the weekof
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
endar week. Positions three and four represent
the yearofmanufacture. For example, atire that
is marked "3214" was manufactured in week32
in 2014.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This informationdescribes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply compositionand material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabricinthe tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi)and 100 kilopascals(kPa)
are the equivalent of 1bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
USDepartment of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Auniform standard to gradethe quality of tires
with regards to tread quality,tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewallof
the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure appliestothe
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on afullyloaded vehicleand for the maxi-
mum permissiblevehiclespeed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing loadand speedcon-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optionalequipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whetheritisactually installed on
the vehicleornot.
Rim
This is the part of the wheelonwhich the tire is
mounted.
GAWR (Gross AxleWeight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximumgross axle weight
rating. The actualloadonanaxle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on
the dri
ver's
side.
278
Allabout wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of afully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximumloaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewallof
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of avehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Maximumload rating
The maximum load rating is the maximum per-
missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a
tire is approved.
Maximumpermissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximumload on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.
PSI (pounds per squareinch)
Astandard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
All about wheelsand tires
279
Wheels and tires
Z
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optionalextras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs).These
optionalextras, such as high-performance
brakes,levelcontrol, aroof rack or ahigh-per-
formance battery,are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is aunique identifier which can be usedby
atire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for aproduct recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load bearingindex
The loadbearing index (also loadindex) is acode
that contains the maximumloadbearing capa-
city of atire.
Traction
Tractionisthe result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wearbars)that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars,the wearlimitof á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in avehicleattheir
designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominalloadand luggageloadplus68kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing awheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(
Y page246) contains information and notes on
how to dealwith aflat tire. Informationondriv-
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of aflat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flatcharacteristics" (
Y page247).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheelbrakes or suspension components
may alsobedamaged. There is arisk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
!
On vehicles equipped with atire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear
the valve.This coulddamage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes when changing awheel
(
Y page281).
The wearpatterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before aclearwearpattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wearmore on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervalsinthe tire manufacturer's
warranty book in yourvehicledocuments. If no
warranty book is available,the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles(5,000 to
10,000 km).Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheelrotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheeland the
brake disc thoroughly every time awheelisrota-
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system or
the tire pressure monitor.
Directionofrotation
Tires with aspecified direction of rotation have
additionalbenefits, e.g. if there is arisk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
280
Changing awheel
Wheels and tires
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storingwheels
Store wheels thatare not being used in acool,
dry and preferably dark place.Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting awheel
Preparingthe vehicle
X
Stop the vehicleonsolid,non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the electricparking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles withoutKEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
er'sdoor.
The vehicleelectronics now have status 0.
Thisisthe same as the SmartKeyhaving been
removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(
Y page 116).
X
If included in the vehicleequipment,remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X
Safeguardthe vehicleagainst rolling away.
i
Due to differencesinvehicleequipment,not
allvehicles areequippedwithatire-change
tool kit. For informationonwhich toolsare
required to performawheel change on your
vehicle, consult an authorizedMercedes-
Benz Center.
Necessary tire-changing toolscan include, for
example:
R
Jack
R
Wheel chock
R
Lugwrench
Securingthe vehicle to preventitfrom
rolling away
If your vehicleisequippedwithawheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(
Y page 245).
The folding wheelchockisanadditional safety
measure to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling
away,for examplewhenchanging awheel.
X
Foldbothplatesupwards :.
X
Foldout lowerplate ;.
X
Guidethe lugs on the lowerplate fullyinto the
openings in base plate =.
X
Place chocks or othersuitableitems under
the front and rearofthe wheelthatisdiago-
nally opposite the wheelyou wish to change.
Raisingthe vehicle
G
WARNING
If youdonot positionthe jack correctlyatthe
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip overwiththe vehicleraised.
There is ariskofinjury.
Onlypositionthe jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Changingawheel
281
Wheelsand tires
Z
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
R
To raisethe vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicleraised.
R
The jack is designed only to raiseand hold the
vehiclefor ashort time while awheelisbeing
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheelonuphill and down-
hill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing awaybyapplying the parking brake and
inserting wheelchocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake whilethe vehicleisraised.
R
The jack must be placed on afirm, flat and
non-slip surface. On aloose surface, alarge,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used.Ona
slippery surface, anon-slip underlay must be
used,e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as ajack underlay.Otherwise, the jack willnot
be abletoachieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
R
Make sure that the distance betweenthe
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Never place yourhands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicleis
raised.
R
Do not open or close adoor or the trunk lid
when the vehicleisraised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in the
vehiclewhen the vehicleisraised.
X
Using lug wrench :,loosenthe bolts on the
wheelyou wish to change by aboutone full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheelhousings and just in front of the rear
wheelhousings (arrows).
Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle
has covers installed to protect the vehiclebody
next to the jacking points on the outer sills.
X
Fold cover ; upwards.
282
Changing awheel
Wheelsand tires
X
Position jack ? at jacking point =.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
completely on jacking point =.The base of
the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X
Turn crank A until the tire is raised amaxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing awheel
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting anew wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As aresult, you could
lose awheel while driving. There is arisk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact aqualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is arisk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructionsand
safety notes in the "Changing awheel" section
(
Y page 280).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork,hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Changing awheel
283
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Clean thewheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Slidethe wheel to be mountedontothe align-
mentbolt and push it on.
X
Tightenthe wheel boltsuntil they are finger-
tight.
X
Unscrew thealignmentbolt.
X
Tightenthe last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
X
Vehicles with acollapsible spare wheel:
inflate thecollapsible sparewheel
(
Y page 286).
Only then lower thevehicle.
Lowering thevehicle
G
WARNING
The wheelscould work looseifthe wheel nuts
and boltsare nottightened to thespecified
tightening torque. Thereisariskofaccident.
Havethe tightening torque immediately
checked at aqualified specialist workshop
after awheel is changed.
!
Vehicles with acollapsible spare wheel:
before lowering thevehicle,inflate thecol-
lapsible sparewheel withthe tireinflation
compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise
be damaged.
X
Turn thecrank of thejackcounter-clockwise
until thevehicle is once again standing firmly
on theground.
X
Placethe jacktoone side.
X
Tightenthe wheel boltsevenly in acrosswise
pattern in thesequenceindicated (: to A).
The specifiedtightening torque is 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
X
Turn thejackback to its initial position.
X
Stow thejackand therestofthe vehicle tools
in thetrunk again.
X
Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the
cover intothe outer sill.
X
Checkthe tirepressureofthe newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observethe recommended tirepressure
(
Y page 263).
When you are driving withthe collapsible spare
wheel mounted, thetirepressureloss warning
system or thetirepressuremonitorcannotfunc-
tionreliably. Only restartthe tirepressureloss
warning system or tirepressuremonitorwhen
thedefective wheel has been replacedwitha
newwheel.
Vehicles with atirepressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheelsmust be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tirecombinations
You can ask for informationregardingpermitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
whichhave been approvedbyMercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
284
Wheel and tirecombinations
Wheels and tires
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP
®
,and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with aload, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components.This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz,since previ-
ous damage cannot alwaysbedetected on
retreaded tires. As aresult, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(
Y page 263).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment –alwaysequip
the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on agiven axle (left
and right)
R
with the same type of tires at agiven time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to mount adiffer-
ent type or make in the event of aflat
tire.
Observe t
he "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics)" section
(
Y page 247).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is thereforerecommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit may be obtained
from aqualified specialist workshop.
Emergency sparewheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
the spare wheel or emergencyspare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mountinganemergencyspare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is arisk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
R
never mount more than one spare wheel or
emergencyspare wheel that differs in size.
R
only use aspare wheel or emergencyspare
wheel of adifferent size briefly.
R
do not switch ESP
®
off.
R
have aspare wheel or emergencyspare
wheel of adifferent size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergencyspare wheel or spare
wheel of adifferent size, you must not exceed
the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Emergency sparewheel
285
Wheels and tires
Z
Snow chains mustnot be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
General notes
You can askfor information regarding permitted
emergency spare wheelsatanauthorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You shouldregularlycheck the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel,particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (
Y page 263). The value on the wheel is
valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on useaswellasthe speed
limitation specified on the emergency spare
wheel.
Replace the tiresaftersix years at the latest,
regardless of wear. Thisalsoapplies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Whenyou are driving with the collapsiblespare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannotfunc-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defectivewheel hasbeenreplaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
mounting an emergency spare wheel,the sys-
tem may stilldisplay the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for afew minutes. The value dis-
played for the mounted emergency spare wheel
is not the same as the current tire pressure of
the emergency spare wheel.
Removingthe emergencyspare wheel
Vehicles with acollapsiblespare wheel
The collapsiblespare wheel can be found in the
stowagewellunder the trunk floor (
Y page 221).
X
Turn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Remove collapsiblespare wheel :.
Alwaysobserve the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting awheel"section
(
Y page 281).
Stowingthe emergencyspare wheel
!
Only place the collapsiblespare wheel in the
vehiclewhenitisdry.Otherwise, moisture
may get into the vehicle.
Take the following stepstostow ausedcollaps-
ible spare wheel.Otherwise, the collapsible
spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in the inten-
ded manner. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat
youhavethis work carriedout at aqualified
specialist workshop.
X
Unscrewthe valve cap from the valve.
X
If possible,unscrew the valve insert from the
valve and release the air.
Fully deflating the tirescan take afew
minutes.
X
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X
Screw the valve cap back on.
X
Pull the protectivesheet provided with the
spare wheel overthe collapsiblespare wheel.
X
Stow the collapsiblespare wheel in the emer-
gency spare wheel well under the trunk.
X
Use the retaining screwtopierce the protec-
tive sheet and fasten the collapsiblespare
wheel in place.
Inflating the collapsiblespare wheel
!
Inflate the collapsiblespare wheel using the
tire inflation compressor before lowering the
286
Emergencyspare wheel
Wheels and tires
vehicle. The wheelrim could otherwise be
damaged.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eightminutes at atime without
abreak. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressorcan be operated
again once it has cooled down.
X
Mount the collapsible spare wheelasdescri-
bed (
Y page281).
The collapsible spare wheelmust be mounted
before it is inflated.
X
Remove the tire inflation compressorfrom
the stowage space under the trunk floor
(
Y page245).
X
Pullplug ? out of the housing.
X
Take the filler hose out of the housing.
X
Insert the yellow hose connector of the filler
hose into the guide in the housing and push it
into the fixture until the hose connector
engages.
X
Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
lapsiblespare wheel.
X
Screw union nut : on the filler hose onto the
valve.
X
Make sure the tire inflation compressor's on/
off switch A is set to OFF.
X
Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette
lighter or into a12Vpowersocket in your
vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page116).
X
Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressorto ON.
The tire inflation compressorisswitched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
on pressure gauge =.
X
Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X
When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A to OFF,on
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire inflation compressorisswitched off.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock.
X
If the tire pressure is higherthan the specified
pressure, press pressure release button ;
until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X
Unscrew union nut : on the filler hose from
the valve.
X
Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-
ble spare wheelagain.
X
To remove the filler hose from the tire inflation
compressor, push down the rocker switch on
the hose connector and pullout the filler
hose.
X
Stow plug ? and the filler hose in the lower
section of the compressorhousing.
X
Stow the tire inflation compressorinthe vehi-
cle.
Emergency spare wheel
287
Wheels and tires
Z
Information regardingtechnicaldata
i
The datastatedherespecifically refers to a
vehiclewithstandard equipment. Consult an
authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterfor the
datafor all vehiclevariants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with theengineelectron-
ics
!
Only haveworkcarried out on theengine
electronics and itsassociated parts, suchas
control units, sensors, actuating components
and connectorleads,ataqualified specialist
workshop. Vehiclecomponentsmay other-
wise wear morequickly and thevehicle's
operating permit may be invalidated.
Installing two-way radiosand mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagneticradiation from two-way
radios can interfere withthe vehicleelectron-
ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-
rofittedincorrectly. This could jeopardizethe
operating safetyofthe vehicle. Thereisarisk
of an accident.
You should haveall workonelectrical and
electronic componentscarried out at aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you incorrectlyoperate two-way radios in
thevehicle, theelectromagneticradiation
may interfere withthe vehicleelectronics,for
exampleif:
R
thetwo-way radioisnot connectedtoan
exteriorantenna
R
theexteriorantenna is notcorrectly moun-
tedorisnot low-reflection
This could jeopardizethe operating safetyof
thevehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Havethe low-reflection exteriorantenna
installed at aqualified specialist workshop.
Always connecttwo-way radios to thelow-
reflection exteriorantenna when operating in
thevehicle.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
theinstructionsfor installation and use of
two-way radios are notobserved.
In particular, thefollowingconditionsmust be
complied with:
R
only approvedwavebands may be used
R
observethe maximum permissible output
in these wavebands
R
only approvedantenna positionsmay be
used
Excessivelevels of electromagneticradiation
may causedamagetoyour healthand thehealth
of others. Using an exteriorantenna takes into
accountcurrentscientific discussionsrelating
to thepossible healthhazards that may result
from electromagneticfields.
The followingantenna positionsmay be used if
RF transmitters havebeen properly installed:
Approved antenna positions
:
Rear fender
i
On therear fenders, it is recommended to
position theantenna on theside of thevehicle
closesttothe center of theroad.
Use theTechnical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
-EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radiofrequency transmitting equipment).
Observethe legal requirements for accessory
parts.
If your vehiclehas installationsfor two-way radio
equipment, use thepower supplyorantenna
connectionsintended for use withthe basic wir-
288
Vehicle electronics
Technical data
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer'sSup-
plementwhen installing.
Deviationswith respect to frequencybands,
maximum transmission outputsorantenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antennamust not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3-54MHz
100 W
4mwaveband
74 -88MHz
30 W
2mwaveband
144 -174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 -460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 -460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The followingcan be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with amaximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 -410 MHz wavebandand amaxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioningthe
antennaonthe outside of the vehicle for the
followingwavebands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
:
VIN
;
Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
differentfor everyvehicle and can deviate
Identification plates
289
Technicaldata
Z
from the data shownhere. You can find the
data applicable to yourvehicleonthe vehicle
identificationplate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slidethe front-passenger seattoits front
most position.
X
Fold trim : upwards.
VIN ; can be seen.
The VIN can alsobefound in the following loca-
tions:
R
on the vehicleidentificationplate
(
Y page289)
R
on the lower edge of the windshield
(
Y page290)
Engine number
:
Emissioncontrol information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federaland Cali-
fornianemissions standards
;
Engine number(stamped into the crank-
case)
=
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonousand haz-
ardous to health. There is arisk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use,storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Disposeofservice products in an environ-
mentallyresponsiblemanner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil,transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshieldwasher fluid
R
Climate control systemrefrigerant
Comply with all validregulations with respect to
handling, storing, and disposing of service flu-
ids.
Components and service products must match.
You should therefore only use products that
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Informationabout tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can identify service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval(e.g. MB-Approval229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate alevelofquality or aspecificationin
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.51). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
290
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Other identifications, for example:
R
0W-30
R
5W-30
R
5W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
fuel creates arisk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is arisk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel awayfrom children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash awayfuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay.Donot induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-
city
SLC 300
18.5 US gal
(70.0 l)
MercedesAMGvehicles
15.8 US gal
(60.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
SLC 300
Approx.
2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
MercedesAMGvehicles
Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuelwith the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel willenter the fuel system.
Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could
resultindamage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Only refuelusing unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
YourvehicleisE10-compatible. You can
refuelyourvehicleusing E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehiclewith other fuelscan leadtodam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
!
Do not use the following:
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
Gasoline with methanol
R
M100 (100% methanol)
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Service products and fillingcapacities
291
Technical data
Z
Do not mix such fuelswiththe fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
!
To ensurethe longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine,onlypremium-grade
unleadedgasoline must be used.
If standard unleadedgasoline is unavailable
and youhavetorefuelwithunleadedgasoline
of alower grade,observe the following pre-
cautions:
R
Onlyfillthe fuel tank to half full with regular
unleadedgasoline and fillthe restwithpre-
mium-gradeunleadedgasoline as soonas
possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximum speed.
R
Avoidsuddenaccelerationand engine
speeds over3,000 rpm.
Youwillusually find informationabout the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If youcannotfind the
labelonthe fuel pump, askthe gasstationstaff.
i
For furtherinformation, consultaqualified
specialistworkshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As atemporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, youmay also useregular
unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON.Thismay reduceengineper-
formance andincreasefuelconsumption. Avoid
drivingatfullthrottle and sudden acceleration.
Never
refu
elusing gasoline with alower AKI.
i
The fuelsyou can useinyourvehiclemay
differfromthe information in the Operator's
Manualdepending on the country.The fuels
thathavebeenapproved for your vehiclecan
be found on the instructionlabel on the inside
of the fuel fillerflap.
Informationonrefueling (
Y page 130).
Additivesingasoline
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
addedlater can lead to engine failure. Do not
mixfueladditiveswithfuel. Thisdoesnot
includeadditivesfor the removaland preven-
tionofresidue buildup. gasoline must onlybe
mixed with additivesrecommendedby
Mercedes-Benz. Complywiththe instructions
for useonthe product label. Moreinformation
aboutrecommendedadditivescan be
obtained fromany authorizedMercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou usebran-
dedfuels thathaveadditives.
The fuel quality availableinsomecountries may
not be sufficient. Residuecould buildupinthe
fuel injectionsystemasaresult. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel maybemixed
withthe cleaning additive reco
mmend
edby
Mercedes-Benz. Youmustobserve the notes
and mixing ratiosspecifiedonthe container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Do not useengine oiloranoil filter with
specifications deviating fromthoseexpressly
required for the prescribedservice intervals.
Do not change the engine oiloroil filter in
order to setreplacement intervals longerthan
thoseprescribed. Thiscould otherwisecause
damage to the engine or exhaust gasafter-
treatment.
Followthe instructions on the service interval
displayfor changing the engine oil. Thiscould
otherwisecause damage to the engine or
exhaust gasaftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notesonservice products (
Y page 290).
The engine oils arematchedtothe performance
of Mercedes-Benz enginesand service intervals.
Youshouldtherefore onlyuse engine oils and oil
filters thatare approved for vehicles with main-
tenance systems.
For alistofapproved engine oils and oilfilters,
consultanauthorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
292
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Model MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
All models
229.5
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Fillingcapacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
SLC 300
6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Additives
!
Do not useany additivesinthe engine oil.
Thiscould damagethe engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbsmoisture
from the air. Thislowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid.Ifthe boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. Thiswould impairbraking efficiency.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Youshouldhavethe brake fluid renewedat
the specified intervals.
Whenhandling brake fluid,observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page 290).
The brake fluid change intervalscan be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
Only usebrake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-FreigabeorMB-
Approval331.0.
Information aboutapproved brake fluid can be
obtainedatany qualified specialist workshopor
on the Internetat
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Importantsafety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool downbefore youadd anti-
freeze.Make surethat antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly cleanthe
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
!
Only addcoolant that has beenpremixed
with the desiredantifreeze protection. You
couldotherwise damagethe engine.
Furtherinformationoncoolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Orcon-
tact aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
!
Always use asuitablecoolant mixture, even
in countries where hightemperatures prevail.
Otherwise,the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products whenhandling coolant
(
Y page 290).
The coolant is amixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
the following:
R
anti-corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection downto
-35 ‡(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately266
(130 †).
Service products and filling capacities
293
Technical data
Z
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protectthe engine
cooling system against freezingdown to
approximately -35 ‡(-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreezeprotection down
to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for ServiceProducts
310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with acoolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nanceinterval at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Fillingcapacities
Missing values were not availableattime of
going to print.
Model Capacity
SLC 300
Approx.8.5 US qt
(8.0 l)
MercedesBenz
SLC 43 AMG
Approx.8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nentsorthe exhaust system. There is arisk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
!
Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give afalse reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page 290).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
X
Add 1part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correctmixing ratio refer to the infor-
mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant.Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Servicework, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by aqualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
294
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Refrigerant instructionlabel
Example:refrigerant instruction label
:
Symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicablestandards
?
PAG oilpartnumber
A
Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises youabout:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carriedout at aqualified
specialist workshop
Fillingcapacities
Model Refrigerant
Allmodels
19.4 ±0.4 oz
(550 ±10g)
Model PAG oil
All models
2.8 oz
80 g
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicledata:
R
the heights specified may vary as aresultof
-
tires
-
load
-
condition of the suspension
-
optionalequipment
R
optionalequipment reduces the maximum
payload
Dimensions and weights
Model
: Opening height
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
70.75 in
(1797 mm)
All other models
70.5 in
(1795 mm)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
Vehicle length
163.1 in (4143 mm)
Vehicle length
whenopening/clos-
ing the roof
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
78.9 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height
51.2 in (1303 mm)
Vehicle height
whenopening/clos-
ing the roof
61.7 in (1566 mm)
Wheelbase
95.7 in (2431 mm)
Turning radius
All other models
Vehicle length
162.7 in (4133 mm)
Vehicle length
whenopening/clos-
ing the roof
170.2 in (4324 mm)
Vehicle data
295
Technical data
Z
All other models
Vehicle width
includingexterior
mirrors
79.0 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height
Vehicle height
when opening/clos-
ing theroof
61.06in(1551mm)
Wheelbase
95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius
34.5 ft (10.52 m)
296
Vehicle data
Technical data
297

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Mercedes-SLC-2018

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes SLC 2018 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes SLC 2018 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,52 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes SLC 2018

Mercedes SLC 2018 Aanvulling / aanpassing - English - 190 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info